Home

Q-Logic 5600 Switch User Manual

1. Add Members to an Alias Remove Members from an Alias Connection Security Configuration Managing SSL and SSH Services Displaying SSL and SSH Services Creating an SSL Security Certificate Device Security Configuration Displaying Security Database Information Configured Security Set Information Active Security Set Information Security Set Membership Information Group Membership Information Security Database Modification History Security Database Limits Configuring the Security Database Modifying the Security Database Resetting the Security Database Managing Security Sets Create a Security Set Delete a Security Set Rename a Security Set Copy a Security Set Add Groups to a Security Set Remove Groups from a Security Set Activate a Security Set Deactivate a Security Set Managing Groups 0000 Create a Group Delete a Group 2 Rename aGroup Copy a Group 242204 deeseeee0exale Add Members to a Group Modify a Group Member Remove Members from a Group RADIUS Server Configuration Displaying RADIUS Server Information Configuring a RADIUS Server on the Switch 9 2 9 2 9 4 9 5 9 5 9 6 9 6 9 7 9 9 9 10 9 10 9 10 9
2. 59263 01 A 14 167 14 Command Reference Show Port XX QLOGIC ee 14 168 Table 14 40 Show Port Parameters Continued LIP_F8_AL_PS LIP_F7_F7 LIP_F8_F7 Login LoginStatus Logout LongFrameslIn LoopTimeouts LossOfSync LostFrames LostRRDYs MaxCredit MediaSpeeds MediaPartNumber MediaRevision MediaType MediaVendor MediaVendor D OperationalState PerfTuningMode PortID Entry Description This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_Port identi fied by AL_PS A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire a valid AL_PA A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a loop failure has been detected at the receiver Number of device logins Device login status for the port Loggedin or NotLoggedIn Number of device logouts that have occurred on the port Number of incidents when one or more frames that are greater than the maximum size were received A two 2 second timeout as specified by FC AL 2 Number of synchronization losses gt 100 ms detected by this port A loss of synchronization is detected by the receipt of an invalid transmission word Number of incidents of lost frames Number of incidents of lost Receiver_Ready R_RDY primi tives Maximum number of port buffer credits Possible transmission speeds for the port Transceiver vendor part number Transceiver revision Media physical variant The variant indicates speed media
3. 12 7 Creating a Profile o2 2s200 2ske0 Weadeetedu sn wante pind ease 12 9 Deleting a Profile ccacse ed Se eeb bese bave eeGeee teens bo wees 12 10 Modifying a PIGilens 4 vente po05 betwee se ela ietdad auras es 12 11 Renaming a Profile 2 cssdenexecesteaweiewcadaeaeeanacbiees 12 12 COpyini a rronle 2tt2s tte aedohlsGedteSt eet Ve siweseesae oes 12 12 Adding a Data Capture Configuration 0000 eee ee 12 13 Modifying a Data Capture Configuration 000 12 14 Deleting a Data Capture Configuration 0 00000ee 12 15 Testing a Call Home Profile 0 0 0 c cee ee 12 15 Changing SMTP Servers s ccsccicesesedoiue eteeae Seebbedebawe 12 16 Clearing the Call Home Message Queue 0022 eee eee 12 16 Resetting the Call Home Database 00000 eee 12 16 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration Managing the SNMP Service 0 020s 13 2 Displaying SNMP Information saci centddeecd seecdemhete bows 13 3 Modifying the SNMP Configuration 0 00 c cee eee 13 4 Resetting the SNMP Configuration 0 00 0 c eee eee 13 5 Managing the SNMP Version 3 Configuration 000005 13 6 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide TOO aaa 14 59263 01 A Create an SNMP Version 3 User Account 0 05 13 7 Display SNMP Version 3 User Accounts saana anaana 13
4. 5 GL 0 16 None 0 0 6 GL 0 16 None 0 0 7 GL 0 16 None 0 0 8 GL 0 16 None 0 0 9 GL 0 16 None 0 0 20 G 0 16 None None None ai G 0 16 None None None 22 G 0 16 None None None 23 G 0 16 None None None Donor Group Credit Pool 59263 01 A 6 15 6 Port Configuration XKX Testing a Port QLOGIC SSS SSS ee Notes 6 16 59263 01 A XX eo Kel c leq Zoning Configuration This section describes the following tasks Displaying Zoning Database Information Configuring the Zoning Database Modifying the Zoning Database Saving the Active and Merged Zone Sets Resetting the Zoning Database Managing Zone Sets Managing Zones Managing Aliases Consider device access needs within the fabric Access is controlled by the use of zoning Some zoning strategies include the following m Separate devices by operating system m Separate devices that have no need to communicate with other devices in the fabric or have classified data m Separate devices into department administrative or other functional group m Reserve a path and its bandwidth from one port to another A zone is anamed group of ports or devices Members of the same zone can communicate with each other and transmit outside the zone but cannot receive inbound traffic from outside the zone Zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery and inbound traffic Zoning is hardware enforced only when a port device is a member of no more than eigh
5. 59263 01 A 12 1 12 Call Home Configuration XKX Call Home Concepts QLOGIC ee Call Home Requirements In addition to enabling the Call Home service you must also do the following to ensure that email messages can be sent 12 2 Configure the Call Home service The Call Home service configuration consists of primary and secondary SMTP server specifications and contact information You must enable and specify an address and service port for at least one SMTP server Refer to Configuring the Call Home Service on page 12 5 Configure the Call Home database The Call Home database consists of up to 25 Call Home profiles Each profile defines the following J Event severity levels Alarm Critical Warn that will initiate an email message Q Email message format and subject Oh Email recipients Multiple profiles make it possible to notify different audiences based on any combination of event severity message format short or full or message length You configure profiles using the Profile command within a Callhome Edit session Refer to Managing the Call Home Database on page 12 6 Ensure that each switch that is to support Call Home email notification has its own Ethernet connection Enter the Callhome Test command to test your Call Home service and database configurations Refer to Testing a Call Home Profile on page 12 15 59263 01 A xX 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Call Home Conce
6. Clears the security database and deactivates the active security set The security configuration value autosave and fabric binding remain unchanged services Resets the switch services configuration to the default values as described in Table 14 16 snmp Resets the SNMP configuration settings to the factory default values Refer to Table 14 14 for SNMP configuration default values 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Reset a switch Resets the switch without a power on self test This is the default This reset disrupts traffic and does the following m Activates the pending firmware m Closes all management sessions m Clears the event log To save the event log before resetting refer to the Set Log command on page 14 101 To reset the switch with a power on self test refer to the Hardreset command on page 14 37 To reset the switch without disrupting traffic refer to the Hotreset command on page 14 40 NOTE The following files are deleted from the switch during a switch reset E Firmware image files that have not been unpacked Configuration backup files E Support files system Resets the system configuration settings to the factory default values as described in Table 14 17 NOTE Because this keyword changes network parameters the workstation could lose communication with the switch m This keyword does not affect installed license keys zoning Clears
7. LSDB Xchg timer set 59263 01 A 14 153 14 Command Reference XX Show LSDB QLOGIC EE Show LSDB Displays Link State database information Authority None Syntax show Isdb Examples The following is an example of the Show LSDB command SANbox gt show lsdb Link State Database Information LsID 34 Age 1176 Incarnation 0x800000e5 NeighborDomain 36 LocalPort 6 RemotePort 7 Cost 500 NeighborDomain 35 LocalPort 16 RemotePort 16 Cost 100 NeighborDomain 35 LocalPort 18 RemotePort 19 Cost 100 NeighborDomain 35 LocalPort 7 RemotePort 7 Cost 500 NeighborDomain 35 LocalPort 5 RemotePort 4 Cost 500 Local Domain LsID 35 Age 1166 Incarnation 0x800000cc NeighborDomain 34 LocalPort 16 RemotePort 16 Cost 100 NeighborDomain 34 LocalPort 19 RemotePort 18 Cost 100 NeighborDomain 36 LocalPort 5 RemotePort 4 Cost 250 NeighborDomain 34 LocalPort 7 RemotePort 7 Cost 500 NeighborDomain 34 LocalPort 4 RemotePort 5 Cost 500 Route OutPort 18 Hops 1 Cost 100 LsID 36 Age 1162 Incarnation 0x80000046 NeighborDomain 34 LocalPort 7 RemotePort 6 Cost 500 NeighborDomain 35 LocalPort 4 RemotePort 5 Cost 250 Route OutPort 16 Hops 2 Cost 350 14 154 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Media a Show Media NOTE Authority Syntax Keywords Notes 59263 01 A This command requires the SANdoctor license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized main
8. Location lt sysLocation undefined gt Description SANbox 5802V FC Switch ObjectID Ie3i601 451 3873 1149 AuthFailureTrap True ProxyEnabled True SNMPv3Enabled False The following is an example of the Show Setup Snmp Trap command SANbox gt show setup snmp trap 1 SNMP Information TraplAddress 10 0 0 254 TraplPort 162 TraplSeverity warning TraplVersion 2 TraplEnabled False 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Setup System _ _ Show Setup System Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Displays network logging NTP server and timer parameters on the switch None show setup system dns ipv4 ipv6 logging ntp timers dns Displays DNS host name configuration parameters To display all system configuration parameters omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 31 for descriptions of the DNS host name configuration parameters ipv4 Displays switch IPv4 Ethernet configuration parameters To display all system configuration parameters omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 32 for descriptions of the IPv4 Ethernet configuration parameters ipv6 Displays switch IP version 6 Ethernet configuration parameters To display all system configuration parameters omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 33 for descriptions of the IP version 6 Ethernet configuration parameters logging Displays event logging configuration parameters To display all system configuration parameters omit the keyword Re
9. Please select a capture entry from the list above q to quit 1 The selected capture entry has been removed from profile Tech_Support_Center This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command Testing a Call Home Profile Enter the Callhome Test Profile command to test a Call Home profile as shown in the following example This command generates a test message and routes it to the email recipients specified in the profile SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome test profile group4 A callhome profile test has been started A notification with the test result will appear on the screen when the test has completed SANbox admin gt Test for Callhome Profile group4 Passed 12 Call Home Configuration AK Changing SMTP Servers QLOGIC E ee Changing SMTP Servers The Call Home service configuration enables you to specify a primary anda secondary SMTP server to which the switch connects The active server is the server that receives messages from the switch By default the primary SMTP server is the active server Should the active server lose connection control passes automatically to the other server You can explicitly change the active server by entering the Callhome Changeover command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox gt callhome edit SANbox gt admin c
10. ProtectionDesired l ah l discard 2 none 3 ipsec select one transport mode only Authentication Header 2 esp Encapsulating Security Payload 3 both espRuleLevel The security policy has been created l default 2 use 3 require This configuration must be saved with the ipsec save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the ipsec cancel command 14 56 fe80 2c0 ddff fe03 d4cl fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 any 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Lip aT Lip Reinitializes the specified loop port Authority Admin session Syntax lip port_number Keywords port_number The number of the port to be reinitialized Ports are numbered beginning with 0 Examples The following is an example of the Lip command SANbox admin gt lip 2 59263 01 A 14 57 14 Command Reference XX Logout QLOGIC E Logout Closes the Telnet session Authority None Syntax logout Notes You can also press Control D to close the Telnet session 14 58 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Passwd ey Passwd Changes a user account s password Authority Admin account name and an Admin session to change another account s password you can change you own password without an Admin session Syntax passwd account_name Keywords account_name The user account name To change the password for an account name other than your own you must open
11. gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt capture edit Capture Entries for Profile Tech_Support_Center Index TimeOfDay DayOfWeek Interval 1 02 00 Sat 1 weeks Please select a capture entry from the list above q to quit 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Value press ENTER to accept the default q to quit TimeOfDay HH MM 02 00 DayOfWeek Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sat Interval decimal value 1 26 weeks 1 The selected capture entry has been edited for profile Tech_Support_Center This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command 12 14 59263 01 A XKX 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Testing a Call Home Profile a Deleting a Data Capture Configuration Enter the Capture Remove command to delete a data capture configuration from the Tech_Support_Center profile as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt capture remove Capture Entries for Profile Tech_Support_Center Index TimeOfDay DayOfWeek Interval l 02 00 Sat 1 weeks
12. Call Home Concepts QLOGIC Me The following is an example of a full text email including profile and SNMP contact information From john doe work com mailto john doe work com Sent Wednesday July 25 2007 5 03 PM Subject CallHome Test Alarm generated on Switch_8 See S sS55 Event Details SwitchName Switch_8_83 215 SwitchIP 10 20 30 40 SwitchWWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 0c 66 2 Level Alarm Text CALLHOME TEST PROFILE MESSAGE ID 8B00 0002 Time Wed Jul 25 17 02 40 343 CDT 2007 e Switch Location Room 123 Rack 9 Bay 3 BRS Contact Information George Smith 12345 4th Street City State 952 999 9999 george smith work com Technical Support Interface The Tech_Support_Center profile provides a way to collect and send switch status and trend data periodically by e mail to specified technical support resources To use this feature you must create a profile named Tech_Support_Center The Capture command enables you to add instructions to the Tech_Support_Center profile to specify the frequency with which to e mail this data For more information refer to Adding a Data Capture Configuration on page 12 13 12 4 59263 01 A Da 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Configuring the Call Home Service a Configuring the Call Home Service Enter the Set Setup Callhome command in an Admin session to configure the Call Home service as shown in the following example Refer to Table 14 25 fora description of the
13. Command Reference QLOGIC Firmware Install ss aa Firmware Install Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch installs the firmware then resets the switch to activate the firmware This is disruptive The command prompts you for the following The file transfer protocol FTP or TFTP IP address or DNS host name of the remote host m An account name and password on the remote host FTP only Pathname for the firmware image file Authority Admin session Syntax firmware install Examples The following is an example of the Firmware Install command using FTP SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt firmware install The switch will be reset This process will cause a disruption to I O traffic Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions including any Telnet sessions When the firmware activation is complete you may log in to the switch again Do you want to continue y n y Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command FIP r TEEP ftp User Account johndoe IP Address gt 10 0 0 254 Source Filename 7 4 00 xx_epc About to install image Do you want to continue y n y Connected to 10 0 0 254 10 0 0 254 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 331 Password required for johndoe Password XXXXXXXXX 230 User johndoe logged in bin 200 Type set to I verbose Verbose mode off This may take several seconds The switch will now reset
14. Configures the Call Home database for managing e mail notifications of fabric problems Authority Admin session Syntax set setup callhome Prompts you in a line by line fashion to configure the Call Home database Table 14 26 describes the Call Home configuration fields Table 14 25 Call Home Service Configuration Settings Entry Description PrimarySMTPServerAddr IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the primary SMTP server The default is 0 0 0 0 PrimarySMTPServerPort Service port number that the primary SMTP server is monitoring for SMTP agents The default is 25 PrimarySMTPServerEnabled Enables True or disables False the primary SMTP server The default is False SecondarySMTPServerAddr IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the secondary SMTP server The default is 0 0 0 0 SecondarySMTPServerPort Service port number that the secondary SMTP server is monitoring for SMTP agents The default is 25 SecondarySMTPServerEnabled Enable True or disable False the secondary SMTP server The default is False ContactEmailAddress E mail address of the person to be notified to respond to the e mail message The format is account domain This information is included in the e mail message when the profile format is FullText PhoneNumber Contact phone number to be included in the e mail message text This information is included in the e mail message when the profile format is FullText StreetAddress
15. Displays all warning events Critical Displays all critical events Eport3 Displays all events related to E_Ports Mgmtserver Displays all events related to the management server Nameserver Displays all events related to the name server Port port_number Displays all events related to the port given by port_number SNMP Displays all events related to SNMP Switch Displays all events related to switch management Zoning Displays all events related to zoning 59263 01 A 14 151 14 Command Reference XX Show Log QLOGIC a level Displays the severity settings for event logging and the setting for the display level options Displays the options that are available for configuring event logging and automatic display to the screen Refer to the Set Log command on page 14 101 for information about how to configure event logging and display level port Displays the ports being monitored for events If an event occurs that is of the defined level and on a defined component but is not on a defined port no entry is made in the log settings Displays the current filter settings for component severity level port and display level This command is equivalent to executing the following commands separately Show Log Component Show Log Level and Show Log Port Examples The following is an example of the Show Log Component command SANbox gt show log component Current settings for log Filte
16. EthIPv6GatewayAddress lt undefined gt New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none EthIPv6NetworkEnable True False EthIPv 6 Discovery 1 Static 2 Dhcpv6 3 Ndp EthIPv6 NetworkAddress IPv6 Address Mask Length format EthIPv6 GatewayAddress IPv6 Address Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n 14 128 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Setup System The following is an example of the Set Setup System Logging command SANbox admin gt set setup system logging A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values LocalLogEnabled True RemoteLogEnabled False RemoteLogHostAddress 10 0 0 254 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none LocalLogEnabled True False RemoteLogEnabled True False RemoteLogHostAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n The following is an example of the Set Setup System Ntp command SANbox admin gt set setup system ntp A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If
17. False GUIMgmt Enabled True False True SSLEnabled True False False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True False True SNMPEnabled True False True NTPEnabled True False False CIMEnabled True False False FTPEnabled True False True Mgmt ServerEnabled True False True CallHomeEnabled True False True Do you want to save and activate this services setup y n n 5 Switch Configuration AK Managing Switch Configurations QLOGIC Mee Managing Switch Configurations The switch configuration determines the basic operational characteristics of the switch A switch can save up to 10 configurations including the default configuration named Default Config The current switch operating characteristics are determined by the active configuration Only one configuration can be active at one time Each switch configuration contains switch port port threshold alarm and zoning configuration components Managing Switch Configurations describes the following tasks Displaying a List of Switch Configurations Activating a Switch Configuration Copying a Switch Configuration Deleting a Switch Configuration Modifying a Switch Configuration Backing Up and Restoring a Switch Configuration Displaying a List of Switch Configurations Enter the Config List command to display the configurations stored on the switch as show in the following example Notice that the Config List command does not require an Admin session SANbox
18. Fault Code DIAGS_ERR_DATA_VERIFY 0xle Loops 1 Blade Asic Port 0 0 0 59263 01 A 14 185 14 Command Reference XX Show Timezone LOGIC ee Show Timezone Displays the current time zone setting Authority None Syntax show timezone Examples The following is an example of the Show Timezone command SANbox gt show timezone America Chicago 14 186 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Topology re Show Topology Authority Syntax Keywords Examples Displays information about devices connected to the switch None show topology port_number port_number Displays the devices connected to the port given by port_number The following is an example of the Show Topology command SANbox gt show topology Unique ID Key A ALPA D Domain ID P Port ID Port Local Local Remote Remote Number Type PortWwWN Type NodewwNn 5 F 20 05 00 c0 dd 00 bd ec N 202002 002 00709 22 1e 93 10 E 20 0a 00 c0 dd 00 bd ec E 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 80 21 The following is an example of the Show Topology command for port 1 SANbox gt show topology 1 Local Link Information PortNumber 1 PortID 650100 PortWWN 20 01 00 ic0tddi00 91 11 PortType p Remote Link Information Device 0 NodewwN 50 80 02 00 00 06 d5 38 PortType NL Description NULL IPv4Address 0 0 0 0 IPv 6Address c00 1234 5678 9abc def0 1234 5678 9abc Device 1 NodewwNn 20 00 00 20 37 2b 08 c9 PortType NL Descrip
19. FrameSize decimal value 40 2148 256 DataPattern 32 bit hex value or Default Default StopOnError True False True LoopForever True False False Do you want to start the test y n n y The test has been started A notification with the test result s will appear on the screen when the test has completed SANbox admin gt Test for port 1 Passed 59263 01 A 6 13 6 Port Configuration AK Testing a Port QLOGIC E C CTT Offline Tests for Ports An offline test is a disruptive test that exercises the port connections You must place the port in the diagnostics state using the Set Port command before starting the test There are two types of offline test internal loopback and external loopback m An internal loopback test exercises the internal port connections m An external loopback test exercises the port and its transceiver A transceiver with a loopback plug is required for the port The following example performs an offline test SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set port 1 state diagnostics SANbox admin gt test port 1 offline internal A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so LoopCount decimal value 1 4294967295 429496729 FrameSize deci
20. PlanarPartNumber Unknown SwitchSymbolicName SANbox SwitchWwN 10 00 00 cO dd 02 cc 16 SystemDescription SANbox 5802V FC Switch SystemObjectID 153 6 124 1 38673 1 9 59263 01 A 14 173 14 Command Reference XX Show Setup Radius QLOGIC E Show Setup Radius Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 14 174 Displays RADIUS server information None show setup radius common server server _number common Displays the configuration parameters that are common for all RADIUS servers To display common and server specific information omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 26 for a description of the common configuration parameters server server_number Displays the configuration parameters for the RADIUS server given by server_number server _number is an integer corresponding to a configured server To display common and server specific information omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 27 for a description of the server specific configuration parameters The following is an example of the Show Setup Radius Common command SANbox gt show setup radius common Radius Information DeviceAuthOrder Local UserAuthOrder Local TotalServers 2 The following is an example of the Show Setup Radius Server command SANbox gt show setup radius server 2 Radius Information Server 2 ServerIPAddress bacd 1234 bacd 1234 bacd 1234 bacd 1234 ServerUDPPort 1812 DeviceAuthServer True UserAuthServer True AccountingServe
21. Results of the Power on Self Test Number of licensed ports Full Fabric indicates that the switch operates with the standard Fibre Channel port types G GL F FL E 14 133 14 Command Reference Show About XX QLOGIC eee LL Examples SANbox gt show about The following is an example of the Show About command KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKK KKK HK Command Line Interface SHell CLISH KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKK KK SystemDescription HostName EthIPv4NetworkAddress EthIPv6NetworkAddress MACAddress WorldWideName ChassisSerialNumber SymbolicName ActiveSWVersion ActiveTimestamp POSTStatus LicensedPorts SwitchMode SANbox 5802V FC Switch lt undefined gt 10 20 11 192 00 c0 dd 00 71 ee 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 71 ed FAM033100024 SANbox V7 4 X X XX XX day month date time year Passed 24 Full Fabric 14 134 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Alarm a Show Alarm Authority Syntax Keywords Notes Examples Displays the alarm log and session output stream display setting None show alarm settings settings Displays the status of the parameter that controls the display of alarms in the session output stream This parameter is set using the Set Alarm command The alarm log is cleared when the switch is reset or power cycled The following is an exampl
22. Send Zone Merge Request 335 day month date time year I Eport Port 0 8 LSDB Xchg timer set You can also filter the event log display with the Show Log Display command and customize the messages that display automatically in the output stream a Filtering the Event Log Display Controlling Messages in the Output Stream Filtering the Event Log Display You can customize what events are displayed according to the component or severity level Enter the Show Log Display command to filter the events in the display You can choose from the following severity levels and component events Informative events Warning events Critical events E Port events Management server events Name server events Port events Switch management events Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP events Zoning events The following example filters the event log display for critical events SANbox gt show log display critical 59263 01 A H 11 Event Log Configuration AK Managing the Event Log Configuration QLOGIC eee Controlling Messages in the Output Stream Enter the Set Log Display command in an Admin session to specify the severity level filter to use to determine what messages are automatically displayed on the screen when they occur Alarms are always included in the output stream The following example includes warning and critical level messages in the output stream SANbox admin gt set
23. The default is False Hash The hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secret sent by the MS group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 Secret Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Hash function for authentication with MS group members The string has the fol lowing lengths depending on the Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte E SHA 1 hash 20 byte copy group_source group_destination Creates a new group named group_destination and copies the membership into the new group from the group given by group_source create group type Creates a group with the name given by group with the type given by type A group name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The security database supports a maximum of 16 groups If you omit type ISL is used type can be one of the following isl Configures security for attachments to other switches Port Configures security for attachments to N_Port devices ms Configures security for attachments to N_Port devices that are issuing management server commands 14 32 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Group COO a 59263 01 A edit group member Initiates an editing session in which to change the attributes of a worldwide name given by member in a group given by group Member attributes that can be changed are described in Table 14 5 Table 14
24. To perform a nondisruptive activation refer to Custom Firmware Installation on page 5 24 5 20 59263 01 A x 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Installing Firmware a Non disruptive Activation You can load and activate firmware upgrades on an operating switch without disrupting data traffic or having to re initialize attached devices If the non disruptive activation fails you will usually be prompted to try again later Otherwise the switch will perform a disruptive activation A disruptive activation interrupts Fibre Channel data traffic on the switch while a non disruptive activation does not For information about non disruptive firmware versions see the Firmware Release Notes To ensure a successful non disruptive activation you should first satisfy the following conditions m Nochanges are being made to switches in the fabric including powering up powering down disconnecting or connecting ISLs changing switch configurations or installing firmware No port on the switch is in the diagnostic state No Zoning Edit sessions are open on the switch No changes are being made to attached devices including powering up powering down disconnecting connecting and HBA configuration changes m Fora fabric in which one or more switches are running firmware prior to version 7 4 only one Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 session can be open Install firmware on one switch at a time in the fabric If you are installing firmwa
25. WWN None n Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command Resetting a Port Enter the Reset Port command to reinitialize one or more ports and to discard any temporary changes that have been made to the administrative state or link speed The following example reinitializes port 1 SANbox gt reset port 1 6 10 59263 01 A XKX 6 Port Configuration QLOGIC Configuring Port Threshold Alarms rr Configuring Port Threshold Alarms The switch can monitor a set of port errors and generates alarms based on user defined sample windows and thresholds These port errors include the following Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors Decode errors ISL connection count Device login errors Device logout errors Loss of signal errors You make changes to the port threshold alarms by modifying the switch configuration as described in Modifying a Switch Configuration on page 5 13 Refer to Table 14 23 for a description of the port alarm threshold parameters The switch will down a port if an alarm condition is not cleared within three consecutive sampling windows by default 30 seconds Reset the port to bring it back online An alarm is cleared when the threshold monitoring detects that the error rate has fallen below the falling trigger 6
26. authentication using the Chal lenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP The default is None Primary Hash The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Pri mary Secret sent by the Port group member The hash functions are MD5 or SHA 1 If the Port group member does not support the Pri mary Hash the switch will use the Secondary Hash Primary Secret Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for authentication with the Port group member The string has the fol lowing lengths depending on the Primary Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte m SHA 1 hash 20 byte Secondary Hash Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret sent by the Port group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 The Secondary Hash is used when the Primary Hash is not avail able on the Port group member The Primary Hash and the Second ary Hash cannot be the same Secondary Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for Secret authentication The string has the following lengths depending on the Secondary Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte mE SHA 1 hash 20 byte 14 Command Reference XX Group LOGIC SST Table 14 4 MS Group Member Attributes Attribute Description Member Port worldwide name for the N_ Port device that would attach to the switch CTAuthentication Common Transport CT authentication Enables True or dis ables False authentication for MS group members
27. can have the following formats m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex Enter addresses with or without the Ox prefix m 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XX IXXIXX XXIXXIXXIXX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXXXAXX hop_count Maximum number of hops before stopping the trace If you omit hop_count 20 hops is used 59263 01 A 14 23 14 Command Reference XX Fctrace LOGIC ee Examples The following is an example of the Fctrace command SANbox gt fctrace 970400 970e00 hops 5 36 bytes from 0x970400 to 0x970e00 5 hops max Domain Ingress Port WWN Port Egress Port WWN Port 97 20 04 00 c0 dd 02 cc 2e 4 20 0e 00 c0 dd 02 cc 2e 14 97 20 0e 00 c0 dd 02 cc 2e 14 20 04 00 c0 dd 02 cc 2e 4 14 24 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Feature re Feature Authority Syntax Keywords Notes Examples 59263 01 A Adds license key features to the switch and displays the license key feature log To order a license key contact your switch distributor or your authorized reseller Upgrading a switch is not disruptive nor does it require a switch reset Admin session for Add keyword only feature add license_key log add license_key Adds the feature that corresponds to the value given by license_key license_key is case insensitive log Displays a list of installed license key features The following license keys are available
28. change 14 59 default 2 2 File Transfer Protocol 2 7 switch 14 59 user account 3 4 performance tuning 14 88 Ping command 14 60 example 4 6 policy 4 8 copy 4 14 create 4 11 delete 4 12 modify 4 13 rename 4 14 port administrative state 14 108 binding 6 9 14 94 14 141 configuration 6 1 14 86 configuration display 14 138 configuration parameters 6 2 counters 14 107 external test 14 195 14 198 group 9 1 9 12 14 32 information 6 1 initialize 14 68 internal test 14 195 14 198 modify operating characteristics 6 6 online test 14 195 14 198 operational information 6 3 14 166 performance 6 5 14 162 14 163 performance tuning 14 88 reset 6 10 speed 14 107 testing 6 13 threshold alarms 6 4 6 11 Port Activation license 14 25 POST See Power On Self Test Power On Self Test log 14 171 preference routing 14 88 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide re process identifier 5 4 processing time 5 4 profile copy 12 12 14 61 create 12 9 14 61 delete 12 10 14 62 edit 14 62 modify 12 11 rename 12 12 14 62 Tech_Support_Center 12 4 12 16 test 12 15 Profile command 14 61 Copy example 12 12 Create example 12 9 Delete example 12 10 Edit example 12 11 Rename example 12 12 Ps command 5 4 14 65 Q QuickTools 14 117 Quit command 14 66 R RADIUS See Remote Dial In User Service RADIUS server configuration 8 2 10 1 10 3 14 109 14 112 14 113 configuratio
29. creation date Should the original certificate become invalid enter the Create Certificate command to create a new one as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt create certificate The current date and time is day mon date hh mm ss UTC yyyy This is the time used to stamp onto the certificate Is the date and time correct y n n y Certificate generation successful To ensure the creation of a valid certificate be sure that the switch and the workstation time and date are the same Refer to Setting the Date and Time on page 5 17 59263 01 A 8 3 8 Connection Security Configuration XKX Creating an SSL Security Certificate QLOGIC ee Notes 8 4 59263 01 A XX eo Kel c leq 9 Device Security Configuration NOTE Device security requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller This section describes the following tasks Displaying Security Database Information Configuring the Security Database Modifying the Security Database Resetting the Security Database Managing Security Sets Managing Groups Device security provides for the authorization and authentication of devices that you attach to a switch You can configure a switch with a group of devices against which the switch authorizes new attachments by devices other switches or devices issuing management server commands Device security is d
30. delete association edit association list association rename association_old association_new copy association_source association_destination Creates a new association named association_destination and copies the configuration into it from the association given by association_source association_destination must not begin with DynamicSA_ which is reserved for dynamic associations You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes create association Creates an association with the name given by association An association name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 32 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The Security Association database supports a maximum of 512 user defined associations You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes Table 14 6 Association Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Description Description of the association SourceAddress IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the host switch or gateway from which data originates DestinationAddress IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the host switch or gateway receiving data If you spec ified an IP address for the SourceAddress the Des tinationAddress must use the same IP version format 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Ipsec Association OOOO _ a Table 14 6 Association Configuration P
31. images user images password images 3 Set binary mode and use the Put command to upload the file config_switch_169 ftp gt put config_switch_169 configdata XXXxXxX bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit For more information about reinstallation backup and restore and creating support and log files m Refer to Installing Firmware on page 5 20 for information about installing firmware m Refer to Backing Up and Restoring a Switch Configuration on page 5 14 for information about backing up and restoring a switch configuration m Refer to Creating and Downloading a Log File on page 11 7 for information about creating a log file m Refer to Creating a Support File on page 2 6 for information about creating a support file 2 8 59263 01 A XX eo Rel c eq 3 User Account Configuration User accounts and their respective passwords are the first line of switch security A user account consists of an account name an authority level and an expiration date Switches come from the factory with certain user accounts defined for special purposes Table 3 1 describes these accounts their passwords and their purposes These accounts cannot be deleted from the switch Table 3 1 Factory User Accounts User Account Password Purpose Name admin password Provides access to the Telnet server for managing the switch Admin is the only account name that has per mission to create and modify other user a
32. or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values EthIPv4NetworkEnable True EthIPv4NetworkDiscovery Static EthIPv4NetworkAddress 10 20 116 133 EthIPv4NetworkMask 255 255 2550 EthIPv4GatewayAddress 10 20 116 1 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none EthIPv4NetworkEnable True False EthIPv4NetworkDiscovery l1 Static 2 Bootp 3 Dhcp 4 Rarp EthIPv4NetworkAddress dot notated IP Address 10 20 30 40 EthIPv4NetworkMask dot notated IP Address 255 0 0 0 EthIPv4GatewayAddress dot notated IPv4 Address 10 20 30 254 Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n y 59263 01 A 4 3 4 Network Configuration Configuring the Ethernet Port XX QLOGIC ee IP Version 6 Configuration The switch supports IP version 6 which includes the following Network discovery method m IP address m IP gateway address The network discovery method determines how the switch acquires its IP address The IP address can come from the IP address static that resides on the switch from a DHCP server or it can be learned from a router through the Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP To configure the IP version 6 parameters enter the Set Setup System lpv6 command SANbox admin gt set setup system ipv6 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the If you wish to terminate this process press q
33. q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Configuring Port Number 20 AdminState 1 Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics 4 Down Online LinkSpeed 10 10Gb s 10Gb s PortType G F G SymPortName string max 32 chars 10G 20 DeviceScanEnable True False True ForceOfflineRSCN True False False AutoPerfTuning True False Fales LCFEnable True False False MFSEnable True False False ViIEnable True False False MSEnable True False True TOSt reamGuard Enable Disable Auto Disabled Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 59263 01 A 14 91 14 Command Reference XX Set Config Security QLOGIC E CO Set Config Security Authority Syntax 14 92 NOTE This command requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Use the Feature command to install a license key Configures the security database for the automatic saving of changes to the active security set and fabric binding The changes you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save command Admin session and a Config Edit session set config security This command initiates an editing se
34. zone member _list Specifies one or more ports devices given by members to add to the zone named zone Use a lt space gt to delimit aliases and ports devices in member_list A Zone can have a maximum of 2000 members member_list can have any of the following formats Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex m 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XX IXX IXX XXIXX IXXIXXIXX m Alias name The application verifies that the members format is correct but does not validate that such a member exists You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes copy zone_source zone_destination Creates a new zone named zone_destination and copies the membership into it from the zone given by zone_source You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes create Zone Creates a zone with the name given by zone An zone name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The zoning database supports a maximum of 2000 zones You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes 14 205 14 Command Reference XX Zone LOGIC e delete zone Deletes the specified zone given by zone from the zoning database If the zone is a compone
35. 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 7K 7K 0 245 245 a 136M 58K 136M 68K IK 70K 8 IKR 136M 136M 245 68K 68K 9 58K 0 58K 1K 0 1K 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 TI 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 7K 7K 0 245 245 E5 136M 58K 136M 68K IK 70K 16 47M 23K 47M 23K 726 24K 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 23K 47M 47M 726 23K 24K 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following is an example of the Show Perf Byte command SANbox gt show perf byte Displaying bytes sec total Press any key to stop display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37M 58K 0 0 0 0 8K 37M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58K 0 0 0 0 8K 36M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 35M 58K 0 0 0 0 7K 35M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37M 58K 0 0 0 0 8K 37M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58K 0 0 0 0 7K 36M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37M 58K 0 0 0 0 8K 37M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58K 0 0 0 0 8K 36M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58K 0 0 0 0 7K 36M 59263 01 A 14 165 14 Command Reference Show Port XX QLOGIC Be Show Port Authority Syntax Keywords Notes 14 166 Displays operational information for one or more ports None show port port_list port_list The number of the port for which to display information port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 Table 14 40 describes the port parameters Table 14 40 Show Port Parameters Entry Description Admi
36. 1 Ethernet Network IP Mask 255 0 0 0 Ethernet Gateway Address 10 0 0 254 Admin Timeout 30 minutes Inactivity Timeout 0 LocalLogEnabled True RemotelogEnabled False RemoteLogHostAddress 10 0 0 254 NTPClientEnabled False NTPServerAddress 10 0 0 254 EmbeddedGUlEnabled True Table 14 18 Security Configuration Defaults Parameter Default AutoSave True FabricBindingEnabled False PortBindingEnabled False 14 76 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Security a Security Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A NOTE This command requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Use the Feature command to install a license key Opens a Security Edit session in which to manage the security database on a switch Refer to the Group command on page 14 29 and the Securityset command on page 14 81 Admin session The keywords Active History Limits and List are available without an Admin session security active cancel clear edit history limits list restore save active Displays the active security set its groups and group members This keyword does not require an Admin session cancel Closes a Security Edit session without saving changes Use the Edit keyword to open a Security Edit session clear Clears all inactive security sets from the volatile edit copy of the security d
37. 10 9 11 9 11 9 11 9 11 9 11 9 11 9 12 9 12 9 12 9 12 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 14 10 2 10 3 Page vii SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch AK Command Line Interface Guide QLOGIC ee 11 12 13 Page viii Event Log Configuration Starting and Stopping Event Logging 0 0c eee eee ee 11 2 Displaying the Event Log 2 04 22 c0ees ean eee bese iee ae dee ee ewes 11 2 Filtering the Event Log Display 0 00 11 3 Controlling Messages in the Output Stream 11 4 Managing the Event Log Configuration 000 0 eae eee 11 4 Configure the Event Log 02 c eee eee eee 11 4 Display the Event Log Configuration 00000e eee 11 5 Restore the Event Log Configuration 000000 00 11 5 Clearing the Event Log n snaa Sed Fi deed ee heed ee bi acudenaee 11 5 Logging to a Remote HOSt n0i554 083 Betadde4 0G SR a iW ege ee eiSes 11 6 Creating and Downloading a Log File 000 e eee eee 11 7 Call Home Configuration Call Home Concepts i206 cccidges Shee saeshdebeke sedi eae Seeeneks 12 1 Call Home Requirements 0 0c eee eee 12 2 Call Home Messages 000 e ee eee 12 3 Technical Support Interface 0 0 0 12 4 Configuring the Call Home Service 0 000 c eee eee eee 12 5 Managing the Call Home Database 0 00 cece eee 12 6 Displaying Call Home Database Information
38. 10112003 59263 01 A 5 15 5 Switch Configuration AK Managing Switch Configurations QLOGIC Se ee Restoring the Configuration File The restore operation begins with FTP to upload the configuration file from the workstation to the switch then finishes with a Telnet session and the Config Restore command To upload the configuration file config_switch_169_ 10112003 in this case open and FTP session with account name images and password images Transfer the file in binary mode with the Put command as shown in the following example ftp ip_address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt put config_switch_169_10112003 configdata Local file config_switch_169_10112003 Remote file configdata ftp gt quit The restore process replaces all configuration information on the switch and afterwards the switch is automatically reset If the restore process changes the IP address all management sessions are terminated Use the Set Setup System command to return the IP configuration to the values you want To restore the switch open a Telnet session a new IP address may be required then enter the Config Restore command from within an Admin session as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config restore The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration Please confirm y n n y Alarm Msg day month date time year A1005 0021 SM Configuration is being restored this cou
39. 11 Port Configuration Defaults Parameter SFP Port Defaults XPAK Port Defaults Admin State Online Online Link Speed Auto 10 Gbps Port Type GL G Symbolic Name Portn where n is the port 10G n where n is the port number number ALFairness False N A DeviceScanEnabled True True ForceOfflineRSCN False False ARB_FF False N A InteropCredit 0 0 ExtCredit 0 N A FANEnable True N A AutoPerfTuning True True LCFEnable False False MFSEnable False False MSEnable True False NoClose False N A lOStreamGuard Auto Auto ViEnable False False PDISCPingEnable True N A 14 72 59263 01 A XKX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Reset OO a Table 14 12 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Defaults Parameter Default ThresholdMonitoringEnabled False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True E RisingTrigger 25 E FallingTrigger 1 E SampleWindow 10 DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True E RisingTrigger 25 m FallingTrigger 0 E SampleWindow 10 ISLMonitoringEnabled True E RisingTrigger 2 E FallingTrigger 0 E SampleWindow 10 LoginMonitoringEnabled True m RisingTrigger 5 E FallingTrigger 1 E SampleWindow 10 LogoutMonitoringEnabled True E RisingTrigger 5 E FallingTrigger 1 E SampleWindow 10 LOSMonitoringEnabled True E RisingTrigger 100 m FallingTrigger 5 E SampleWindow 10 59263 01 A 14 73 14 Command Reference Reset XX QLOGIC Ce Table 14 13 Zoning Configuration Defaults Parameter Default MergeAuto
40. 13 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration AK Managing the SNMP Version 3 Configuration QLOGIC LLL Modify an SNMP Version 3 User Account To modify an SNMP version 3 user account enter the Snmpv3user Edit command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt snmpv3user edit A list of SNMPV3 user attributes with formatting and current attribute values for the specified SNMPV3 user will follow Enter a new value OR simply press the ENTER key where ever allowed to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER OR Ctrl C key to do so Username 8 32 chars snmpuserl Group 0O ReadOnly 1 ReadWrite ReadWrite 1 Authentication True False True Lt Do you want to save and activate this setup y n n n SNMPV3 user account edited and activated 13 8 59263 01 A XX eo Kel c eq 14 Command Reference This section describes the commands of the CLI and the format in which they are presented The command format presents the following m Access Authority E Syntax and Keywords m Notes and Examples m Command Listing Access Authority The Authority paragraph in each command description indicates what types of sessions are required to enter that command Commands associated with monitoring tasks are available to all account names with no special session requir
41. 70 14 10 Switch Configuration Defaults 0 0 0 ees 14 71 14 11 Port Configuration Defaults 0 eee 14 72 14 12 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Defaults 0 0 00 eee eee 14 73 14 13 Zoning Configuration Defaults 2264 scetc aeifevomane date echiwe ea ehawed 14 74 14 14 SNMP Configuration Defaults 0 0 0c eee 14 74 14 15 RADIUS Configuration Defaults 0 0 0 0 0c ce 14 75 14 16 Switch Services Configuration Defaults 0 0 c eee 14 75 14 17 System Configuration Defaults 0 0 ce eee 14 76 14 18 Security Configuration Defaults 0 0 0 0 eee 14 76 14 19 Port Configuration Parameters 0 0 00 cece een eee eee 14 86 14 20 Security Configuration Parameters 0000 cece eee eee 14 92 14 21 Port Binding Configuration Parameters 0 000 eee 14 94 14 22 Switch Configuration Parameters 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 14 95 14 23 Port Alarm Threshold Parameters 000 cece cette eee 14 97 14 24 Zoning Configuration Parameters 0000 ce tee 14 99 14 25 Call Home Service Configuration SettingS 0 00 cece eee 14 109 14 26 Common RADIUS Configuration Parameters 00 00 e eee eee 14 112 14 27 Specific RADIUS Server Configuration Parameters 00000 eee eeee 14 113 14 28 Switch Services Settings 0 2 0 c eee tees 14 116 14 29 SNMP Common Configuration Parameters 0 000 ce
42. Connection closed by foreign host 59263 01 A 14 27 14 Command Reference XX Firmware Install QLOGIC ee The following is an example of the Firmware Install command using TFTP SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt firmware install The switch will be reset This process will cause a disruption to I O traffic Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions including any Telnet sessions When the firmware activation is complete you may log in to the switch again Do you want to continue y n y Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command FIP or TFTP tftp IP Address i 10 0 0 254 Source Filename 7 4 xx xx_epc About to install image Do you want to continue y n y Connected to 10 0 0 254 10 0 0 254 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready bin 200 Type set to I verbose Verbose mode off This may take several seconds The switch will now reset Connection closed by foreign host 14 28 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Group re Group Authority Syntax 59263 01 A NOTE This command requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Use the Feature command to install a license key Creates groups manages membership within the group and manages the membership of groups in security sets Admin session and a Secu
43. Contact street address to be included in the e mail message text This information is included in the e mail message when the profile format is Full Text 59263 01 A 14 109 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup Callhome QLOGIC ee Notes 14 110 Reply ToEmailAddress E mail address that is to receive replies to the out ThrottleDupsEnabled Enables True or disables False the throttling of Table 14 25 Call Home Service Configuration Settings Entry Description FromEmailAddress E mail address that is defined as the sending address in the From field of the e mail message The format is account domain This field is required Undeliverable messages are returned to this address unless overridden by the ReplayToEmailAddress parameter bound e mail message The format is account domain This parameter overrides the FromEmailAddress parameter duplicate e mail messages in the message queue When enabled duplicate e mail messages that enter the queue within 15 seconds of the original are suppressed The original message is sent with a report of the number of suppressed duplicates The Callhome service must be active to support Call Home e mail notification Refer to the Set Setup Services command on page 14 116 The primary secondary or both SMTP servers must be properly addressed and enabled on the switch to activate Call Home e mail notification If both SMTP servers are enabled the p
44. Creates the security set with the name given by security_set A security set name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The security database supports a maximum of four security sets deactivate Deactivates the active security set Close the Security Edit session before using this keyword delete security_set Deletes the security set given by security_set If the specified security set is active the command is suspended until the security set is deactivated groups security_set Displays all groups that are members of the security set given by security_setl This keyword is available without an Admin session list Displays a list of all security sets This keyword is available without an Admin session remove security_set group Removes a group given by group from the security set given by security_set If security_set is the active security set the group will not be removed until the security set has been deactivated rename security_set_old security_set_new Renames the security set given by security_set_old to the name given by security_set_new Notes Refer to the Group command on page 14 29 for information about creating and managing groups 14 82 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Securityset T_T Examples The following is an example of the Securityset Active command SANbox gt securityse
45. Delete command SANbox admin gt user del user3 The user account will be deleted Please confirm y n n y The following is an example of the User List command SANbox admin gt user list User cim OB sessionl Client cim Logged in Since day month date time year User snmp IB session2 Client Unknown Logged in Since day month date time year User snmp OB session3 Client Unknown Logged in Since day month date time year User admin OB session8 Client 10233321427 Logged in Since day month date time year 59263 01 A 14 203 14 Command Reference XX Whoami LOGIC SSS Whoami Displays the account name session number and switch domain ID for the Telnet session Authority None Syntax whoami Examples The following is an example of the Whoami command SANbox gt whoami User name admin session2 Switch name SANbox Switch domain ID 21 0x15 14 204 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Zone er Zone Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Manages zones and zone membership on a switch Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Refer to the Zoning Edit command on page 14 216 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session The List Members and Zonesets keywords are available without an Admin session zone add zone member _list list members Zone orphans remove zone member_list rename zone_old zone_new zonesets zone add
46. Displays the configuration for the policies given by option If you omit option the command displays the configuration of all active associations option can be one of the following association Displays the configuration for the association given by association active Displays the configuration for all active associations configured Displays the configuration for all user defined associations edited Displays the configuration for all associations that have been modified but not saved rename association_old association_new Renames the association given by association_old to the association given by association_new You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes Dynamic associations cannot be renamed Dynamic associations cannot be renamed 14 48 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Ipsec Association T_T Examples The following is an example of the Ipsec Association Create command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec association create h2h sh sa A list of attributes with formatting will follow Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to skip specifying a value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Required attributes are preceded by an asterisk Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit Description string v
47. Displays the group type for the group given by group This keyword is available without an Admin session Notes Primary and secondary secrets are not included in a switch configuration backup Therefore after restoring a switch configuration you must re enter the primary and secondary secrets Otherwise the switch will isolate because of an authentication failure Refer to the Securityset command on page 14 81 for information about managing groups in security sets 14 34 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Group OO Examples The following is an example of the Group Add command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt security edit SANbox admin security gt group add Group_1l A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value with exception of the Group Member WWN field which is mandatory If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so SecondarySecret 40 hex or 20 ASCII char value Group Name Group_1l Group Type ISL Member WWN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 Authentication None Chap None chap PrimaryHash MD5 SHA 1 MD5 PrimarySecret 32 hex or 16 ASCII char value 012345678 9abcdef SecondaryHash MD5 SHA 1 None None Binding domain ID 1 239 O None 0 Finished configuring attri
48. Enter the Show Media command to display operational information about one or more transceivers as shown in the following example Refer to Table 14 39 fora description of the transceiver information in the Show Media display SANbox gt show media 4 Port Number 4 MediaType 400 M5 SN I MediaVendor FINISAR CORP MediaPartNumber FTRJ8524P2BNL MediaRevision A MediaSerialNumber P6G22RL MediaSpeeds 1Gb s 2Gb s 4Gb s Temp Voltage Tx Bias Tx Pwr Rx Pwr C V mA mW mW Value S132 2333 7 30 0 373 0 000 Status Normal HighWarning Normal Normal LowAlarm HighAlarm 95 00 3 90 17 00 0 637 1 264 HighWarning 90 00 3 70 14 00 0 637 0791 LowWarning 20 00 2 90 2 00 0 082 0 028 LowAlarm 25 00 2 70 1 00 0 073 0 019 Modifying Port Operating Characteristics You can make permanent or temporary changes to port operating characteristics You make permanent port configuration changes using the Set Config Port command These changes are saved in the active configuration and are preserved across switch or port resets The Set Port command makes temporary changes that apply until the next port or switch reset or until you activate a configuration NOTE 8 Gbps SFPs do not support the 1 Gbps setting Setting a port to 1 Gbps that has an 8 Gbps SFP will down the port 59263 01 A xX 6 Port Configuration QLOGIC Modifying Port Operating Characteristics OT The following example permanently changes the port 1 administrative state SAN
49. HighWarning LowWarning LowAlarm Vendor media part number Vender media revision level Vendor media serial number Transmission speed capabilities Temperature in degrees Celsius Supply voltage in Volts The range is 0 6 55 Transmitter laster bias current in milliamps The range is 0 655 Transmitter coupled output power in milliWatts The range is 0 6 55 Received optical power in milliWatts The range is 0 6 55 Measured value State associated with the measured value Normal Value is in the normal operating range HighAlarm Value exceeds the high alarm threshold a a HighWarning Value exceeds the high warning threshold m LowWarning Value is less than the low warning threshold a LowAlarm Value is less than the low alarm threshold Vendor specified threshold above which an alarm is issued Vendor specified threshold above which a warning is issued Vendor specified threshold below which a warning is issued Vendor specified threshold below which an alarm is issued 14 156 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC Examples 14 Command Reference Show Media A O The following is an example of the Show Media command for port 4 SANbox gt show media 4 Port Number 4 MediaType MediaVendor MediaPartNumber MediaRevision MediaSerialNumber MediaSpeeds 400 M5 SN I FINISAR CORP Tx Pwr Rx Pwr Value Status HighAlarm HighWarning LowWarning LowAlarm FTRJ8524P2BNL
50. If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so LoopCount decimal value 1 4294967295 429496729 FrameSize decimal value 40 2148 256 DataPattern 32 bit hex value or Default Default StopOnError True False True LoopForever True False False Do you want to start the test y n n y The test has been started A notification with the test result s will appear on the screen when the test has completed SANbox admin gt Test for port 1 Passed 14 196 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Test Status ay Test Status Authority Syntax Keywords Examples Displays the status of a test in progress or if there is no test in progress the status of the last test that was executed None test status port port_number switch port port_number Display test status for the port given by port_number port_number can be 0 23 switch Display test status for the switch Passed Failed NeverRun The following is an example of the Test Status Port command SANbox admin gt test status port 1 Port Test Test Loop Test Num Port Type Status Count Failures i 1 Offline Internal Passed T2 0 The following example of the Test Status Switch command SANbox admin gt test status switch Blade Test Test Loop Test D Type Status Count Failures o0 Offline internal StoppedOnError 12 2 Ol
51. S205 ests ben eet awd oi eet e ex seeing s ied savek eet 5 20 Non disruptive Activation 006000 e eee ee 5 21 One Step Firmware Installation 000 0 eae eee 5 22 Custom Firmware Installation 00 0000 c eee eee 5 24 Testing a Switch s an sanaaa eek bobl een ce een boar ee eiaww lees 5 25 Online Tests for Switches 0 000 e eee ee eee 5 25 Offline Tests for Switches 00002 5 26 Connectivity Tests for Switches 000 eee ee eee 5 27 Displaying Switch Test Status nna 00 00 e eee eee 5 28 Canceling a Switch Test 0 0 00 00 c eee ee 5 28 Verifying and Tracing Fibre Channel Connections 5 28 Managing Switch Feature Upgrades 00 c eee eee eee ee 5 29 Displaying Feature Licenses 02 e eee 5 30 Installing a Feature License Key 2000 e eee eee 5 30 Managing Idle Session TimerS 0000 cece eee 5 30 Port Configuration Displaying Port Information 0 00 eee 6 1 Port Configuration Parameters 000 eee eee eee 6 2 Port Operational Information 00 60 cee 6 3 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Parameters 6 4 Port PEMOnnanCe 3 n5 kewhee PES annn HES PEER ee ee E Ee SS 6 5 Transceiver Information sssaaa aaan 6 6 Modifying Port Operating Characteristics s saaa aaaeeeaa 6 6 POU DBINGING saie a a Bethea a a E a E pee eee a A Be
52. Show HOM sac baud nce ans aie eee Ate eRe le toh Ge eS 14 148 Show Interface iso k7 eu id ed oa Gp tad pewehactdes shea die sees 14 149 SNOW LOG s d2482 60004 60 bee te tee shes eeu Ra PENRE NS 4a 14 150 Show LODE xi i bied do bee wee edud weal ce nate csa wee Hee de dgan 14 154 Show Media 62 0084 ueteiy reakeahepureesouudeane tes nieve ns 14 155 SHOW Mem cvckeeeeeeee eh cee ethene Ree NEhieeheveeee ees 14 159 SNOW NG sao ccd ede Medes grr REE ne Een Ea test eet eeeesed 14 160 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide TOO aaa 59263 01 A Show Pagebreak sannana anaana 14 162 Show Pell vie ctcnd Geen egatenghteedt ita E a E A 14 163 SNOW POMS sc2 30cnetee Sebeete EER es carer eeke ea opel 464 14 166 Show Postlog lt 8cceeadadtedudeeatah nedadued de baeeie wed 14 171 Show Setup Callhome ss eee wed es ees Dd6 Pee SER eR ES 14 172 Show Setup Mfg 24 65 lt be weet ewes ane Yeh ERE Ee eR eee Rees 14 173 Show Setup Radius 2 cine ide buy Medevac bes beh ee ae Seed ey 14 174 Show Setup Services 22226056056 be 8is00 bee be eanedsd ends 14 175 Show Setup SNMP c3 sais kee s es bee e es heeds wee ee eee we 14 176 Show Setup System ccesie vibes cbbens bi veats bee be ee eee ees 14 177 SHOW SISSUNG 2 23 cnd ot eew eh e SE SRG hehe SOR Rete ed eee hwo 14 180 Show Switch 4o0du san datene a banee Remo aee Meee ee Reed 14 181 SNOW System ss 0t ei teas dud ie e e betieeiwedes saedes 14
53. This command also clears port counters Admin session set port clear or set port port_number clear speed transmission_speed state state port_number Specifies the port Ports are numbered beginning with 0 clear Clears the counters on all ports or the port given by port_number speed transmission_speed Specifies the transmission speed for the specified port Choose one of the following port speed values 1Gb s One gigabit per second 8 Gbps SFPs do not support the 1 Gbps setting Setting a port to 1 Gbps that has an 8 Gbps SFP will down the port 2Gb s Two gigabits per second 4Gb s Four gigabits per second 8Gb s Eight gigabits per second 10Gb s Ten gigabits per second This applies only to ports 20 23 20Gb s Twenty gigabits per second This applies only to ports 20 23 with a 20 Gbps license key 14 107 14 Command Reference XX Set Port LOGIC SaaS Auto The port speed is automatically detected state state Specifies one of the following administrative states for the specified port Online Activates and prepares the port to send data Offline Prevents the port from receiving signal and accepting a device login Diagnostics Prepares the port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login Down Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers 14 108 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Setup Callhome Set Setup Callhome
54. True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 00 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 5 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command SANbox admin config gt config save SANbox admin config gt config activate 6 12 59263 01 A XKX 6 Port Configuration QLOGIC Testing a Port a Testing a Port You can test a port using the Test Port command using online or offline tests The following sections describe the test types displaying test results and cancelling a test Online Tests for Ports Offline Tests for Ports m Display Port Test Results E Cancel a Port Test Online Tests for Ports An online test is a non disruptive test that exercises the port transceiver and device connections The port must be online and connected to a device The following is an example of an online test SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt test port 1 online A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so LoopCount decimal value 1 4294967295 429496729
55. account Deletes the SNMP version 3 user account given by account edit Modifies an SNMP version 3 user account prompting you first for the account name to edit For a description of the SNMP version 3 user account parameters refer to Table 14 43 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Snmpv3user er Examples list Displays SNMP version 3 user accounts group authentication type and privacy type This keyword does not require an Admin session The following is an example of the Snmpv3user Add command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt snmpv3user add A list of SNMPV3 user attributes with formatting and default values as applicable will follow Enter a new value OR simply press the ENTER key where ever allowed to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or O and the ENTER OR Ctrl C key to do so Username 8 32 chars snmpuserl Group 0 ReadOnly 1 ReadWrite ReadOnly si I Authentication True False False as AuthType 1 MD5 2 SHA MD5 ae AuthPhrase 8 32 chars I ERR ee Confirm AuthPhrase BK KKK Privacy True False False 3 PrivType 1 DES DES ee 1 PrivPhrase 8 32 chars gt AAR KAK Confirm PrivPhrase Kk Do you want to save and activate this snmpv3user setup y n n y SNMPV3 user added and activated The following is an example of the Snmpv3user Delete command SANbox gt a
56. ae Table 14 41 Switch Operational Parameters Continued Parameter Description PrincipalSwitchRole Principal switch status True indicates that this switch is the principal switch POSTFaultCode Fault code from the most recent Power on self test POSTStatus Status from the most recent Power on self test TestFaultCode Fault code from the most recent switch test TestStatus Status from the most recent switch test BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius Internal switch temperature at circuit board sensor 1 SwitchTemperatureStatus Switch temperature status Normal Warning Fail ure 14 182 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Switch T_T Examples The following is an example of the Show Switch command SANbox gt show switch Switch Information SymbolicName SwitchwWwNn BootVersion CreditPool DomainID FirstPortAddress FlashSize MBytes LogFilterLevel MaxPorts NumberOfResets ReasonForLastReset ActiveImageVersion build date PendingImageVersion build date ActiveConfiguration AdminState AdminModeActive BeaconOnStatus OperationalState PrincipalSwitchRole POSTFaultCode POSTStatus TestFaultCode TestStatus BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius SwitchTemperatureStatus SANbox 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 bc 56 Vx x x x 0 day month date time year 0 L9 0x13 130000 L28 Critical 24 L5 PowerUp Vx x x 0 day month date time year Vx x x 0 day month date time year def
57. aliases as shown in the following example SANbox gt alias list Current list of Zone Aliases alias1l alias2 Enter the Alias Members command to display the membership for a specified alias as shown in the following example SANbox gt alias members aliasl Current list of members for Zone Alias aliasl 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c4 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c5 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c6 59263 01 A 7 7 7 Zoning Configuration Displaying Zoning Database Information XX QLOGIC E ee Zoning Modification History Enter the Zoning History command to display a record of zoning modifications as shown in the following example SANbox gt zoning history Active Database Information ZoneSetLastActivated DeactivatedBy ZoneSetLastActivated DeactivatedOon Database Checksum Inactive Database Information ConfigurationLastEditedBy ConfigurationLastEditedOn Database Checksum Remote day mon date hh mm ss yyyy 00000000 admin OB sessionl7 day mon date hh mm ss yyyy 00000000 History information includes the following ag Time of the most recent zone set activation or deactivation and the user account that performed it m Time of the most recent modifications to the zoning database and the user account that made them m Checksum for the zoning database 7 8 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 7 Zoning Configuration Displaying Zoning Database Information I Zoning Database Limits Enter the Zoning
58. and installation of a license key Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 is a workstation based Java application that provides a graphical user interface for fabric management This includes Performance View which graphs port performance Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 comes with a free 30 day trial license m Fabric Security provides for Secure Socket Layer SSL and Secure Shell SSH connection security device security using Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP and remote authentication using a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS server m SANdoctor provides tools for Fibre Channel connection verification Fcping command Fibre Channel route tracing Fctrace command and transceiver diagnostic information Show Media command m Port Activation enables additional Fibre Channel ports up to the 24 port maximum Installing a feature license key is not disruptive nor does it require a switch reset To order a license key contact your switch distributor or your authorized reseller 59263 01 A 5 29 5 Switch Configuration AA Managing Idle Session Timers QLOGIC ee Displaying Feature Licenses Enter the Feature Log command to display the license keys that are installed on your switch as shown in the following example SANbox gt feature log Mfg Feature Log Switch Licensed for 8 ports Customer Feature Log 1 day month date 19 39 24 year Switch Licensed for 24 ports 1 LCVXOWUNOJUBE6 Installi
59. backup file using the Config Backup command Use FTP to load the backup file on a switch then enter the Config Restore command After the restore is complete the switch automatically resets The optional Import keyword imports the backup file from a remote server prompting you for an account name server IP address or DNS host name configuration file name on the server and a password if the server requires one When the upload is complete the switch restores the configuration Refer to Backing Up and Restoring a Switch Configuration on page 5 14 14 14 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Config NOTE m Ifthe restore process changes the IP address use the Set Setup System command to return the IP configuration to the values you want If the IP address is unknown you must place the switch in maintenance mode and reset the network configuration to restore the default IP address 10 0 0 1 Refer to the installation guide for information about using maintenance mode Configuration archive files created with the Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 Archive function are not compatible with the Config Restore command m The configdata backup file does not include the security group primary or secondary secrets and therefore are not restored You must edit the security database and reconfigure the secrets If they are not the switch will isolate from the fabric save config_name Saves changes made during a confi
60. be reset This process will cause a disruption to I O traffic Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions including any Telnet sessions When the firmware activation is complete you may log in to the switch again Do you want to continue y n y Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command Enter your choice for the file transfer protocol with which to download the firmware image file FTP requires an user account and a password TFTP does not FTP or TETP ftp Enter your account name on the remote host FTP only and the IP address of the remote host When prompted for the source file name enter the path for the firmware image file User Account johndoe IP Address 10 0 0 254 Source Filename 7 4 00 00_epc About to install image Do you want to continue y n y 59263 01 A xX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Installing Firmware _ 4 When prompted to install the new firmware enter Yes to continue or No to cancel Entering Yes will disrupt traffic This is the last opportunity to cancel About to install image Do you want to continue y n y Connected to 10 20 20 200 10 20 20 200 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 5 Enter the password for your account name FTP only 331 Password required for johndoe Password x x 230 User johndoe logged in 6 The firmware will now be downloaded from the remote
61. be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y Copying a Policy You can copy both user defined and dynamic policies To copy a policy policy_1 enter the Ipsec Policy Copy command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec policy copy policy_1 policy_a SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y Managing the Security Association Database The security association database is made up of user defined associations and dynamic associations associations created by the switch In addition to creating an association you can delete modify rename and copy user defined associations Dynamic associations can only be copied Creating an Association Deleting an Association Modifying a User Defined Association m Renaming a User Defined Association Copying an Association 4 14 59263 01 A XX 4 Network Configuration QLOGIC Managing IP Security a Creating an Association To create an association enter the Ipsec Association Create command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec association create h2h sh sa A list of attributes with formatting will follow Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to skip specifying a value If you wish to terminate this process bef
62. com ThrottleDupsEnabled True False Do you want to save and activate this Callhome setup y n 59263 01 A 12 5 12 Call Home Configuration AA Managing the Call Home Database QLOGIC ee Enter the Show Setup Callhome command to display the Call Home service configuration as shown in the following example SANbox gt show setup callhome Callhome Information PrimarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 PrimarySMTPServerPort 25 PrimarySMTPServerEnabled False SecondarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 SecondarySMTPServerPort 25 SecondarySMTPServerEnabled False ContactEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain PhoneNumber lt undefined gt StreetAddress lt undefined gt FromEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ReplyToEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ThrottleDupsEnabled True indicates active SMTP server Managing the Call Home Database To modify the Call Home database you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time through Telnet QuickTools Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 or another management application You must also open a Callhome Edit session with the Callhome Edit command The Callhome Edit session provides access to the Callhome Capture and Profile commands with which you make modifications to the Call Home database SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin call
63. database database Opens an edit session for the zoning database given by database If you omit database an edit session for the non volatile zoning database is opened database can have the following values configured Opens a zoning edit session for the non volatile zoning database merged Opens a zoning edit session for the temporary merged zone set received from another switch The following is an example of the Zoning Edit command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save The changes have been saved however they must be activated before they can take effect see zoneset activate command 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Zoning Edited Zoning Edited Authority Syntax Examples 59263 01 A Displays the contents of the edited zoning database Admin session and a Zoning Edit session zoning edited The following is an example of the Zoning Edited command SANbox admin zoning gt zoning edited Edited unsaved Zoning Information Zoneset Zone ZoneMember Z1 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 b9 f 9 10 00 00 cO dd 00 b9 fa 14 217 14 Command Reference Zoning History XX QLOGIC Se Zoning History Displays a history of zoning modifications This keyword does not require an Admin session History information includes the following a Time of the most recent zone set activation
64. describes managing Call Home email notification Section 13 describes managing the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP configuration Section 14 lists the commands in alphabetical order including the command syntax keywords notes and examples An index is also provided 59263 01 A a 1 Introduction Intended Audience XX QLOGIC ee Intended Audience This guide is intended for individuals who are responsible for installing and servicing Fibre Channel equipment using the command line interface Related Materials The following manuals and materials are referenced in the text and or provide additional information SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide 59265 01 SANbox 5802V QuickTools Switch Management User Guide 59264 01 SANbox 5802V Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 User Guide 59266 00 QLogic Fibre Channel Switch Event Message Guide publication number 59060 05 SANbox Simple Network Management Protocol Reference Guide publication number 59047 09 CIM Agent Reference Guide 59223 03 QLogic Switch Interoperability Guide This PDF document can be downloaded at http www qlogic com interoperability interoperability aspx Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL 2 Rev 7 0 Fibre Channel 10 bit Interface Rev 2 3 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Fabric Element in Fibre Channel Standard draft ietf ipfc fabric element mib 04 txt The Fibre Channel Standards are available from G
65. follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values AdminTimeout 30 InactivityTimeout 0 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit AdminTimeout dec value 0 1440 minutes O never InactivityTimeout dec value 0 1440 minutes O never Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n 59263 01 A 5 31 5 Switch Configuration XKX Managing Idle Session Timers QLOGIC a E Notes 5 32 59263 01 A XX eo Kel c leq 6 Port Configuration This section describes the following topics Displaying Port Information Modifying Port Operating Characteristics Port Binding Resetting a Port Configuring Port Threshold Alarms Testing a Port Displaying Port Information You can display the following port information Port Configuration Parameters m Port Operational Information m Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Parameters m Port Performance 59263 01 A 6 1 6 Port Configuration XKX Displaying Port Information QLOGIC ne Port Configuration Parameters Enter the Show Config Port command to display the port configuration parameters These parameters determine the operational characteristics of the port Refer to Table 14 19 for a description of these parameters SANbox gt show config port 3 Configu
66. given by alias Use a lt space gt to delimit ports devices in member _list A port device in member_list can have any of the following formats m Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex m 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN for the device with the format XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX rename alias_old alias_new Renames the alias given by alias_old to the alias given by alias_new Examples The following is an example of the Alias List command SANbox gt alias list Current list of Zone Aliases aliasl alias2 The following is an example of the Alias Members command SANbox gt alias members aliasl Current list of members for Zone Alias aliasl 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c4 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c5 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c6 59263 01 A 14 5 14 Command Reference XX Callhome QLOGIC ee Callhome Authority Syntax Keywords 14 6 Manages the Call Home database The Callhome Edit command opens a session in which to create and manage Call Home profiles Refer to the Profile command for more information about Call Home profiles Admin session except for the History and List keywords The Clear keyword also requires a Callhome Edit session callhome cancel changeover clear edit history list profile profile queue option save test profile p
67. host to the switch installed and activated 59263 01 A 5 23 5 Switch Configuration ped Installing Firmware QLOGIC ae Custom Firmware Installation A custom firmware installation downloads the firmware image file from a remote host to the switch unpacks the image file and resets the switch in separate steps This allows you to choose the type of switch reset and whether the activation will be disruptive Reset Switch command or nondisruptive Hotreset command The following example illustrates a custom firmware installation with a nondisruptive activation 5 24 1 Download the firmware image file from the workstation to the switch a If your workstation has an FTP server you can enter the Image Fetch command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt image fetch account_name ip_address filename m f your workstation has a TFTP server you can enter the Image TFTP command to download the firmware image file SANbox admin gt image tftp ip address filename a If your workstation has neither an FTP nor a TFTP server open an FTP session and download the firmware image file by entering FTP commands gt ftp ip_address or switchname user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt put filename ftp gt quit Display the list of firmware image files on the switch to confirm that the file was loaded SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt image list Unpack the firmware ima
68. is active the command is suspended until the zone set is deactivated You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes list Displays a list of all zone sets This keyword does not require an Admin session remove zone_set zone _list Removes a list of zones given by zone _list from the zone set given by zone_set Use a lt space gt to delimit zone names in zone _list If Zone_set is the active zone set the zone will not be removed until the zone set has been deactivated You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes rename zone_set_old zone_set_new Renames the zone set given by zone_set_old to the name given by zone_set_new You can rename the active zone set You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes zones zone_set Displays all zones that are components of the zone set given by zone_set This keyword does not require an Admin session m Azone set must be active for its definitions to be applied to the fabric m Only one zone set can be active at one time a A zone can be a component of more than one zone set 14 209 14 Command Reference XX Zoneset QLOGIC ne Examples The following is an example of the Zoneset Active command SANbox gt zoneset active Active ZoneSet Information ActiveZoneSet Bets LastActivatedBy admin OB session6 LastActivatedOn day month date time year The following is an exam
69. line by line fashion to change the event logging configuration parameters described in Table 14 34 To configure all system parameters omit the keyword For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value Table 14 34 Event Logging Configuration Parameters Parameter Description LocalLogEnabled Enables True or disables False the saving of log infor mation on the switch The default is True RemoteLogEnabled Enables True or disables False the recording of the switch event log on a remote host that supports the sys log protocol The default is False RemoteLogHostAddress The IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the host that will receive the switch event log information if remote logging is enabled The default is 10 0 0 254 ntp Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change the NTP server configuration parameters described in Table 14 35 To configure all system parameters omit the keyword For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value Table 14 35 NTP Server Configuration Parameters Parameter Description EthNetworkDiscovery Ethernet boot method 1 Static 2 Bootp 3 DHCP 4 RARP The default is 1 Static EthNetworkAddress Ethernet Internet Protocol IP address The default is 10 0 0 1 59263 01 A 14 125 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup System LOGIC rll Table 14 35 NTP Server Co
70. list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so ThresholdMonitoringEnabled True False False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 25 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 25 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 0 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 ISLMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 2 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 0 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LoginMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 g FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LogoutMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 5 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LOSMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 00 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 5 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 14 98 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Config Zoning eT Set Config Zoning Configures the zoning database The c
71. m Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 is a workstation based Java application that provides a graphical user interface for fabric management This includes Performance View which graphs port performance Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 comes with a free 30 day trial license m Fabric Security provides for Secure Socket Layer SSL and Secure Shell SSH connection security device security using Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP and remote authentication using a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS server m SANdoctor provides tools for Fibre Channel connection verification Fcping command Fibre Channel route tracing Fctrace command and transceiver diagnostic information Show Media command m Port Activation enables additional Fibre Channel ports up to the 24 port maximum The following is an example of the Feature Add command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt feature add 1 LCVXOWUNOJBE6 License upgrade to 24 ports Do you want to continue with license upgrade procedure y n n y Alarm Msg day mon date time year A1005 0030 SM Upgrading Licensed Ports to 24 14 25 14 Command Reference XX Feature QLOGIC EEE The following is an example of the Feature Log command SANbox gt feature log Mfg Feature Log Switch Licensed for 8 ports Customer Feature Log 1 day month date 19 39 24 year Switch Licensed for 24 ports 1 LCVXOWUNOJBE6 14 26 59263 01 A XX 14
72. mode and use the Get command to download the file dump_support tgz ftp gt bin ftp gt get dump_support tgz xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit Downloading and Uploading Files Several files that reside on the switch can be downloaded to the workstation for examination or for safekeeping These files include the following m Backup configuration file configdata m Log files logfile Support files dump_support tgz You can upload firmware image files or backup configuration files to the switch to reinstall firmware or restore a corrupted configuration The switch uses FTP to exchange files between the switch and the workstation To download a file from the switch to the workstation do the following 1 Enter the FTP command and the switch IP address or symbolic name gt ftp 10 0 0 1 2 When prompted for a user and password enter the FTP account name and password images images user images password images 59263 01 A 2 7 2 Command Line Interface Usage AK Downloading and Uploading Files QLOGIC E ee 3 Set binary mode and use the Get command to download the file configdata ftp gt bin ftp gt get configdata XXXxXx bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit To upload a file from the workstation to the switch do the following 1 Enter the FTP command and the switch IP address or symbolic name gt ftp 10 0 0 1 2 When prompted for a user and password enter the FTP account name and password images
73. must begin with a letter and be no longer than 32 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The Tech_Support_Center profile name is reserved You must enter the Callhome Save command afterwards to save your changes The Call Home database supports a maximum of 25 profiles Table 14 8 describes the profile configuration parameters Table 14 8 Profile Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Level Event severity level at which to generate a Call Home e mail message E None Generates e mail messages for all events m Warn Generates e mail messages for Warning Critical and Alarm events E Critical Generates e mail messages for Critical and Alarm events mE Alarm Generates e mail messages for Alarm events only 14 61 14 Command Reference XX Profile QLOGIC ee 14 62 Table 14 8 Profile Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Description Format Level of detail to be included in the e mail message E ShortText includes switch and event information E FullText includes switch information event information Call Home contact information and SNMP contact information E Tsci1 includes switch and event information in a format intended for automated e mail readers MaxSize Maximum number of characters allowed in the e mail message Decreasing this parameter makes for easier reading on small dis play devices such as cell phones The minimum is 650 The m
74. not send a test frame external Exercises the port and its transceiver A transceiver with a loopback plug is required for the port NOTE An external test on an XPAK port verifies that a complete path exists but does not send a test frame online Exercises the port transceiver and device connections while the port is online This test does not disrupt communication on the port 14 195 14 Command Reference XX Test Port QLOGIC lt L Notes Examples Table 14 44 describes the port test parameters Table 14 44 Port Test Parameters Parameter Description LoopCount Number of frames sent FrameSize Number of bytes in each test frame DataPattern Pattern in the payload StopOnError Stops the test when an error occurs True Otherwise the test continues to comple tion LoopForever Restarts the test after completion and con tinues until you cancel it True Otherwise the test ends normally after completion To cancel a port test that is in progress enter the Test Cancel Port command To display the status of the most recent port test or port test in progress enter the Test Status Port command The following example performs an online test on port 1 SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt test port 1 online A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value
75. of the switch you want to query The following is an example of a successful Ping command SANbox gt ping 10 20 11 57 Ping command issued Waiting for response SANbox gt Response successfully received from 10 20 11 57 This following is an example of an unsuccessful Ping command SANbox gt ping 10 20 11 57 Ping command issued Waiting for response No response from 10 20 11 57 Unreachable 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Profile TOO cr Profile Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Creates and modifies profiles with which to customize Call Home e mail notification A profile defines the event severity level at which to generate e mails e mail subject and text and e mail recipients Admin session and a Callhome Edit session Refer to the Callhome command on page 14 6 for information about starting a Callhome Edit session profile copy profile_source profile_destination create profile delete profile edit profile rename profile_old profile_new copy profile_source profile_destination Creates a new profile named profile_destination and copies the configuration into it from the profile given by profile_source You must enter the Callhome Save command afterwards to save your changes Neither profile_source nor profile_destination can be Tech_Support_Center create profile Creates a profile with the name given by profile A profile name
76. old ah SPI decimal value 256 4294967295 Authentication select an authentication algorithm 1 hmac md5 16 byte key 2 hmac shal 20 byte key 3 hmac sha256 32 byte key 4 aes xcbc mac 16 byte key authentication algorithm choice AuthenticationKey quotes string or raw hex bytes Encryption select an encryption algorithm l des cbc 8 byte key 2 3des cbc 24 byte key 3 null 0 byte key 4 blowfish cbc 5 56 byte key 5 aes cbc 16 24 32 byte key 6 twofish cbc 32 byte key encryption algorithm choice Encryptionkey quoted string or raw hex bytes The security association has been edited This configuration must be saved with the ipsec save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the ipsec cancel command SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 59263 01 A 4 17 4 Network Configuration AK Managing IP Security QLOGIC ee Renaming a User Defined Association To rename a user defined association associaton_1 enter the Ipsec Association Rename command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec association rename association_1l association_4 The security association will be renamed Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activate
77. or Q and the ENTER key to Current Values ENTER key to accept the current value before reaching the end of the list do so EthIPv6 NetworkEnable False EthIPv 6 Discovery Static EthIPv6 NetworkAddress lt undefined gt EthIPv6GatewayAddress lt undefined gt New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none EthIPv6NetworkEnable EthIPv 6 Discovery EthIPv6NetworkAddress EthIPv6 GatewayAddress 1 Static Do you want to save and activate this system setup True False 2 Dhcpv6 IPv6 Address Mask Length format IPv6 Address 3 Ndp y n n 4 4 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 4 Network Configuration Configuring the Ethernet Port DNS Server Configuration A DNS server manages the host names for a fabric This enables you to specify servers and switches by a meaningful name rather than IP address To configure a DNS server enter the Set Setup System Dns command in an Admin session as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set setup system dns A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q Current Values DNSClientEnabled DNSLocalHostname DNSServerDiscovery DNSServerlAddress DNSServer2Address DNSServer3Address DNSSearchListDiscovery DNSSearchLi
78. or deactivation and the user who performed it E Time of the most recent modifications to the zoning database and the user who made them m Checksum for the zoning database Authority None Syntax zoning history Examples The following is an example of the Zoning History command SANbox gt zoning history Active Database Information ZoneSetLastActivated DeactivatedBy ZoneSetLastActivated DeactivatedOon Database Checksum Inactive Database Information ConfigurationLastEditedBy ConfigurationLastEditedon Database Checksum Remote day mon date hh mm ss yyyy 00000000 admin OB sessionl7 day mon date hh mm ss yyyy 00000000 14 218 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Zoning Limits TO Zoning Limits Displays the limits and numbers of zone sets zones aliases members per zone members per alias and total members in the zoning database Authority None Syntax zoning limits brief Keywords brief Displays zoning limits for each category the current number of objects and the applicable zoning database non volatile or active If you omit this keyword the display includes a membership breakdown for each zone Notes The specific zoning database limits are described in Table 14 46 Table 14 46 Zoning Database Limits Limit Description MaxZoneSets Maximum number of zone sets 256 MaxZones Maximum number of zones 2000 MaxAliases Maximum number of aliases 2500 MaxTotalMembers Maxim
79. port binding entries found 9 False No port binding entries found 20 False No port binding entries found 21 False No port binding entries found 22 False No port binding entries found 23 False No port binding entries found 59263 01 A 5 7 5 Switch Configuration AK Displaying Switch Information QLOGIC ee Hardware Information Enter the Show Chassis command to display the status of the switch hardware including fans power supplies internal temperature and Heartbeat LED status SANbox gt show chassis Chassis Information BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius 36 FanStatus 1 Good FanStatus 2 Good FanDirection 1 BackToFront FanDirection 2 BackToFront PowerSupplyStatus 1 Good PowerSupplyStatus 2 Good HeartBeatCode 1 HeartBeatStatus Normal The HeartBeatCode and HeartBeatStatus entries indicate the Power on Self Test POST results revealed by the Heartbeat LED blink patterns The result is normal operation or a blink pattern indicating a critical error as described in Table 5 1 Refer to the SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide for more information about the Heartbeat LED and its blink patterns Table 5 1 Heartbeat LED Activity HeartBeatCode HeartBeatStatus Description 1 Normal One blink per second Normal operation 2 AppDied Two blink cluster Internal firmware failure 3 PostFailed Three blink cluster Fatal POST error 4 CorruptFilesystem Four blink cluster Configu
80. system ipv6 System Information EthIPv6NetworkEnable False EthIPv6 NetworkDiscovery Static EthIPv6NetworkAddress 2001 1 64 EthIPv6GatewayAddress eeOr 21 The following example of the Show Setup System Logging command SANbox gt show setup system logging System Information LocalLogEnabled True Remot eLogEnabled False RemoteLogHostAddress 10 0 0 254 14 178 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Setup System ls The following is an example of the Show Setup System Ntp command SANbox gt show setup system System Information NTPClientEnabled False NTPServerDiscovery Static NTPServerAddress 51 68 85 102 The following example of the Show Setup System Timers command SANbox gt show setup system timers System Information AdminTimeout 30 InactivityTimeout 0 59263 01 A 14 179 14 Command Reference pa Show Steering LOGIC ee Show Steering Displays the routes that data takes in the fabric Authority None Syntax show steering domain_id Keywords domain_id The domain ID for which to display route information If you omit domain_id the system displays routes for all switches in the fabric Examples The following is an example of the Show Steering command SANbox gt show steering 35 DomainID DefaultOutPort InPort OutPort 35 18 3 16 18 16 18 5 18 16 18 16 6 16 18 16 18 T 16 18 16 18 15 18 16 18 16 14 180 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Re
81. the Ipsec Association Delete command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec association delete association_1l The security association will be deleted Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 4 16 59263 01 A XX 4 Network Configuration QLOGIC Managing IP Security es Modifying a User Defined Association To modify an existing user defined association enter the Ipsec Association Edit command in an Admin session and an Ipsec Edit session as shown in the following example An asterisk indicates a required entry SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec association edit h2h sh sa A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value To remove a value for an optional attribute use n If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values Description Host to host switch gt host Encryptionkey 123456789012345678901234 New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit n for none Description string value 0 127 bytes SourceAddress IPv4 IPv6 or hostname DestinationAddress IPv4 IPv6 or hostname i Protocol l esp 2 esp old 3 ah 4 ah
82. transmitter and distance The media designator may be M5 multimode 50 micron M6 multimode 62 5 micron or MX MX indicates that the media supports both multimode 50 and 62 5 micron Transceiver manufacturer Transceiver manufacturer identifier Operational state AutoPerfTuning status Fibre Channel port address 59263 01 A XKX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Port Tk Table 14 40 Show Port Parameters Continued Entry Description PortWWN PrimSegErrors RunningType RxLinkResets RxOfflineSeq ShortFramesin SymbolicName SyncStatus TestFaultCode TestStatus TotalErrors TotalLinkResets TotalLIPsRecvd TotalLIPsXmitd TotalOfflineSeq TotalRxFrames TotalRxWords TotalTxFrames TotalTxWords TxLinkResets TxOfflineSeq XmitterEnabled Worldwide port name Number of primitive sequence errors detected Operational port type F FL E or Unknown Number of link reset primitives received from an attached device Number of offline sequences OLSs received An OLS is issued for link initialization a Receive amp Recognize Not_Operational NOS state or to enter the offline state Number of incidents when one or more frames that are less than the minimum size were received Port symbolic name Synchronization status SyncAcquired SyncLost Fault code from the most recent port test Status from the most recent port test Total number of errors detected on the port since the last port or switc
83. was issued in the format day month hh mm ss ms UTC yyyy This time stamp comes from the switch for events that originate with the switch and from the workstation for events that originate with QuickTools or Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 severity The event severity A Alarm C Critical W Warning Informative message_ID A number that identifies the message using the following format cat egory message_number source The program module or application that generated the event Sources include Zoning Switch PortApp EPort Management Server Alarms do not include the source message_text The message text 59263 01 A XX 11 Event Log Configuration LOGIC Displaying the Event Log er The following is an example of the Show Log command SANbox gt show log 327 day month date time year I Eport Port 0 8 Eport State E_A0O_GET_DOMAIN_ID 328 day month date time year I Eport Port 0 8 FSPF PortUp state 0 I Eport Port 0 8 Sending init hello I Eport Port 0 8 Processing EFP oxid 0x8 331 day month date time year I Eport Port 0 8 Eport State E_A2_IDLE 332 day month date time year I Eport Port 0 8 EFP WWN 0x100000c0dd00b845 len 0x30 333 day month date time year I Eport Port 0 8 Sending LSU oxid 0xc type 1 329 day month date time year 330 day month date time year 334 day month date time year I Eport Port 0 8
84. which you make modifications to the port switch port threshold alarm or zoning configuration components as shown SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit The config named default is being edited SANbox admin config gt set config port SANbox admin config gt set config switch SANbox admin config gt set config threshold SANbox admin config gt set config zoning SANbox admin config gt set config security The Config Save command saves the changes you made during the Config Edit session In this case changes to the configuration named Default are being saved to a new configuration named config 10132003 However the new configuration does not take effect until you activate it with the Config Activate command SANbox admin config gt config save config_10132003 SANbox admin gt config activate config_10132003 SANbox admin gt admin end The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators when you are done making changes to the switch 59263 01 A 5 13 5 Switch Configuration AK Managing Switch Configurations QLOGIC E ee The following is an example of the Set Config Switch command Refer to Table 14 22 for a description of the switch configuration parameters SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config switch A list of attri
85. you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values NTPClientEnabled False NTPServerDiscovery Static NTPServerAddress 10 20 10 10 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none NTPClientEnabled True False 1 Static 2 Dhcp 3 Dhcpv6 hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address NTPServerDiscovery NTPServerAddress Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n 59263 01 A 14 129 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup System QLOGIC ee The following is an example of the Set Setup System Timers command SANbox admin gt set setup system timers A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values AdminTimeout 30 InactivityTimeout 0 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit AdminTimeout dec value 0 1440 minutes O never InactivityTimeout dec value 0 1440 minutes O never Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n 14 130 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Set Switch State il Set Switch State Changes the administrative state for all ports on the switch The previous Set Config Switch settings are rest
86. 0 Displays the contents of the log or the parameters used to create and display entries in the log The log contains a maximum of 1200 entries When the log reaches its entry capacity subsequent entries overwrite the existing entries beginning with the oldest None show log number_of_events component display filter level options port settings number_of_events Specifies the number of the most recent events to display from the event log number_of_events must be a positive integer component Displays the components currently being monitored for events Table 14 38 describes the log monitoring components Table 14 38 Log Monitoring Components Component Description Chassis Chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies CLI Command line interface events Eport E_Port events Mgmtserver Management server events Nameserver Name server events Other Miscellaneous events Port Port events QFS QLogic Fabric Service events QFS governs Call Home e mail notification SNMP SNMP events 59263 01 A XKX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Log TO Table 14 38 Log Monitoring Components Continued Component Description Switch Switch management events Zoning Zoning conflict events display filter Displays log events on the screen according to the component or severity level filter given by filter filter can be one of the following Info Displays all informative events Warning
87. 0 8 00 00 08 2 03 02 30 PortApp 254 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 03 2 03 02 30 qfsApp 255 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 09 2 03 02 30 mserver 256 224 0 0 0 7 00 00 06 2 03 02 30 eport 257 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 13 2 03 02 30 zoning 282 254 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 26 gqfsApp 284 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 08 2 03 02 26 snmpservicepath 285 282 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 26 qfsApp 308 224 0 0 0 8 00 00 29 2 03 02 25 cim_server 322 224 0 0 0 7 00 00 16 2 03 02 24 util 323 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 09 2 03 02 24 port_mon 324 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 07 2 03 02 24 diagAgent 325 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 03 2 03 02 24 diagExec 289 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 00 2 03 02 25 snmpd 290 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 25 snmpmain 335 290 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 23 snmpmain 336 335 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 23 snmpmain 59263 01 A 14 65 14 Command Reference XX Quit QLOGIC Quit Closes the Telnet session Authority None Syntax quit Notes You can also press Control D to close the Telnet session 14 66 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Reset a Reset Resets the switch configuration parameters If you omit the keyword the default is Reset Switch Authority Admin session Syntax reset callhome config config_name factory ipsec port port_list radius security services snmp switch default system zoning Keywords callhome Resets the Call Home database configuration to its default values config config_name Resets the configuration given by config_name to the fac
88. 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Config Security Portbinding TO ka a Show Config Security Portbinding Displays the port binding configuration for one or more ports Authority None Syntax show config security portbinding port_number Keywords port_number The number of the port If you omit port_number the port binding configuration for all ports is displayed Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Security Portbinding command SANbox gt show config security portbinding Configuration Name default Port Binding Status WWN 0 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 gi True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 2 False o port binding entries found 3 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 4 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 5 False o port binding entries found 6 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 81 T False o port binding entries found 8 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 9 False o port binding entries found 10 False o port binding entries found 11 False o port binding entries found 12 False o port binding entries found 13 False o port binding entries found 14 False o port binding entries found T5 False o port binding entries found 16 False o port binding entries found aie False o port binding entries found 18 False o port binding entries found 19 False o port binding entries found 20 False o port binding entries found 21 False o port binding entries found 22 False o port binding entries found 23 False
89. 1 c cctew ah 22h 34 G keh eS Gla dev d ed seen eG 14 105 SEPON st e cee naan an sane aed ae peared ae eee aor 14 107 Set Setup Callhome ccc c2csn dh deh deSCiet sh eieeatesee ess 14 109 Set Setup Radius ote be daneeasdoed canes ecareeaaeataes 14 112 Set Setup Services cassava ies aki sewe vse babs eee ee eee eee es 14 116 Ser Setup SNMP ei issis 2s ee eke eh pee ee eid eee vas 14 119 Set Setup System 2 0 0 ee 14 123 Set Switch State sce gcse hgh ide eptke MGW hie bes Sa hbn bee Cedees 14 131 Set TIMEZONE 2 0 52504h eons be wae hele ade ose en eee cide dens 049 24 14 132 Show ADOUTS 22 cscetns piaea pee ae ae wee wee baa eed 14 133 SNOW Alar Mees bee eER EE da See bee Vode Gees Cee de 14 135 Show Broadcast scpcetawsad shes teehee Soke ed od Rete 22 14 136 Show CHASSIS ccchecd oat eted g riani pd bie obs Phage d een Gee 14 137 Show Config POM a estecsceehd2Gei hea sbi eine sheen aes 14 138 Show Config Security n cs desbe eb et eee bbe des bee eons 14 140 Show Config Security Portbinding 2002 eee eee 14 141 Show Config Switch sce urek owes the hye YES REESE ee eee Bales 14 142 Show Config Threshold 2 0 0 0 000 cece eee 14 143 Show Config Zoning 252 253 62240e8 65554 bebe etond hes eeues 14 144 SHOW DOMAINS 2 36 oem ecne phous been eeRe ewd ke eo dade I ag 14 145 SNOW DONO 3 25565 ikara k ete Got i a shee Ghee See beau leg 14 146 Show Paune co wd aves APE Seb Cele bien abet iad eee ses oa ees 14 147
90. 12 4 Callhome command 14 6 Changeover example 12 16 Clear example 12 16 Edit example 12 6 History example 12 7 List example 12 8 List Profile example 12 8 Profile Test example 12 15 Queue Clear example 12 16 Queue Stats example 12 8 Capture command 14 10 Add example 12 13 Edit example 12 14 Remove example 12 15 Central Processing Unit usage 5 4 certificate 8 2 8 3 14 17 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 14 31 CHAP See Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Index 2 chassis status 14 136 14 137 command entry 2 4 examples 14 2 listing 14 2 notes 14 2 reference 14 1 rules and conventions 14 2 syntax 14 2 command line completion 2 4 Config command 14 13 Activate example 5 12 Backup example 5 15 Copy example 5 12 Delete example 5 13 Edit example 5 13 7 11 List example 5 12 Restore example 5 16 configuration activate 5 12 14 13 backup 5 14 14 13 copy 5 12 14 13 delete 5 13 14 14 device security 9 1 display 5 12 edit 14 14 edit session 14 1 export 14 14 import 14 14 list 14 14 modify 5 13 reset 14 67 restore 5 14 5 16 14 14 save 14 15 configuration file download 2 7 5 15 upload 2 8 connection security 8 1 14 116 14 117 SSL 14 17 connectivity test 5 27 CPU See Central Processing Unit CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide rr Create command 14 17 Certi
91. 14 date and time 8 3 hard reset 14 37 information 5 1 log 14 125 login 2 2 management service 14 116 manufacturer information 14 173 operational information 5 3 14 181 paging 5 17 reset 5 5 5 20 14 200 reset without POST 14 69 services 5 10 14 68 14 116 14 175 user accounts 3 1 syntax 14 2 system configuration change 14 123 display 14 177 system process information 5 4 T technical support 2 6 Telnet connection security 8 2 login 2 2 service 14 116 session timeout 14 126 test cancel 5 28 6 15 connectivity 5 27 offline 5 26 6 14 online 5 25 6 13 status 5 28 6 15 Test Cancel command 14 194 Test command example 6 13 test log file 14 185 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide ls Test Port command 14 195 example 6 13 Test Status command 14 197 Test Switch command 14 198 TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol time 5 19 between resets 5 5 set and display 5 17 14 20 zone 14 132 14 186 time zone 5 17 timeout Admin session 14 126 admin session 4 2 inactivity 4 2 Telnet session 14 126 topology 14 187 transceiver information 6 6 Trivial File Transfer Protocol 5 22 Tsc1 text format 12 3 U Universal Time 5 17 upgrade 5 29 14 25 Uptime command 14 200 example 5 5 user account add 14 201 configuration 3 1 create 3 3 delete 14 201 display 14 201 edit 14 201 information 3 2 list 14 202 logged in 14 188 modify 3 4 password 3 4 user admin
92. 17 ZONING ISON serenatas 45eveeberseee bead eoeterdetenee vuas 14 218 Zoning LIMIS 4488 coke we eke SONS Oe PERLE DECC R eee eee es 14 219 ZONING LIS ico sees teen ee Se Hee hehe ee Seer A a e eae e 14 220 Page xi SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch AK Command Line Interface Guide QLOGIC Zoning Merged 6c naka Sead eh dee oe ME eee eRe ees 14 221 Zoning Restore 0 00 eee 14 222 ZONING SAVES sesse sees poe aoa kb au wales p e case sewer ee 14 223 Index List of Tables Table Page 2 1 Command Line Completion n anaana edidatesges tebb208 26844052 be Sa 2 4 3 1 Factory User ACCounmSv cacs ienen panes ENEA pene tears e paaa etek ges 3 1 5 1 Heartbeat LED Activity 2 0 0e5ssee e ees SeGGuS Se eee eee eRe ee ee 5 8 5 2 Switch Reset MethodS 2 0214 anaana anaa 5 20 11 1 Event Log Message Format naaaaaaa aaaea 11 2 14 1 Data Capture Configuration Parameters a na aaeeea cee eee eee 14 10 14 2 ISL Group Member Attributes nananana aaae 14 30 14 3 Port Group Member Attributes n a nannaa aaa 14 31 14 4 MS Group Member Attributes 0 0 0 cc ee 14 32 14 5 Group Member Attributes a nn naa aana 14 33 14 6 Association Configuration Parameters asaos aaeeea aeea 14 46 14 7 Policy Configuration Parameters 0 0 ccc eee eee 14 53 14 8 Profile Configuration Parameters 0 000 c ccc eee eee 14 61 14 9 Call Home Service Configuration Defaults 0 000 ee 14
93. 184 SNOW TESHOG see se tirne cere Eee e R E eie oneal owas ce 14 185 Show TIMEZONE sic cke yaya Ge obi soda ba Wath et detadetines 14 186 SNOW NCPOIOUY er iatis os ee eke es yh gE eee eid ae he E as 14 187 Show USES sc aien cece pa Necee sen tee he Se Nee ae eee eee ee 14 188 Show VETS is scoica po i a hea gpi ed Sa ee eee eee eed 14 189 SOUIGOW 23 e dead n be nue ee seek eke eee PA EE 14 191 Snmpv3user a2 osetia tue aus Hhaieceadeebeeuasve cee heed eames 14 192 Test Cancel ex s tate theodee lady Ger a Aa a E E N 14 194 JOS POM 2 s 0e el deeded nee bos REESE EDEL Meee ed dee eee 14 195 Test SAIS Gk G bc tid Gee dm SER Aes Gee Sie ied ss eee 14 197 TESL OWEN 25 2005 toto neces ehd Gai tetusstea aiveys nee gobs 14 198 MUG ia aaa eed aa a eet ba eh See Ga E a EO A 14 200 USE ain ah see tos Se a aa E ene eee O A a ae E 14 201 WhoaMi seai cepa 6 ees ERTES TSE LSE OY SHES PURGES GRE ERE REE 14 204 DONG clon a wee ede aes Da oes eens abe ae ae eee ee 14 205 PONCSOl nei ese eeSebeteusseatieeiaat 5454 egGeeeeseeees 14 208 ZOMMOACIVG i ercsi tapia eie bs op n a oor bee BA E hes 14 211 Zoning Cancel sses ceses eiu aae ai aa aa E a Ea e E a aE 14 212 ZONING Clear es ns e564 rna Rea ks dewey ea a Ta G pawa 14 213 Zoning Configured sssaaa esaerea 14 214 Zoning Delete OrphanS s an anana 00 cece eee eee 14 215 Zoning EdE sapre pirig Pins eee beet heks eer EE EE E EENE 14 216 Zoning Edited Sime bie eee bees Bde eels Bee dead State 14 2
94. 2 Set Pagebreak command 14 105 example 2 5 Set Port command 14 107 Set Setup Callhome command 14 109 example 12 5 Set Setup command SNMP example 13 4 Set Setup Radius command 14 112 example 10 3 Set Setup Services command 14 116 example 5 11 SNMP service 13 2 SSH and SSL services 8 2 Set Setup SNMP command 14 119 Set Setup System command 14 123 Ethernet configuration 4 2 NTP example 5 19 remote logging 11 6 Timers example 5 31 Set Switch State command 14 131 Set Timezone command 14 132 severity level 11 1 SHA 1 authentication 14 31 short text format 12 3 Show About command 14 133 Show Alarm command 14 135 Show Broadcast command 14 136 Show Chassis command 14 137 example 5 8 59263 01 A Show Config Port command 14 138 example 6 2 Show Config Security command 14 140 example 5 7 port binding 6 9 Show Config Security Port command 14 141 Show Config Switch command 14 142 example 5 6 Show Config Threshold command 14 143 example 6 4 Show Config Zoning command 14 144 example 5 6 Show Domains command 14 145 Show Donor command 14 146 Show Fabric command 14 147 example 4 1 Show FDMI command 14 148 Show Interface command 14 149 Show Log command 14 150 display log 11 3 filter display 11 3 Settings example 11 5 Show LSDB command 14 154 Show Media command 14 155 example 6 6 Show Mem command 14 159 Show NS command 14 160 example 5 2 Show Pagebreak command 14 162 Show Perf command 14 163 example 6 5 Show Port c
95. 2h hs sa Security Policy Database h2h hs sp h2h sh sp Summary Security Association Count 2 Security Policy Count 2 14 Command Reference XX Ipsec List QLOGIC Sas The following is an example of the Ipsec List Association command SANbox gt ipsec list association Active IPsec Information h2h sh sa Description Host to host switch gt host Source fe80 2c0O ddff fe03 d4cl Destination fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 Protocol esp SPI 333 0x14d Authentication hmac shal x Encryption 3des cbc x h2h hs sa Description Host to host host gt switch Source fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 Destination fe80 2c0 ddff fe03 d4cl Protocol esp SPI 444 0Ox1bc Authentication hmac shal x Encryption 3des cbhc x x The following is an example of the Ipsec List Policy command SANbox gt ipsec list policy Active IPsec Information h2h hs sp Description Host to host host gt switch Source fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 128 Destination fe80 2c0 ddff fe03 d4c1 128 Protocol any Direction in Priority 0 Action ipsec Rule Protocol Mode Level 1 esp transport require h2h sh sp Description Host to host switch gt host Source fe80 2c0 ddff fe03 d4c1 128 Destination fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 128 Protocol any Direction out Priority 0 Action ipsec Rule Protocol Mode Level 1 esp transport require 14 52 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Ipsec Polic
96. 3 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration QLOGIC Displaying SNMP Information I Displaying SNMP Information Enter the Show Setup Snmp command to displays common and trap specific SNMP configuration information as shown in the following example Refer to Table 14 30 for a description of the SNMP parameters SANbox gt show setup snmp SNMP Information SNMPEnabled True Contact lt sysContact undefined gt Location N_107 System Test Lab Description SANbox 5802V FC Switch ObjectID Ie3s6s 1 451 3873 51 9 AuthFailureTrap True ProxyEnabled True SNMPv3Enabled False TraplAddress 10 0 0 254 TraplPort 162 TraplSeverity warning TraplVersion 2 TraplEnabled False Trap2Address 0 0 0 0 Trap2Port 162 Trap2Severity warning Trap2Version 2 Trap2Enabled False Trap3Address 0 0 0 0 Trap3Port 162 Trap3Severity warning Trap3Version 2 Trap3Enabled False Trap4Address 0 0 0 0 Trap4Port 162 Trap4Severity warning Trap4Version 2 Trap4Enabled False Trap5Address 0 0 0 0 Trap5Port 162 Trap5Severity warning Trap5Version 2 Trap5Enabled False 59263 01 A 13 3 13 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration AK Modifying the SNMP Configuration QLOGIC E Modifying the SNMP Configuration Enter the Set Setup SNMP command in an Admin session to configure SNMP on the switch There are two groups of configuration parameters One group is common to all traps The second group is trap specific You c
97. 36 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Hardreset ls Hardreset Resets the switch and performs a power on self test POST This reset disrupts I O traffic activates the pending firmware and clears the alarm log To save the alarm log before resetting refer to the Set Log on page 14 101 Authority Admin session Syntax hardreset Notes To reset the switch without a power on self test refer to the Reset command on page 14 67 To reset the switch without disrupting traffic refer to the Hotreset command on page 14 40 59263 01 A 14 37 14 Command Reference XX Help QLOGIC eens rll Help Authority Syntax Keywords Examples Displays a brief description of the specified command its keywords and usage None help command keyword command Displays a summary of the command given by command and its keywords If you omit command the system displays all available commands keyword Displays a summary of the keyword given by keyword belonging to the command given by command If you omit keyword the system displays the available keywords for the specified command all Displays a list of all available commands including command variations The following is an example of the Help Config command SANbox gt help config config CONFIG_OPTIONS The config command operates on configurations Usage config activate backup cancel copy delete edi
98. 37 lb cf fd 4 8 0x8 0824c6 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 07 b4 20 00 00 20 37 2b 07 b4 5 8 0x8 0824c9 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 08 57 20 00 00 20 37 2b 08 57 6 8 0x8 0824cb NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 lb cf 6 20 00 00 20 37 l1lb cf 6 7 8 0x8 0824cc NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 0b ec 20 00 00 20 37 2b 0b ec 8 8 0x8 0824d6 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 07 e1 20 00 00 20 37 2b 07 e1 9 8 0x8 0824da NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 0b la 20 00 00 20 37 2b 0b 1a 10 8 0x8 0824e0 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 1b 0 7d 20 00 00 20 37 1b 0 7d 11 8 0x8 0824e1 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 02 6 20 00 00 20 37 2b 02 6 12 8 0x8 0824e2 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 lb ea b7 20 00 00 20 37 l1lb ea b7 I3 8 0x8 0824e8 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 lb icbh e5 20 00 00 20 37 l1b cb e5 Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodewwNn No entries found for domain ID 10 Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodewwNn No entries found for domain ID 34 5 2 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Switch Information TOO Switch Operational Information The Show Switch command displays a variety of switch operational information These include the switch WWN domain ID firmware version administrative state and operational state as shown in the following example SANbox gt show switch Switch Information SymbolicName SANbox Swit chWwN 0 00 00 c0 dd 00 bc 56 BootVersion Vx x x x 0 day month date time year CreditPool 0 DomainID 9 0x13 FirstPortAd
99. 44 Ipsec Associaton aucucecSebsete tees ie eheenh esses ere bees 14 46 NOSCAIST tons 212s Saco Be eater Aisetih eb ag tee an a Ree ene oe ee 14 50 Ipsec POIG reien ni sasaa i a a ees bee SL e E eaa 14 53 Lips caiae wee y EEEN IRE ERNE ES A EE ee EE E E 14 57 LOGOUT anirua a a e a e he ee e a a E 14 58 POSSWO 2352503026655 diae 224 Taa aa a a a a E sas 14 59 PNG eiea eect eae E a E E re Oe A kate 14 60 Profile energiei ii ea a a a a ai e S 14 61 ee ee eee er eee eT eee RAE eee ee ee ee E S 14 65 OOO Shee cae sae eS ae ate i ee ee a E eee oe a 14 66 GSO cs i a a eai ea a st ce i Aa eSaueeesne A 14 67 SECUN Y ei 3 02 0 ceases pee E N eres E E a aE aE 14 77 Page ix SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch AK Command Line Interface Guide QLOGIC E ee Page x Security Setos wets ean e ee ane eee tee peed kee a 14 81 Set Ala 4G 4 stun oe bee e eet eed a awe hb bee sh eeees ose 14 84 Set DEACON 2e coodw ad paeka ose teneee ss Ea E E ERE 14 85 Set Config POM seid bia ck cen tebe anremagueete gaat eases 14 86 Set Config Security 4 ks sets eee hee eee ede P Lae eee ew aes 14 92 Set Config Security Portbinding 00 cee eee 14 94 Set Config Switch ce cacade tad os hai ee dea de n ce bbe ee Deen bee 14 95 Set Config Miresnoldiis 244 ko ebas oseet bane eee teak dese wees 14 97 Set Config ZONING stewed een dd pee g hd Wee he weeded ee eS eee 14 99 Set LOG 2xs2edcbeceuenywibeabisetes BNE etd kee Chad ee gey 14 101 Set Pagebreak
100. 48 Fabric Security license 14 25 factory defaults 14 68 Fcping command 14 22 example 5 28 Index 3 SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide XX QLOGIC ee Fctrace command 14 23 example 5 29 FDMI See Fabric Device Management Interface Feature command 14 25 Add example 5 30 Log example 5 30 feature upgrade 5 29 14 25 Fibre Channel connection 5 28 routing 5 29 file download and upload 2 7 File Transfer Protocol download files 2 7 5 15 download firmware 5 22 restore configuration file 5 16 service 14 117 user account 3 1 irmware 5 21 custom installation 5 24 image file 14 41 information 5 9 install with CLI 14 27 installation 5 20 list image files 14 41 non disruptive activation 14 40 one step installation 5 22 remove image files 14 41 retrieve image file 14 41 unpack image 14 42 upload file 2 8 version 14 189 Firmware Install command 14 27 example 5 20 FTP See File Transfer Protocol full text format 12 3 G gateway address 4 1 4 2 14 124 14 125 Greenwich Mean Time 5 17 Index 4 group add members 9 13 14 30 add to security set 9 11 copy 9 12 14 32 create 9 12 14 32 delete 9 12 description 9 1 edit member attributes 14 33 ISL 9 12 list 14 34 list members 14 34 management 9 12 membership 9 5 modify member 9 14 MS 9 12 14 32 port 9 12 remove from security set 9 11 remove members 9 14 14 34 rename 9 12 14 34 type 14 32 14 34 Group command 14 29 Add exampl
101. 5 5 2 0f 93 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy 6 TEST_SUITE_POST 0x13 TEST_STATIC_PORTADDR 0x72 DIAGS_ERR_CPORT_VERIFY 0x34 0 0 0 0x00000005 0x0082202b 0x00a2202b 59263 01 A 14 171 14 Command Reference XX Show Setup Callhome QLOGIC ee Show Setup Callhome Displays the Call Home database configuration Authority None Syntax show setup callhome Examples The following is an example of the Show Setup Callhome command SANbox gt show setup callhome Callhome Information PrimarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 PrimarySMTPServerPort 25 PrimarySMTPServerEnabled False SecondarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 SecondarySMTPServerPort 25 SecondarySMTPServerEnabled False ContactEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain PhoneNumber lt undefined gt StreetAddress lt undefined gt FromEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ReplyToEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ThrottleDupsEnabled True indicates active SMTP server 14 172 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Setup Mfg T_T Show Setup Mfg Displays manufacturing information about the switch Authority None Syntax show setup mfg Examples The following is an example of the Show Setup Mfg command SANbox gt show setup mfg Manufacturing Information BrandName QLogic BuildDate Unknown ChassisPartNumber SANbox 5802V ChassisSerialNumber 0331000011 CPUBoardSerialNumber 0331000011 LicensedPorts 24 MACAddress O0se0idds02 ce 17
102. 5 Group Member Attributes Attribute Description Authentication ISL and Port Groups CTAuthentication MS Groups Primary Hash ISL and Port Groups Hash MS Groups Primary Secret ISL and Port Groups Secondary Hash ISL and Port Groups Secondary Secret ISL and Port Groups Secret MS Groups Enables CHAP or disables None authentication using the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP CT authentication Enables True or disables False authentication for MS group members The default is False The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Primary Secret sent by the member The hash functions are MD5 or SHA 1 If the member does not sup port the Primary Hash the switch will use the Secondary Hash The hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secret sent by the MS group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for authentication with the member The string has the fol lowing lengths depending on the Primary Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte E SHA 1 hash 20 byte Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret sent by the group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 The Secondary Hash is used when the Primary Hash is not available on the group member The Primary Hash and the Secondary Hash cannot be the same Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for authentica
103. 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 16 14 220 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Zoning Merged OO aaa Zoning Merged Displays the contents of the merged zone set or saves the merged zone set to the non volatile zoning database Authority Admin session for the Capture keyword Syntax zoning merged capture Keywords capture Saves the merged zone set to the non volatile zoning database You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes If you omit this keyword this command displays the contents of the merged zone set Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Merged command SANbox gt zoning merged kkkkkx x xkx xk xkxk xk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkkkkxkkk kxk kxkx To permanently save the merged database locally execute the zoning merged capture command To edit the merged database use the zoning edit merged command To remove the merged database use the zoning restore command KEKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK Merged unsaved Zoning Information Zoneset Zone ZoneMember Z1 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 9 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 fa Z2 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 fb 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 fc The following is an example of the Zoning Merged Capture command SANbox admin gt zoning merged capture This command will overwrite the conf
104. 59263 01 A 2 1 2 Command Line Interface Usage AK Logging In to the Switch QLOGIC Logging In to the Switch To log in to a switch through Telnet do the following 1 Open a command line window on the workstation and enter the Telnet command followed by the switch IP address The IP address can be one of the following m 4 byte IP version 4 address m 16 byte IP version 6 address m Domain Name System DNS host name requires a DNS server The Telnet window opens prompting you for a login telnet ip_address Enter an account name and password The default account name is admin and its password is password switch login admin password XXXXXXXX The following warning appears when you log in for the first time Warning Your user account password has not been changed It is strongly recommended that you do so before proceeding To log off enter the Exit command SANbox gt exit To log in to a switch through the serial port do the following 1 N Configure the workstation port with the following settings 9600 baud 8 bit character 1 stop bit No parity Enter an account name and password when prompted The default account name is admin and its password is password 59263 01 A xX 2 Command Line Interface Usage QLOGIC Opening and Closing an Admin Session rr NOTE A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions which are reserved as follows Additional logins will
105. 7 Modify an SNMP Version 3 User Account 00005 13 8 Command Reference Access Authority tat ce eee aaa 14 1 Syntax and Keywords s a ssaa aaaea 14 2 Notes and Examples ctce cde eureekd sees aces oun eeeoneeeg Raaee 14 2 Command Listing ncaGavdadek be ohewes Ges pee ee bea Gar sega eee 14 2 AOA edarak a a EN o sew eee eee ek Se ee eee G 14 3 Alias arise ceca a ee A ae ee a eR ee a E 14 4 CalWOMes ciSeesctcetet Gu sesarededseatadea ceive seeeee ded 14 6 apie cis ooek4 e pidet cohol eae tees dee bedeweedese one mee 14 10 GONG si cradi eee che ae ee a A U a es utente E E EE E E Sa nas 14 13 Greate taneous ures ae r a e E N a ee a a 14 17 DAS ses case e pinire pe a ee AE OE e EEE L aE bee 14 20 Eileen anaua dd oa es dahl a dod dak dl ace acd deed eres 14 21 PODING etait ei etian cakane chute Geetha tin a e 14 22 Fotrace 8 bts anaes hee ewe te eee eee eee eee red 14 23 Feature isas mauaa a yages eatarel es beketetuees wea ee 14 25 Firmware Install 32 4 22 eawees Se Skee oped ss PON ee Reeds eke ee 14 27 OUD ecss exes e set aoe es oes ema eae nee cee nee 14 29 Hardest ci eat tatiana a a ah tet ieaeiteseedas hes 14 37 PGI ic eda tints ea ide ord ER a ee A E bee E E EE 14 38 FISIONV cis cn eet weed yea Gena ehs hale Cee Re wee Gales y Minus 14 39 POUCSE wiiGuseddrse di eestor debe pee tee ede eaeees 14 40 UA fsa coer be tee ane See es erate ee ie ee Seca 14 41 PSEC 2 ave ieds eet cae eah en Geese cd Ph eaa ae dted a E yes 14
106. A P6G22RL 1Gb s 2Gb s 4Gb s Temp Voltage C V ST e32 J3 Normal HighWarning 95 00 3 90 90 00 3 70 20 00 2 90 25 00 2 70 7 30 Normal 17 00 14 00 2 00 1 00 0 373 Normal 0 0 0 0 637 637 082 073 0 000 LowAlarm t 0 0 0 264 a191 028 019 59263 01 A 14 157 14 Command Reference XX Show Media QLOGIC SSS The following is an example of the Show Media command for all ports SANbox gt show media Note LowAlarm LowWarning HighWarning HighAlarm Port Vendor Name Temp Voltage Tx Bias Tx Pwr Rx Pwr Num C V mA mW mW 0 NotInstalled N A N A N A N A N A al NotApplicable N A N A N A N A N A 2 Unknown N A N A N A N A N A 3 FINISAR N A N A N A N A N A 4 FINISAR 37 32 3433 7330 0 37 0 000 5 FINISAR 37 32 3433 713 30 0 37 0 000 6 FINISAR 37 32 Zs 33k 7 30 0 37 0 000 7 FINISAR 37 32 34 334 7 30 0 37 0 000 gt 8 FINISAR S74 32 3433 7 30 0 37 0 000 9 FINISAR 37 32 3433 74 30 0 37 0 000 0 FINISAR S32 ZBF 7 30 0 37 0 000 1 FINISAR 37 32 3 33 Taah 0 37 0 000 2 FINISAR 37 32 3433 7 30 0 37 0 000 3 FINISAR S32 S334 7 30 0 37 0 000 4 FINISAR 37 32 3 33 7 30 0 37 0 000 5 FINISAR ST G32 Se 3 7 30 0 37 0 000 6 FINISAR 37432 3 33 7 30 0 37 0 000 T FINISAR 37 32 3 334 7 30 037 0 000 8 FINISAR 37 32 3 33 7 30 0 37 0 000 9 FINISAR 31 32 Se 7 30 0 371 0 000 20 Unknown N A N A N A N A N A 21 INFIN
107. A port device in member_list can have any of the following formats Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex m 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XX IXXXXIXX XXIXX XXIXX The application verifies that the alias format is correct but does not validate that such a port device exists copy alias source alias_destination Creates a new alias named alias_destination and copies the membership into it from the alias given by alias_ source create alias Creates an alias with the name given by alias An alias name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 aliases 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Alias a delete alias Deletes the specified alias given by alias from the zoning database If the alias is a member of the active zone set the alias will not be removed from the active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated list Displays a list of all aliases This keyword does not require an Admin session members alias Displays all members of the alias given by alias This keyword does not require an Admin session remove alias member_list Removes the ports devices given by member_list from the alias
108. An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time either through the CLI QuickTools or Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 You must also open a Security Edit session with the Security Edit command The Security Edit session provides access to the Securityset Group and Security commands with which you make modifications to the security database SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt security edit SANbox admin security gt securityset SANbox admin security gt group SANbox admin security gt security When you are finished making changes enter the Security Save command to save the changes and close the Security Edit session SANbox admin security gt security save To close the session without saving changes enter the Security Cancel command SANbox admin security gt security cancel Changes to the active security set do not take effect until you activate it with the Security Activate command The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators when you are done making changes to the switch SANbox admin gt security activate SANbox admin gt admin end 59263 01 A 9 9 9 Device Security Configuration AK Resetting the Security Database QLOGIC SS ee Resetting the Security Database There are two ways to remove all groups and security sets from the security database m Enter the Security Clear comma
109. Arbitration loop fairness Enables True or disables False the switch s priority to arbitrate on the loop The default is False Enables True or disables False the scanning of the con nected device for FC 4 descriptor information during login The default is True Enables False or disables True the immediate transmis sion of RSCN messages when communication between a port and a device is interrupted If enabled the RSCN mes sage is delayed for 200 ms for locally attached devices and 400 ms for devices connected through other switches The default is False This parameter is ignored if OStreamGuard is enabled Send ARB_FF True instead of IDLEs False on the loop The default is False Interoperability credit The number of buffer to buffer credits per port 0 means the default is unchanged Default buffer to buffer credits are 16 per port Changing interoperability credits is necessary only for E Ports that are connected to non FC SW 2 compliant switches Contact your authorized maintenance provider for assistance in using this feature 59263 01 A 14 87 14 Command Reference Set Config Port XX QLOGIC E rll Table 14 19 Port Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter FANEnable AutoPerfTuning LCFEnable MFSEnable ViEnable MSEnable NoClose Fabric address notification Enables True or disables False the communication of the FL_Port address port name and n
110. BERBER AEE Binding 0 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 17 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret alt Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret ERAN Binding 0 Enter the Securityset Active command to display the name of the active security set and its activation history as shown in the following example SANbox gt securityset active Active SecuritySet Information ActiveSecuritySet alpha LastActivatedBy Remote LastActivatedOn day month date time year 9 4 59263 01 A XKX 9 Device Security Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Security Database Information ls Security Set Membership Information The Securityset Groups and Group Securitysets commands display security set membership information Enter the Securityset Groups command to display the member groups for a specified security set as shown in the following example SANbox gt securityset groups alpha Current list of Groups for SecuritySet alpha groupl ISL group2 Port Enter the Group Securitysets command to display the security sets for which a specified group is a member as shown in the following example SANbox gt group securitysets group_1l Current list of SecuritySets for Group group_l SecuritySet_1l SecuritySet_2 SecuritySet_A SecuritySet_B Group Membership Information Enter the Group Members command to display the members for a specified group as shown in the following example SANbox gt group members group_1l Current list of members for G
111. Call Home service configuration entries SANbox admin gt set setup callhome A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so If either the Primary or Secondary SMTP Servers are enabled the FromEmailAddress attribute must be configured or the switch will not attempt to deliver messages Current Values PrimarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 PrimarySMTPServerPort 25 PrimarySMTPServerEnable False SecondarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 SecondarySMTPServerPort 25 SecondarySMTPServerEnable False ContactEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain PhoneNumber lt undefined gt StreetAddress lt undefined gt FromEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ReplyToEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ThrottleDupsEnabled True New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit PrimarySMTPServerAddr IPv4 IPv6 or hostname PrimarySMTPServerPort decimal value PrimarySMTPServerEnable True False SecondarySMTPServerAddr IPv4 IPv6 or hostname SecondarySMTPServerPort decimal value SecondarySMTPServerEanble True False ContactEmailAddress ex admin company com PhoneNumber ex 1 800 123 4567 StreetAddress include all address info FromEmailAddress ex bldg3 company com ReplyToEmailAddress ex admin3 company
112. Configuration on page 13 4 for more information Enter the Set Setup Services command to enable SNMP as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set setup services A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so PLEASE NOTE Further configuration may be required after enabling a service If services are disabled the connection to the switch may be lost When enabling SSL please verify that the date time settings on this switch and the workstation from where the SSL connection will be started match and then a new certificate may need to be created to ensure a secure connection to this switch TelnetEnabled True False True SSHEnabled True False False GUIMgmt Enabled True False rue SSLEnabled True False False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True False True SNMPEnabled True False rue NTPEnabled True False False CIMEnabled True False False FTPEnabled True False True Mgmt ServerEnabled True False True CallHomeEnabled True False True Do you want to save and activate this services setup y n n You can display the SNMPEnabled parameters using the Show Setup Snmp or Show Setup Services commands 13 2 59263 01 A XKX 1
113. Current settings for log Started True FilterComponent NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp CLI QFS FilterLevel Info DisplayLevel Critical FilterPort 0223 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Restore the Event Log Configuration Enter the Set Log Restore command in an Admin session to return the event log configuration to the factory default as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set log restore Clearing the Event Log Enter the Set Log Clear command in an Admin session to delete all entries in the event log as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set log clear 11 Event Log Configuration AK Logging to a Remote Host QLOGIC ee Logging to a Remote Host The switch comes from the factory with local logging enabled which instructs the switch firmware to maintain an event log in switch memory The switch can also be configured to log events to a remote host that supports the syslog protocol This requires that you enable remote logging on the switch and specify an IP address for the remote host NOTE To log event messages on a remote host you must edit the syslog conf file on the remote host and then restart the syslog daemon The syslog conf file must contain an entry that specifies the name of the log file Add the following line to the syslog conf file A lt tab gt separates the selector field local0 info and action field which contains the
114. EON N A N A N A N A N A 22 INFINEON 39 62 N A 5 84 0 637 0 092 23 INFINEON 39 62 N A 5 84 0 637 0 092 14 158 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Mem I Show Mem Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 59263 01 A Displays information about memory activity None show mem count count The number of seconds for which to display memory information If you omit count the value 1 is used Displayed memory values are in 1K block units NOTE This keyword will display memory activity updates until count is reached it cannot be interrupted Therefore avoid using large values for count The following is an example of the Show Mem command SANbox gt show mem procs memory swap io system cpu ED swpd free buff cache si so bi bo in cs us sy id wa 1 0 0 334464 55932 18728 0 0 1 O 401 57 1 2 97 Q Filesystem space in use 41138 53188 KB 77 14 159 14 Command Reference XX Show Ns QLOGIC SSS Show Ns Displays the WWNs for devices in the fabric Authority None Syntax show ns option Keywords option The domain IDs or port IDs for which to display name server information If you omit option name server information for the local domain ID is displayed option can have the following values all Displays WWNs for all switches and ports domain_id Displays WWNs for all devices connected to the swi
115. Enables True or disables False secure SSL connections for management applications including Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 QuickTools Application Programming Interface and SMI S The default is False m The SSL service requires the Fabric Security license key m This service must be enabled to authenticate users through a RADIUS server m Enabling SSL automatically creates a security certificate on the switch To enable secure SSL connections you must first syn chronize the date and time on the switch and workstation m To disable SSL when using a user authentication RADIUS server the RADIUS server authentication order must be local Enables True or disables False the QuickTools embedded switch management application QuickTools enables you to point at a switch with an internet browser and manage the switch This parameter is the master control for the Set Setup System command parameter EmbeddedGUlEnabled The default is True Enables True or disables False the management of the switch through third party applications that use the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP This parameter is the master control for the Set Setup SNMP command param eter SNMPEnabled The default is True Enables True or disables False the Network Time Protocol NTP which allows the synchronizing of switch and worksta tion dates and times with an NTP server This helps to pre vent invalid SSL certificates and timestamp confu
116. For MS member attributes refer to Table 14 4 Enter the Group Edit command to change the attributes of a group member SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt security edit SANbox admin security gt group edit G1 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Group Name g1 Group Type ISL Group Member 102002002cOrdd 00 90 a3 Authentication None Chap None chap PrimaryHash MD5 SHA 1 MD5 sha 1 PrimarySecret 40 hex or 20 ASCII char value 12345678901234567890 SecondaryHash MD5 SHA 1 None None md5 SecondarySecret 32 hex or 16 ASCII char value 1234567890123456 Binding domain ID 1 239 0 None 3 Finished configuring attributes To discard this configuration use the security cancel command Remove Members from a Group Enter the Group Remove command to remove a member from a group as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt group remove group_1l 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 9 14 59263 01 A XX eo Relc leq 70 RADIUS Server Configuration NOTE RADIUS server configuration requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Authen
117. Limits command to display a summary of the objects in the zoning database and their maximum limit as shown in the following example SANbox gt zoning limits Configured saved in NVRAM Zoning Attribute MaxZoneSets MaxZones MaxAliases MaxTotalMembers MaxZonesInZonesets MaxMembersPerZone MaxMembersPerAlias ActiveZones ActiveZoneMembers Maximum 2000 Current oo UU U n U Be wo b w wW u He w e w D 2 19 160 Zoning Information Zoning Name D_1_JBOD_1 D_1_Photons D_2_JBOD1 D_2_NewJBOD_2 E1JBOD1 E2JBOD2 LinkReset Zone LinkReset Zone2 NewJBOD1 NewJBOD2 Q_1Photonl Q_1_NewJBOD1 Q_1_Photon_1 2 NewJBOD2 ZoneAlias ZoneDomainPort ZoneFCAddr AliasInAZone To display abbreviated limits information enter the Zoning Limits Brief command 59263 01 A 7 9 7 Zoning Configuration ped Configuring the Zoning Database QLOGIC ee Configuring the Zoning Database You can configure how the zoning database is applied to the switch and exchanged with the fabric through the zoning configuration parameters The following zoning configuration parameters are available through the Set Config Zoning command Refer to Table 14 24 for more information about the zoning configuration parameters m MergeAutoSave This parameter enables or disables the automatic saving of a new active zone set to the switch non volatile zoning database m DefaultZone This parameter allows or denies communicat
118. Nbox gt callhome queue stats Callhome Queue Information FileSystemSpacelInUse EntriesInQueue 534 bytes 59263 01 A XKX 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Managing the Call Home Database OT eT Creating a Profile Enter the Profile Create command to create a Call Home profile as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt profile create profile_1 A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Default Values Level Alarm Format FullText MaxSize 100000 EmailSubject lt undefined gt RecipientEmail up to 10 entries allowed New Value press ENTER to accept default value q to quit Level Alarm Critical Warn None Format 1 FullText 2 ShortText 3 Tscl MaxSize decimal value 650 100000 EmailSubject string max 64 chars N None Technical problem RecipientEmail ex admin company com N None 1 lt undefined gt admin0 company com The profile has been created This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHom
119. OGIC Configuring the Security Database TO a rrr Configuring the Security Database You can configure how the security database is applied to the switch and exchanged with the fabric through the security configuration parameters The following security configuration parameters are available through the Set Config Security command m AutoSave This parameter enables or disables the saving of changes to active security set in the switch s non volatile security database m FabricBindingEnabled This parameter enables or disables the configuration and enforcement of fabric binding on all switches in the fabric Fabric binding associates switch worldwide names with a domain ID in the creation of ISL groups If AutoSave is False you can revert device security changes that have been received from another switch through the activation of a security set or merging of fabrics Enter the Security Restore command to replace the volatile security database with the contents of the non volatile security database To restore the security configuration to its factory values you can enter the Reset Config or Reset Factory command Notice however that these commands restore other aspects of the switch configuration also 59263 01 A 9 7 9 Device Security Configuration AK Configuring the Security Database QLOGIC nn To modify the security configuration you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command An Admin session preve
120. OLD password PORK KK account NEW password 8 20 chars SOR Ree please confirm account NEW password x password has been changed 3 4 59263 01 A XX eo Rel c eq 4 Network Configuration Network configuration consists of the IP parameters that identify the switch in the network and provide for IP security This section describes the following network configuration tasks m Displaying the Network Configuration Configuring the Ethernet Port m Verifying a Switch in the Network m Managing IP Security Displaying the Network Configuration The Show Fabric command displays IP addresses for all switches in the fabric as shown in the following example SANbox gt show fabric Domain 133 0x85 WWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 0d 53 91 SymbolicName SANbox HostName lt undefined gt EthIPv4Address 10 20 116 133 EthIPv 6 Address lt undefined gt indicates principal switch 59263 01 A 4 1 4 Network Configuration AK Configuring the Ethernet Port QLOGIC SSS The Show Setup System command displays the entire switch network configuration which includes the following m P configurations versions 4 and 6 m DNS server configuration To display specific information add the corresponding keyword For example to display IP version 6 configuration information enter the Show Setup System lIpv6 command SANbox gt show setup system ipv6 System Information EthIPv6NetworkEnable False EthIPv6 N
121. Offline internal NeverRun 0 02 Offline internal Passed 4 0 03 Offline internal NeverRun 0 04 Offline internal NeverRun 0 05 Offline internal NeverRun 0 06 Offline internal NeverRun 0 07 Offline internal StoppedOnError 12 2 CPUO Offline internal NeverRun 0 CPU1 Offline internal NeverRun 0 59263 01 A 14 197 14 Command Reference XX Test Switch QLOGIC ee Test Switch Authority Syntax Keywords 14 198 Tests all ports on the switch using a connectivity test an offline test or an online test Admin session test switch connectivity loopback_type offline loopback_type online connectivity loopback_type Performs a connectivity test of the type given by loopback_type on all switch ports You must place the switch in the diagnostics state using the Set Switch State command before starting the test loopback_type can be one of the following internal Exercises all internal port and inter port connections external Exercises all internal port transceiver and inter port connections A transceiver with a loopback plug is required for all ports offline loopback_type Performs an offline test of the type given by loopback_type on all switch ports You must place the switch in the diagnostics state using the Set Switch State command before starting the test loopback_type can have the following values internal Exercises all internal port connections external Exercises all port
122. Port Configuration XX Configuring Port Threshold Alarms QLOGIC aww Enter the Set Config Threshold command to enable and configure port threshold monitoring on the switch SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config threshold A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so ThresholdMonitoringEnabled True False False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 25 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 25 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 0 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 ISLMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 2 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 0 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LoginMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 5 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LogoutMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 5 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LOSMonitoringEnabled
123. Reference QLOGIC Zone Examples The following is an example of the Zone List command SANbox gt zone list zone ZoneSet wwn_b0241f zone_set_l wwn_23bd31 zone_set_l wwn_221416 zone_set_2 wwn_2215c3 zone_set_2 wwn_0160ed zone_set_3 The following is an example of the Zone Members command SANbox gt zone members wwn_b0241f Current List of Members for Zone wwn_b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 21 00 00 e0 8b 02 41 2f The following is an example of the Zone Orphans command SANbox gt zone orphans Current list of orphan zones zone3 zone4 The following is an example of the Zone Zonesets command SANbox gt zone zonesets zonel Current List of ZoneSets for Zone zonel zone_set_l 59263 01 A 14 207 14 Command Reference XX Zoneset QLOGIC ae Zoneset Authority Syntax Keywords 14 208 Manages zone sets and component zones across the fabric Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Refer to the Zoning Edit command on page 14 216 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session The Active List and Zones keywords are available without an Admin session You must close the Zoning Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate keywords zoneset activate zone_set active add zone_set zone_list copy zone_set_source zone_set_destination create zone_set deactivate delete zone_set list remove zon
124. RisingTrigger 5 FallingTrigger SampleWindow 0 LOSMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 00 FallingTrigger 5 SampleWindow 0 59263 01 A 14 143 14 Command Reference XX Show Config Zoning LOGIC E amp Show Config Zoning Displays zoning configuration parameters for the switch Authority None Syntax show config zoning Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Zoning command SANbox gt show config zoning Configuration Name default MergeAutoSave True DefaultZone Allow DiscardInactive False 14 144 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Domains Show Domains Displays list of each domain and its worldwide name in the fabric Authority None Syntax show domains Examples The following is an example of the Show Domains command SANbox gt show domains Principal switch is remote 10 00 00 60 69 50 0b 6c Upstream Principal ISL is zil Domain ID List Domain 97 0x61 WWN 10 00 00 cO dd 00 7l ed Domain 98 0x62 WWN 10 00 00 60 df 22 2e 0c Domain 99 0x63 WWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 72 45 Domain 100 0x64 WWN 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 ba 68 Domain 101 0x65 WWN 10 00 00 60 df 22 2e 06 Domain 102 0x66 WWN 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 90 ef Domain 103 0x67 WWN 10 00 00 60 69 50 0b 6c Domain 104 0x68 WWN 10 00 00 cO dd 00 b8 b7 59263 01 A 14 145 14 Command Reference XX Show Donor LOGIC SSS Show Donor Displays list of current donors and extended credit
125. Save DefaultZone Discardinactive True Allow False Table 14 14 SNMP Configuration Defaults Parameter Default SNMPEnabled Contact Location Description ObjectID AuthFailureTrap ProxyEnabled SNMPv3Enabled Trap 1 5 Address Trap 1 5 Port Trap 1 5 Severity Trap 1 5 Version Trap 1 5 Enabled True lt syscontact undefined gt lt sysLocation undefined gt SANbox 5802V Series FC Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 3873 1 9 False True False Trap 1 10 0 0 254 Traps 2 5 0 0 0 0 162 Warning 2 False 14 74 59263 01 A XKX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Reset TT ccc Table 14 15 RADIUS Configuration Defaults Parameter Default DeviceAuthOrder Local UserAuthOrder Local TotalServers 0 DeviceAuthServer False UserAuthServer False AccountingServer False ServerlPAddress 10 0 0 1 ServerUDPPort 1812 Timeout 2 seconds Retries 0 SignPackets False Table 14 16 Switch Services Configuration Defaults Parameter Default TelnetEnabled True SSHEnabled False GUIMgmtEnabled True SSLMgmtEnabled False EmbeddedGUlEnabled True SNMPEnabled True NTPEnabled False CIMEnabled True FTPEnabled True MgmtServerEnabled True CallHomeEnabled True 59263 01 A 14 75 14 Command Reference XX Reset QLOGIC P TTT Table 14 17 System Configuration Defaults Parameter Default Ethernet Network Enable True Ethernet Network Discovery Static Ethernet Network IP Address 10 0 0
126. Timeouts 0 Class2FramesOut 0 LossOfSync 0 Class2WordsIn 0 LostFrames 0 Class2WordsOut 0 LostRRDYs 0 Class3FramesiIn 0 PrimSeqErrors 0 Class3FramesOut 0 RxLinkResets 0 Class3Toss 0 RxOfflineSeq 0 Class3WordsIn 0 ShortFramesIn 0 Class3WordsOut 0 TotalErrors 0 DecodeErrors 0 TotalLinkResets 0 EpConnects 0 TotalLIPsRecvd 0 FBusy 0 TotalLIPsXmitd 2 FlowErrors 0 TotalOfflineSeq 0 FReject 0 TotalRxFrames 0 InvalidCRC 0 TotalRxWords 0 InvalidDestAddr 0 TotalTxFrames 0 LIP_AL_PD_AL_PS 0 TotalTxWords 0 LIP_F7_AL_PS 0 TxLinkResets 0 LIP_F7_F7 0 TxOfflineSeq 0 LIP_F8_AL_ PS 0 59263 01 A 6 3 6 Port Configuration AK Displaying Port Information QLOGIC EEE Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Parameters Enter the Show Config Threshold command to display the port threshold alarm parameters These parameters determine the error thresholds at which the switch issues alarms Refer to Table 14 23 for a description of these parameters SANbox gt show config threshold Configuration Name default ThresholdMonitoringEnabled False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 25 FallingTrigger SampleWindow 0 DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 25 FallingTrigger 0 SampleWindow 0 ISLMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 2 FallingTrigger 0 SampleWindow 0 LoginMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 5 FallingTrigger SampleWindow 0 LogoutMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 5 FallingTrigger SampleWindow 0 LOSMonitoringEna
127. V Fibre Channel Switch XKX Command Line Interface Guide QLOGIC ee Page xiv 59263 01 A XX eo Relc leq 1 Introduction This guide describes the features and use of the command line interface for SANbox 5802V switches running firmware version 7 4 This guide is organized as follows Section 1 describes switch models and features the intended audience related materials new items in this release and technical support m Section 2 describes logging on and off of a switch opening and closing an Admin session entering commands getting help paging a switch setting page breaks and loading and retrieving files Section 3 describes the management of user accounts and passwords Section 4 describes configuring the switch network configuration Section 5 describes managing the switch configuration setting the date and time backing up and restoring the switch configuration resetting the switch installing firmware and installing feature licenses Section 6 describes port configurations resetting a port initializing a port loop configuring port threshold alarms and testing ports m Section 7 describes managing the zoning database and configuring interoperability Section 8 describes managing connection security Section 9 describes managing device security Section 10 describes managing the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS server Section 11 describes events and event logging Section 12
128. X Set Setup System QLOGIC ee The following is an example of the Set Setup System Ipv4 command SANbox admin gt set setup system ipv4 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values EthIPv4NetworkEnable True EthIPv4NetworkDiscovery Static EthIPv4NetworkAddress 10 20 116 133 EthIPv4NetworkMask 255 255 2550 EthIPv4GatewayAddress 10 20 116 1 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none EthIPv4NetworkEnable True False EthIPv4NetworkDiscovery 1 Static 2 Bootp 3 Dhcp 4 Rarp EthIPv4NetworkAddress dot notated IP Address EthIPv4NetworkMask dot notated IP Address EthIPv4GatewayAddress dot notated IPv4 Address Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n The following is an example of the Set Setup System Ipv6 command SANbox admin gt set setup system ipv6 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values EthIPv6NetworkEnable False EthIPv 6 Discovery Static EthIPv6NetworkAddress lt undefined gt
129. XX oj Relci eq SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide Firmware Version 7 4 59263 01 A ie SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch AA Command Line Interface Guide QLOGIC Me Information furnished in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable However QLogic Corporation assumes no responsibility for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use QLogic Corporation reserves the right to change product specifications at any time without notice Applications described in this document for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only QLogic Corporation makes no representation nor warranty that such applications are suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification QLogic Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document This SANbox switch is covered by one or more of the following patents 6697359 other patents pending QLogic and SANbox are trademarks or registered trademarks of QLogic Corporation Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 2000 2003 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Document Revision History Release Revision A April 2008 Firmware Version 7 4 2008 QLogic Corporation All Rights Reserved Worldwide First P
130. Zoning Modification History Zoning Database Limits Configured Zone Set Information The Zoneset List and the Zoning List commands display information about the all zone sets in the non volatile zoning database Enter the Zoneset List command to display a list of the zone sets as shown in the following example SANbox gt zoneset list Current List of ZoneSets 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Zoning Database Information Or Enter the Zoning List command to display all zone sets zones and zone members in the active zone set and configured zone sets as shown in the following example Merged and edited zone sets are displayed if they exist SANbox gt zoning list Active enforced ZoneSet Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 23 bd 31 wwn_221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn_2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 c3 Configured saved in NVRAM Zoning Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 23 bd 31 wwn_221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn_2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 16 59263 01 A 7 3 7 Zoning Configuration AK Displaying Zoning Da
131. active configuration edit config_name Opens an edit session for the configuration given by config_name If you omit config_name the currently active configuration is used export account_name ip_address file_name Exports an existing backup configuration file configdata from the switch to a remote server The server IP address and corresponding user account are given by ip address and account_name respectively ip address can be an IP address version 4 or 6 or a DNS host name The file name on the remote server is given by file_name The system will prompt for a password if the server requires one import account_name ip_address file_name Imports a backup configuration file given by file_name from a remote server to the switch The server IP address and corresponding user account are given by ip address and account_name respectively ip address can be an IP address version 4 or 6 or a DNS host name The file name on the remote server is given by file_name The system will prompt for a password if the server requires one You must enter the Config Restore command to apply the configuration to the switch list Displays a list of all available configurations on the switch This keyword does not require an Admin session restore import Restores configuration settings to an out of band switch from a backup file named configdata which must be first uploaded on the switch using FTP You create the
132. admin IB sessionll ConfigurationLastEditedOn day month date time year Database Checksum 00007558 The following is an example of the Security Limits command SANbox gt security limits Security Attribute Maximum Current Name MaxSecuritySets 4 MaxGroups 16 2 MaxTotalMembers 1000 19 MaxMembersPerGroup 1000 4 groupl 15 group2 59263 01 A 14 79 14 Command Reference XX Security QLOGIC E eee The following is an example of the Security List command SANbox gt security list Active Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember No active securityset defined Configured Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember groupl ISL 10200200200200210e21216 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret KERERE EAS Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret RARER E RAE Binding 0 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 17 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret plea ed Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret REE EERE Binding 0 14 80 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Securityset a Securityset Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A NOTE This command requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Use the Feature command to install a license key Manages security sets in the security database Admin session and a Security Edit session Refer to the Security command on
133. admin start SANbox admin gt config restore The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration Please confirm y n n y Alarm Msg day month date time year A1005 0021 SM Configuration is being restored this could take several minutes Alarm Msg day month date time year A1000 000A SM The switch will be reset in 3 seconds due to a config restore SANbox admin gt Alarm Msg day month date time year A1000 0005 SM The switch is being reset 14 16 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Create a Create Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Creates support files for troubleshooting switch problems and certificates for secure communications for Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 and SMI S Admin session for the Certificate keyword create certificate support certificate Creates a security certificate on the switch The security certificate is required to establish an SSL connection with a management application such as Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 The certificate is valid 24 hours before the certificate creation date and expires 365 days after the creation date Should the current certificate become invalid use the Create Certificate command to create a new one NOTE To insure the creation of a valid certificate be sure that the switch and the workstation time and date are the same Refer to the following commands m Date command on page 14 20 for informa
134. al value 1 255 254 ConfigDescription string max 64 chars Default Config 14 96 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Config Threshold i Set Config Threshold Authority Syntax 59263 01 A Sets the port alarm threshold parameters by which the switch monitors port performance and generates alarms The changes you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save command Admin session and a Config Edit session set config threshold Initiates a configuration session by which to generate and log alarms for selected events The system displays each event its triggers and a sampling window one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Table 14 23 describes the port alarm threshold parameters Table 14 23 Port Alarm Threshold Parameters Parameter Description Threshold Monitoring Enabled Master enable disable parameter for all events Enables True or disables False the generation of all enabled event alarms The default is False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled The event type enable disable parameter Enables DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True or disables False the generation of alarms for each of the following events ISLMonitoringEnabled a m CRC errors LoginMonitoringEnabled ae m Decode errors LogoutMonitoringEnable
135. allhome gt callhome changeover The currently active CallHome SMTP server will change Please confirm y n n y Though the active server status changes the primary SMTP server remains the primary and the secondary SMTP server remains the secondary Clearing the Call Home Message Queue Enter the Callhome Queue Clear command to clear email messages from the Call Home message queue as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome queue clear The callhome queue will be cleared Please confirm y n n y Refer to the Callhome Queue Stats command to display the contents of the Call Home message queue Resetting the Call Home Database 12 16 There are two ways to reset the Call Home database Enter the Callhome Clear command to clear all Callhome profiles as shown in the following example This command resets the Tech_Support_Center profile to the factory default but does not affect the Call Home service configuration SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt callhome clear SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHome database profiles will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 59263 01 A Da 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Resetting the Call Home Database A O OO Enter the Reset Callhome command to clear all Call Home profiles and resets the Tech_Support_Center profile and Call Home service con
136. alue 0 127 bytes Host to host switch gt host SourceAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address fe80 2c0 ddff fe03 d4cl DestinationAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 Protocol l esp 2 esp old 3 ah 4 ah old s th SPI decimal value 256 4294967295 s 333 Authentication select an authentication algorithm 1 hmac md5 16 byte key 2 hmac shal 20 byte key 3 hmac sha256 32 byte key 4 aes xcbc mac 16 byte key authentication algorithm choice 2 AuthenticationKey quoted string or raw hex bytes 12345678901234567890 Encryption select an encryption algorithm 1 des cbc 8 byte key 2 3des cbc 24 byte key 3 null 0 byte key 4 blowfish chbc 5 56 byte key 5 aes cbe 16 24 32 byte key 6 twofish cbec 16 32 byte key encryption algorithm choice 2 EncryptionKey quoted string or raw hex bytes 123456789012345678901234 The security association has been created This configuration must be saved with the ipsec save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the ipsec cancel command 59263 01 A 14 49 14 Command Reference AK Ipsec List QLOGIC ee Ipsec List Authority Syntax Keywords 14 50 Displays information about IP security associations and policies None ipsec list active association option configured edited policy option active Displays a summary of active associations and policies This is the def
137. alue shown in brackets Enter q to end the configuration Table 14 19 describes the port configuration parameters Table 14 19 Port Configuration Parameters Parameter Description AdminState Port administrative state m Online Activates and prepares the port to send data This is the default E Offline Prevents the port from receiving signal and accepting a device login Diagnostics Prepares the port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login Down Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Config Port Table 14 19 Port Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Description LinkSpeed PortType SymbolicPortName ALFairness SFP ports only DeviceScanEnabled ForceOffline RSCN ARB_FF InteropCredit Transmission speed E SFP Ports 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps 8 Gbps or Auto The default is Auto 8 Gbps SFPs do not support the 1 Gbps setting Settting a port to 1 Gbps that has an 8 Gbps SFP will down the port E XPAK Ports 10 Gbps 20 Gbps or Auto The default is Auto Port types E SFP Ports GL G F FL Donor The default is GL E XPAK Ports GL G F FL Donor The default is GL Descriptive name for the port The name can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is Port n where nis the port number
138. ample of the Zoning Configured command SANbox gt zoning configured Configured saved in NVRAM Zoning Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn_b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 23 bd 31 wwn_221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn_2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 16 14 214 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Zoning Delete Orphans OO Zoning Delete Orphans Deletes all objects that are not part of the active zone set including zone sets zones and aliases Authority Admin session Syntax zoning delete orphans Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Delete Orphans command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning delete orphans This command will remove all zonesets zones and aliases that are not currently active Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin gt zoning save 59263 01 A 14 215 14 Command Reference XX Zoning Edit QLOGIC E LL Zoning Edit Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 14 216 Opens a Zoning Edit session for the non volatile zoning database or the merged zone set in which to create and manage zone sets and zones Refer to the Zone command on page 14 205 and the Zoneset command on page 14 208 Admin session zoning edit
139. an Admin session with the account name Admin If you omit account_name you will be prompted to change the password for the current account name Examples The following is an example of the Passwd command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt passwd user2 Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account OLD password 5 RRR Ck account NEW password 8 20 chars SOR Ee please confirm account NEW password x password has been changed 59263 01 A 14 59 14 Command Reference AK Ping QLOGIC SS Ping Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 14 60 Initiates an attempt to communicate with another switch over an Ethernet network and reports the result None ping host_name ipv4 host_address ipv6 host_address host_name DNS host name of the switch you want to query host_name is a character string of 2 125 characters made up of one or more subdomains delimited by periods The following naming rules apply m Valid characters are alphanumeric characters period and hyphen m Each subdomain must be a minimum of two alphanumeric characters m Each subdomain must start and end with an alphanumeric character mE A host name can end with a period ipv4 host_address IP address version 4 or DNS host name of the switch you want to query Broadcast IP addresses such as 255 255 255 255 are not valid ipv6 host_address IP address version 6 or DNS host name
140. an configure both groups of parameters for all SNMP traps or you can configure the common and trap specific parameters separately Refer to Table 14 30 for descriptions of the common and trap specific SNMP parameters The following example configures the common SNMP trap configuration parameters SANbox admin gt set setup snmp common A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values SnmpEnabled True Contact lt sysContact undefined gt Location lt sysLocation undefined gt ReadCommunity public WriteCommunity private AuthFailureTrap False ProxyEnabled True SNMPv3Enabled False New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit SnmpEnabled True False Contact string max 64 chars Location string max 64 chars ReadCommunity string max 32 chars WriteCommunity string max 32 chars AuthFailureTrap True False ProxyEnabled True False SNMPv3Enabled True False Do you want to save and activate this snmp setup y n n 13 4 59263 01 A XC 13 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration LOGIC Resetting the SNMP Configuration A O The following example configures SNMP trap 1 SANbox admin gt set setup snmp trap 1 A list of attributes wi
141. and Reference Set Setup System Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup System Dns command SANbox admin gt set setup system dns A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values DNSClientEnabled False DNSLocalHostname lt undefined gt DNSServerDiscovery Static DNSServerlAddress lt undefined gt DNSServer2Address lt undefined gt DNSServer3Address lt undefined gt DNSSearchListDiscovery Static DNSSearchListl lt undefined gt DNSSearchList2 lt undefined gt DNSSearchList3 lt undefined gt DNSSearchList4 lt undefined gt DNSSearchList5 lt undefined gt New Value press ENTER to accept current value gq to quit n for none DNSClientEnabled True False DNSLocalHostname hostname DNSServerDiscovery 1l Static 2 Dhcp 3 Dhcpv6 DNSServerlAddress IPv4 or IPv6 Address DNSServer2Address IPv4 or IPv6 Address DNSServer3Address IPv4 or IPv6 Address DNSSearchListDiscovery 1 Static 2 Dhcp 3 Dhcpv6 DNSSearchListl domain name DNSSearchList2 domain name DNSSearchList3 domain name DNSSearchList4 domain name DNSSearchList5 domain name Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n 59263 01 A 14 127 14 Command Reference X
142. and transceiver connections A transceiver with a loopback plug is required for all ports online Exercises port to device connections for all ports that are online This test does not disrupt communication on the ports 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Test Switch TO aaa a Notes Examples Table 14 45 describes the switch test parameters Table 14 45 Switch Test Parameters Parameter Description LoopCount Number of frames sent 1 4294967295 The default is 100 FrameSize Number of bytes in each test frame 40 2148 The default is 256 DataPattern 32 bit hexadecimal test value or default which defines random data StopOnError Stops the test when an error occurs True Otherwise the test continues to comple tion LoopForever Restarts the test after completion and con tinues until you cancel it True Otherwise the test ends normally after completion To cancel a switch test in progress enter the Test Cancel Switch command To display the status of a recent switch test or switch test in progress enter the Test Status Switch command The following example performs an offline internal test on a switch SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set switch state diagnostics SANbox admin gt test switch offline internal A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value I
143. aps must be unique Trap 1 5 Port Workstation port to which SNMP traps are sent Valid worksta tion port numbers are 1 65535 The default is 162 Trap 1 5 Severity Severity level to use when monitoring trap events The default is Warning Trap 1 5 Version SNMP version 1 or 2 to use in formatting the trap The default is 2 Trap 1 5 Enabled Enables True or disables False the SNMP trap 14 120 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Setup SNMP rT Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup Snmp Common command SANbox admin gt set setup snmp common A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values SnmpEnabled True Contact lt sysContact undefined gt Location lt sysLocation undefined gt ReadCommunity public WriteCommunity private AuthFailureTrap False ProxyEnabled True SNMPv3Enabled False New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit SnmpEnabled True False Contact string max 64 chars Location string max 64 chars ReadCommunity string max 32 chars WriteCommunity string max 32 chars AuthFailureTrap True False ProxyEnabled True False SNMPv3Enabled True False Do you want to save a
144. arameters Table 14 29 SNMP Common Configuration Parameters Parameter Description SNMPEnabled Enables True or disables False SNMP on the switch The default is True Contact Specifies the name of the person to be contacted to respond to trap events The name can be up to 64 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is undefined This value is also passed to the Call Home service configuration Location Specifies the name of the switch location The name can be up to 64 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is undefined This value is also passed to the Call Home service configuration ReadCommunity Read community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to read information from the switch This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The read community password can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is public WriteCommunity Write community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to write information to the switch This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The write community password can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is private 14 119 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup SNMP LOGIC See ee Table 14 29 SNMP Common Configuration Parameters Cont
145. arameters Parameter Protocol SPI Authentication AuthenticationKey Encryption EncryptionKey IP security protocol to be used to process data The protocol can be one of the following m Encapsulated Security Payload RFC 2406 esp m Encapsulated Security Payload RFC 1827 esp old m Authentication Header RFC 2402 ah m Authentication Header RFC 1826 ah old Security parameters index number Algorithm to use to authenticate the source or desti nation The authentication algorithm can be one of the following m HMAC MD5 m HMAC SHA1 m HMAC SHA256 E AES XCBC MAG Key string to use for authentication Algorithm that encrypts outbound data or decrypt inbound data The encryption algorithm can be one of the following m DES CBC E 3DES CBC Key string to use in encrypting or decrypting data delete association Deletes the specified association given by association from the Security Association database You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes edit association Opens an edit session in which to change the configuration of an existing association given by association For descriptions of the association parameters refer to Table 14 6 If the connection is not secure SSH is disabled the AuthenticationKey and EncryptionKey values are masked 59263 01 A 14 47 14 Command Reference XX lpsec Association QLOGIC ee list option
146. as ees 6 9 Resetting a POM 455 soit ax eeey ee n renan n annaa naa 6 10 Configuring Port Threshold Alarms 00 000 cece eee 6 11 Testing a POM sas soia ieia se heheh oe aem eee ake eee hin eS 6 13 Online Tests for PONGs2 i054265 0254055044 4454S wes ectaedes 6 13 Offline Tests for PONS vscce ere cetvens bales cewasaca Keenenae og 6 14 Page v SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch AK Command Line Interface Guide QLOGIC Page vi Display Port Test Results 0 00 e eee eee 6 15 Cancel a Port Tests caigetcadcineiewdia debts Phagateas eee 6 15 Zoning Configuration Displaying Zoning Database Information 0 0 cee eee eee 7 2 Configured Zone Set Information 0000 cee eee eee 7 2 Active Zone Set Information 2 2 ss425 5Gen ce ebsesisesdobeidas 7 4 Merged Zone Set Information 0020 0c e eee eee 7 5 Edited Zone Set Information 0 0000 e eee eee 7 5 Zone Set Membership Information 00 0 0c eee eee 7 6 Zone Membership Information 0000 cee eee eee 7 7 Orphan Zone Information 22 05 ene cade eee bene se eeb ee Seeaus 7 7 Alias and Alias Membership Information 04 7 7 Zoning Modification History 0 0 cee ee 7 8 Zoning Database LimitS 2 2 0c eee ee 7 9 Configuring the Zoning Database 0 0 cece eee eee 7 10 Modifying the Zoning Database 0 c eee ee 7 12 Saving the Active and Merged Zon
147. atabase This keyword does not affect the non volatile security database However if you enter the Security Clear command followed by the Security Save command the non volatile security database will be cleared from the switch NOTE The preferred method for clearing the security database from the switch is the Reset Security command 14 77 14 Command Reference XX Security LOGIC SSS edit Initiates a Security Edit session in which to make changes to the security database A Security Edit session enables you to use the Group and Securityset commands to create add and delete security sets groups and group members To close a Security Edit session and save changes enter the Security Save command To close a Security Edit session without saving changes enter the Security Cancel command history Displays history information about the security database and the active security set including the account name that made changes and when those changes were made This keyword does not require an Admin session limits Displays the current totals and the security database limits for the number of security sets groups members per group and total members This keyword does not require an Admin session list Displays all security sets groups and group members in the security database This keyword does not require an Admin session restore Restores the volatile security database with the contents of the non volatile secu
148. ault association option Displays the configuration for the associations given by option If you omit option the command displays the configuration of all active associations option can be one of the following association Displays the configuration for the association given by association active Displays the configuration for all active associations configured Displays the configuration for all user defined associations edited Displays the configuration for all associations that have been modified but not saved configured Displays a summary of the user defined associations and policies edited Displays a summary of the associations and policies that have been modified but not saved 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Ipsec List aa policy option Displays the configuration for the policies given by option If you omit option the command displays the configuration of all active policies option can be one of the following policy Displays the configuration for the policy given by policy active Displays the configuration for all active policies configured Displays the configuration for all user defined policies edited Displays the configuration for all policies that have been modified but not saved Examples The following is an example of the Ipsec List command SANbox gt ipsec list Active IPsec Information Security Association Database h2h sh sa h
149. ault q to quit TimeOfDay HH MM 02 00 DayOfWeek Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sat Interval decimal value 1 26 weeks 1 The selected capture entry has been edited for profile Tech_Support_Center This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command 59263 01 A 14 11 14 Command Reference XX Capture QLOGIC uE ee The following is an example of the Capture Remove command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt capture remove Capture Entries for Profile Tech_Support_Center Index TimeOfDay DayOfWeek Interval zl 02 00 Sat 1 weeks Please select a capture entry from the list above q to quit 1 The selected capture entry has been removed from profile Tech_Support_Center This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command 14 12 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Config COO cr Config Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Manages the Fibre Channel configurations on a switch For information about setting the port and switch configurations refer to the Set Config Switch command on page 14 95 Admin session for all keywords except Backup and List config activate config name backup ex
150. ault Online False OTE Online False 00000000 Passed 00000000 NeverRun 22 Normal 59263 01 A 14 183 14 Command Reference Show System XX QLOGIC ee Show System Displays the operational status of the Ethernet and DNS host name configuration parameters Authority None Syntax show system Examples The following is an example of the Show System command SANbox gt show system Assigned System Network Information Hostname EthIPv4NetworkAddress EthIPv6NetworkAddress DNSServerl DNSSearchListl IPv4GatewayListl IPv6GatewayListl NTPServer lt undefined gt 10 20 116 133 lt undefined gt lt undefined gt lt undefined gt 10 20 116 1 lt undefined gt 10 20 10 10 14 184 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Testlog a Show Testlog Displays the contents of the diagnostic field test log file Authority None Syntax show testlog or show test log Examples The following is an example of the Show Testlog command SANbox gt show testlog Queue UID Sequence Count 676 Success Count 420 Failed Count 2023 Records 127 Record 1 of 127 Time day mon dd hh mm ss yyyy Sequence Number 211 Test TEST_SUITE_BLADE_OFFLINE 0x12 Subtest TEST_FLOW_TC 0x97 Fault Code DIAGS_ERR_DATA_VERIFY 0xle Loops 1 Blade Asic Port 0 0 0 Record 2 of 127 Time day mon dd hh mm ss yyyy Sequence Number 211 Test TEST_SUITE_BLADE_OFFLINE 0x12 Subtest TEST_FLOW_TC 0x97
151. ax imum and default is 100 000 EmailSubject E mail subject of up to 64 characters RecipientMail Recipient e mail addresses maximum of 10 addresses The for mat is account domain CaptureEnabled Enables True or disables False the data capture configuration only when creating the Tech_Support_Center profile For more information about the data capture configuration refer to the Capture command delete profile Deletes the specified profile given by profile from the Call Home database You must enter the Callhome Save command afterwards to save your changes edit profile Opens an edit session in which to change the configuration of an existing profile given by profile The Tech_Support_Center profile can be edited For descriptions of the profile parameters refer to Table 14 8 The CaptureEnabled parameter is displayed only when modifying the Tech_Support_Center profile rename profile_old profile_new Renames the profile given by profile_old to the profile given by profile_new You must enter the Callhome Save command afterwards to save your changes 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Profile OT Examples The following is an example of the Profile Create command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt profile create profile_1 A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply pr
152. ay switch services configuration values Table 14 17 shows the system configuration defaults Enter the Show Setup System command to display system configuration values Table 14 18 shows the security configuration defaults Enter the Show Config Security command to display security configuration values Table 14 9 Call Home Service Configuration Defaults Parameters Default PrimarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 PrimarySMTPServerPort 25 PrimarySMTPServerEnabled False SecondarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 SecondarySMTPServerPort 25 SecondarySMTPServerEnabled False ContactEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain PhoneNumber lt undefined gt 14 70 59263 01 A QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Reset Table 14 9 Call Home Service Configuration Defaults Continued Parameters Default StreetAddress FromEmailAddress Reply ToEmailAddress ThrottleDupsEnabled lt undefined gt nobody localhost localdomain nobody localhost localdomain True Table 14 10 Switch Configuration Defaults Parameter Default Admin State Broadcast Enabled InbandEnabled FDMIEnabled FDMlEntries DefaultDomain ID Domain ID Lock Symbolic Name R_A TOV ED TOV Principal Priority Configuration Description InteropMode Online True True True 1000 1 Ox Hex False SANbox 10000 2000 254 Config Default Standard 59263 01 A 14 71 14 Command Reference XX Reset LOGIC P OT Table 14
153. ays 0 2000 O never 0 100 should this account have admin authority y n n y OK to add user account userl with admin authority and to expire in 100 days Please confirm y n n y 59263 01 A 3 3 3 User Account Configuration AK Modifying User Accounts and Passwords QLOGIC Modifying User Accounts and Passwords Only the Admin user account can modify a user account delete a user account or change the password of another user account However all user accounts can change their own passwords The User command modifies and deletes user accounts The Passwd command changes passwords The following example removes the expiration date and admin authority for the user account named user1 SANbox admin gt user edit Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account name 1 15 chars userl set account expiration in days 0 2000 O never 0 should this account have admin authority y n n OK to modify user account userl with no admin authority and to expire in 0 days Please confirm y n n The following example deletes the user account named users SANbox admin gt user delete user3 The user account will be deleted Please confirm y n n y In the following example the Admin user account changes the password for the user account named user2 SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt passwd user2 Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account
154. be refused m 4 logins or sessions for internal applications such as management server and SNMP m Qhigh priority Telnet sessions 6 logins or sessions for Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 QuickTools Application Programming Interface API and Telnet Opening and Closing an Admin Session The command line interface performs monitoring and configuration tasks Commands that perform monitoring tasks are available to all user accounts Commands that perform configuration tasks are available only after entering the Admin Start command to open an Admin session A user account must have Admin authority to enter the Admin Start command The following is an example of how to open and close an Admin session SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt SANbox admin gt admin end 59263 01 A 2 3 2 Command Line Interface Usage XKX Entering Commands QLOGIC E ee Entering Commands The command line completion feature makes entering and repeating commands easier Table 2 1 describes the command line completion keystrokes Table 2 1 Command Line Completion Keystroke Effect Tab Completes the command line Enter at least one character and press the tab key to complete the command line If more than one possibility exists press the Tab key again to display all possibilities Up Arrow Scrolls backward through the list of previously entered commands Down Arrow Scrolls forward through the list of pr
155. bled True RisingTrigger 00 FallingTrigger 5i SampleWindow 0 6 4 59263 01 A XKX 6 Port Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Port Information TOO O O O aasa Port Performance Enter the Show Perf command to display port performance in terms of the volume of data transmitted data received or errors You can display continuous live performance information for one or more ports or an instantaneous summary The following example displays an instantaneous summary in bytes and frames Values are expressed in thousands K and millions M of bytes or frames per second SANbox gt show perf Port Bytes s Bytes s Bytes s Frames s Frames s Frames s Number in out total in out total 0 7K 136M 136M 245 68K 68K 1 58K 0 58K 1K 0 1K 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 7K 7K 0 245 245 i 136M 58K 136M 68K IK 70K 8 7K 136M 136M 245 68K 68K 9 58K 0 58K 1K 0 1K 10 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 7K 7K 0 245 245 T5 136M 58K 136M 68K 1K 70K 16 47M 23K 47M 23K 726 24K 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 23K 47M 47M 726 23K 24K 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 59263 01 A 6 5 6 Port Configuration AK Modifying Port Operating Characteristics QLOGIC Ce Transceiver Information NOTE The Show Media command requires the SANdoctor license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller
156. box gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config port 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Configuring Port Number 1 AdminState 1 Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics 4 Down Online offline LinkSpeed 1 Gb s 2 2Gb s 4 4Gb s 8 8Gb s A Auto Auto PortType GL G E FL Donor GL SymPortName string max 32 chars Portl ALFairness True False False DeviceScanEnable True False True ForceOfflineRSCN True False False ARB_FF True False False InteropCredit decimal value 0 255 0 FANEnable True False True AutoPerfTuning True False False LCFEnable True False False MFSEnable True False False ViIEnable True False False MSEnable True False True NoClose True False False TOStreamGuard Enable Disable Auto Disable PDISCPingEnable True False True Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command SANbox admin config gt config save SANbox admin config gt config activate 59263 01 A 6 7 6 Port Configuration AK Mod
157. butes To discard this configuration use the security cancel command The following is an example of the Group Edit command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt security edit SANbox admin security gt group edit G1 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Group Name gl Group Type ISL Group Member 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 Authentication None Chap None chap PrimaryHash MD5 SHA 1 MD5 sha 1 PrimarySecret 40 hex or 20 ASCII char value 12345678901234567890 SecondaryHash MD5 SHA 1 None None md5 SecondarySecret 32 hex or 16 ASCII char value 1234567890123456 Binding domain ID 1 239 0 None 3 Finished configuring attributes To discard this configuration use the security cancel command 59263 01 A 14 35 14 Command Reference XX Group QLOGIC ee The following is an example of the Group List command SANbox gt group list Group SecuritySet groupl ISL alpha group2 Port alpha The following is an example of the Group Members command SANbox gt group members group_1 Current list of members for Group group_l 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 7l ed 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 72 45 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 ef 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b8 b7 14
158. butes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so AdminState 1 Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics Online BroadcastEnabled True False True InbandEnabled True False True FDMIEnabled True False True FDMIEntries decimal value 0 1000 1000 DefaultDomainID decimal value 1 239 2 DomainIDLock True False False SymbolicName string max 32 chars SANbox R_A_TOV decimal value 100 100000 msec 10000 E_D_TOV decimal value 10 20000 msec 2000 PrincipalPriority decimal value 1 255 254 ConfigDescription string max 64 chars Default Config To make temporary changes to the switch administrative state enter the Set Switch State command Backing Up and Restoring a Switch Configuration Successful management of switches and fabrics depends on the effective use of switch configurations Backing up and restoring a configuration is useful to protect your work or for use as a template in configuring other switches Backing up and restoring the switch configuration involves the following Creating the Backup File a Downloading the Configuration File m Restoring the Configuration File 5 14 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Managing Switch Configurations CTO aaa aa Creating the Backup File The Confi
159. ccounts To secure your admin user account be sure to change the password for this account images images Provides access to the File Transfer Protocol FTP server for exchanging files between the switch and the workstation prom prom Provides access to the Maintenance mode menu to perform switch recovery tasks Refer to the SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide for information about using Maintenance mode This section describes the following user account configuration tasks m Displaying User Account Information Creating User Accounts Modifying User Accounts and Passwords 59263 01 A 3 1 3 User Account Configuration Displaying User Account Information XX QLOGIC Ll Displaying User Account Information You can display all user accounts defined on the switch User Accounts command or just those user accounts that are logged on User List or Show Users commands The following example displays all user accounts defined on the switch Account information includes account name authority and expiration date SANbox admin Current list of user accounts gt user accounts images admin chuckca gregj fred admin admin admin admin admin authority authority authority authority authority False True False True True never expires never expires expires in lt 50 days expires in lt 100 days never expires Th
160. ce eee eee 14 119 14 30 SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters 0 00 cece ee eee 14 120 14 31 DNS Host Name Configuration Parameters 00000 e eens 14 123 14 32 IP Version 4 Ethernet Configuration Parameters 0 0 cee eee eee 14 124 Page xii 59263 01 A x SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch QLOGIC Command Line Interface Guide TT T 14 33 IP Version 6 Ethernet Configuration Parameters 000 cece eee ee 14 124 14 34 Event Logging Configuration Parameters 0 00 e eee eee 14 125 14 35 NTP Server Configuration Parameters 00 00 cece eee ee eee 14 125 14 36 Timer Configuration Parameters 0 0 00 cee cee eee 14 126 14 37 Show About Display Entries 0 eee eee 14 133 14 38 Log Monitoring Components 0 0 eee eee 14 150 14 39 Transceiver Information nannaa cc a 14 155 14 40 Show Port Parameters 0 0 ccc ee ee eens 14 166 14 41 Switch Operational Parameters 0 0 teen eee 14 181 14 42 Show Version Display Entries 0 0 0 0c ce ee eee 14 189 14 43 SNMP Version 3 User Account Parameters 0 0 000 eee eee ees 14 192 14 44 POM Test Parameter S neern iaa eee Behe WE WRG eh Ree a GA ween e ee 14 196 14 45 Switch Test PAaramMelers cus cevce screw esev reer eer eaeeldesiatica Ven ees 14 199 14 46 Zoning Database Limits 204 n eceeanved poe0e ee bWRE EEE ERROR Eee hee eRe 14 219 59263 01 A Page xiii SANbox 5802
161. ceAddress the DestinationAddress must use the same IP version format DestinationPort Destination port number 1 65535 14 53 14 Command Reference Ipsec Policy XX QLOGIC Se Table 14 7 Policy Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Protocol ICMP6 Direction Priority Action ProtectionDesired ahRuleLevel Protocol or application to which to apply IP security Enter a key word for one of the following protocols or an integer 0 255 Internet Control Message Protocol for IP version 4 ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol for IP version 6 ICMP6 Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 Transmission Control Protocol TCP User Datagram Protocol UDP Any protocol ICMP number 0 255 You are prompted for this parameter only if you specify ICMP6 for the Protocol parameter Direction of the data traffic to which to apply the policy m In Data entering the destination Out Data leaving the source A number from 2147483647 to 214783647 that determines priority for this policy in the security policy database The higher the number the higher the priority Processing to apply to data traffic Discard Unconditionally disallow all inbound or outbound data traffic E None Allow all inbound or outbound data traffic without encryption or decryption m psec Apply IP security to inbound and outbound data traf fic Type of IP security protection to appl
162. configuration 5 12 5 13 zoning 7 12 active zone set 7 1 7 4 Admin account name 3 1 14 1 authority 2 3 14 1 session 2 3 session timeout 14 126 Admin command 14 3 Admin session 5 30 administrative state port 14 108 switch 14 131 alarm configuration 6 11 14 97 configuration display 6 4 14 143 description 11 1 14 104 log 14 84 14 135 XX eo Rel c eq alias add members 7 20 14 4 copy 7 20 14 4 create 7 19 14 4 delete 7 19 14 5 delete members 14 5 display list 14 5 display members 14 5 information 7 7 management 7 19 remove 7 14 remove ports devices 7 20 rename 7 19 14 5 Alias command 14 4 Add example 7 20 Copy example 7 20 Create example 7 19 Delete example 7 19 List example 7 7 Members example 7 7 Remove example 7 20 Rename example 7 19 association 4 8 copy 4 18 create 4 15 delete 4 16 modify 4 17 rename 4 18 authentication 9 1 10 1 14 31 authority 3 1 14 1 authorization 9 1 autosave security database 9 7 zoning database 7 10 59263 01 A Index 1 SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide XX QLOGIC SS ee B backup file 5 15 beacon 5 17 14 85 binding fabric 14 30 14 34 port 6 9 14 94 Boot Protocol 14 124 14 125 broadcast 14 136 C Call Home concepts 12 1 database 12 2 12 6 12 7 12 16 edit session 14 1 message queue 12 8 12 16 messages 12 3 queue 12 3 requirements 12 2 reset 12 7 service 12 2 12 5 14 118 technical support interface
163. configuration for all ports Authority None Syntax show donor SANbox gt show donor Port Config Ext Credit Max Credit Donated Member of Valid Groups to Number Type Requested Available to Port Donor Group Extend Credit 0 GL 0 16 None 0 0 1 GL 0 16 None 0 0 2 GL 0 16 None 0 0 3 GL 0 16 None 0 0 4 GL 0 16 None 0 0 5 GL 0 16 None 0 0 6 GL 0 16 None 0 0 F GL 0 16 None 0 0 8 GL 0 16 None 0 0 9 GL 0 16 None 0 0 0 GL 0 16 None 0 0 1 GL 0 16 None 0 0 2 GL 0 16 None 0 0 3 GL 0 16 None 0 0 4 GL 0 16 None 0 0 5 GL 0 16 None 0 0 6 GL 0 16 None 0 0 7 GL 0 16 None 0 0 8 GL 0 16 None 0 0 9 GL 0 16 None 0 0 20 G 0 16 None None None 21 G 0 16 None None None 22 G 0 16 None None None 23 G 0 16 None None None Donor Group Credit Pool 14 146 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Fabric SS Show Fabric Displays list of each domain symbolic name worldwide name node IP address and port IP address in the fabric Authority None Syntax show fabric brief Keywords brief Displays a table of switches in the fabric including domain ID WWN and symbolic name If you omit the Brief Keyword the command displays information for the local switch only Examples The following is an example of the Show Fabric command SANbox gt show fabric Domain 133 0x85 WWN 10200200 te0rdd 00 53 91 SymbolicName SANbox HostName lt undefined gt EthIPv4Address 10 20 116 133 EthIPv 6 Address lt unde
164. configuration for all user defined policies edited Displays the configuration for all policies that have been modified but not saved rename policy_old policy_new Renames the policy given by policy_old to the policy given by policy_new You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes Dynamic policies cannot be renamed 14 55 14 Command Reference Ipsec Policy XX QLOGIC ee Examples SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec policy create h2h sh sp A list of attributes with formatting Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to skip specifying a value will follow The following is an example of the Ipsec Policy Create command If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Required attributes are preceded by an asterisk Value press ENTER to not specify value Description string value 0 SourceAddress hostname IPv4 SourcePort decimal value DestinationAddress hostname IPv4 gq to quit 127 bytes Host to host switch gt host or IPv6 Address PrefixLength 1 65535 or IPv6 Address PrefixLength 1 65535 or keyword ip4 tcp udp or any value 2147483647 to 214783647 DestinationPort decimal value Protocol decimal value Allowed keywords icmp icmp6 Direction l in 2 out Priority Action
165. connection will be started match and then a new certificate may need to be created to ensure a secure connection to this switch TelnetEnabled True False True SSHEnabled True False False True GUIMgmt Enabled True False rue SSLEnabled True False False True EmbeddedGUIEnabled True False True SNMPEnabled True False rue NTPEnabled True False False CIMEnabled True False False FTPEnabled True False True Mgmt ServerEnabled True False True Do you want to save and activate this services setup y n n y 8 2 59263 01 A XKX 8 Connection Security Configuration QLOGIC Displaying SSL and SSH Services Tk Displaying SSL and SSH Services Enter the Show Setup Services command to display the status of the SSH and SSL services as shown in the following example SANbox gt show setup services System Services TelnetEnabled True SSHEnabled False GUIMgmtEnabled True SSLEnabled False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True SNMPEnabled True NTPEnabled True CIMEnabled True FTPEnabled True Mgmt ServerEnabled True CallHomeEnabled True Creating an SSL Security Certificate Enabling SSL automatically creates a security certificate on the switch The security certificate is required to establish an SSL connection with a management application such as Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 or QuickTools The certificate is valid 24 hours before the certificate creation date and expires 365 days after the
166. convention command keyword keyword value keyword value1 value2 The Command is followed by one or more keywords Consider the following rules and conventions E Commands and keywords are case insensitive m Required keyword values appear in standard font value Optional values are shown in italics value m Underlined portions of the keyword in the command format indicate the abbreviated form that can be used For example the delete keyword can be abbreviated del The Keywords paragraph lists and describes each keyword and any applicable values Notes and Examples The Notes paragraph presents useful information about the command and its use including special applications or effects on other commands The Examples paragraph presents sample screen captures of the command and its output Command Listing The commands are listed in alphabetical order 14 2 59263 01 A xX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Admin SO Admin Opens and closes an Admin session The Admin session provides access to commands that change the fabric and switch configurations Only one Admin session can be open on the switch at any time An inactive Admin session will time out after a period of time which can be changed using the Set Setup System command Authority User account with Admin authority Syntax admin start or begin end or stop cancel Keywords start or begin Opens the Admin session end or sto
167. curityset_old securityset_new Copy a Security Set Enter the Securityset Copy command to copy a security set and its contents to a new security set as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt securityset copy securityset_l securityset_2 Add Groups to a Security Set Enter the Securityset Add command to add a group to a security set as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt securityset add securityset_1l group_isl group_port Remove Groups from a Security Set Enter the Securityset Remove command to remove groups from a security set as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt sescurityset remove securityset_l group_isl group_port Activate a Security Set Enter the Securityset Activate command to apply security to the fabric as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt securityset activate securityset_1l Deactivate a Security Set Enter the Securityset Deactivate command to deactivate the active security set and disable security in the fabric SANbox admin gt securityset deactivate 59263 01 A 9 41 9 Device Security Configuration AK Managing Groups QLOGIC Managing Groups Managing Groups consists of the following tasks Create a Group Delete a Group Rename a Group Copy a Group Add Members to a Group Modify a Group Member Remove Members from a Group All of these tasks require an Admin session and a Security Edit sess
168. d Please confirm y n n y 12 12 59263 01 A XKX 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Managing the Call Home Database eS Adding a Data Capture Configuration Enter the Capture Add command to add a data capture configuration to the Tech_Support_Center profile as shown in the following example If the Tech_Support_Center profile does not exist you must create it using the Profile Create command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt capture add A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Value press ENTER to accept the default q to quit TimeOfDay HH MM 02 00 DayOfWeek Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sat Interval decimal value 1 26 weeks 1 A capture entry has been added to profile Tech_Support_Center This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command 12 Call Home Configuration AK Managing the Call Home Database QLOGIC ee Modifying a Data Capture Configuration Enter the Capture Edit command to modify a data capture configuration in the Tech_Support_Center profile as shown in the following example SANbox
169. d Please confirm y n n y Copying an Association You can copy both user defined and dynamic associations To copy an association association_1 enter the Ipsec Association Copy command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec association copy association_1l association_a SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y Resetting the IP Security Configuration Resetting the IP Security configuration deletes all policies and associations from the switch There are two ways to do this Within an Ipsec Edit session enter the Ipsec Clear command then save the changes as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec clear SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 4 18 59263 01 A XX 4 Network Configuration QLOGIC Managing IP Security COO a aaa a The Reset Ipsec command deletes all polices and associations from the switch but does not require an Ipsec Edit session SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt reset ipsec The IPsec configuration will be reset and the default values activated Please confirm y n n y Reset and activation in progress 59263 01 A 4 19 4 Network Con
170. d oe m ISL connection count LOSMonitoringEnabled m Device login errors m Device logout errors E Loss of signal errors Rising Trigger The event count above which a rising trigger alarm is logged The switch will not generate another ris ing trigger alarm for that event until the count descends below the falling trigger and again exceeds the rising trigger Falling Trigger The event count below which a falling trigger alarm is logged The switch will not generate another fall ing trigger alarm for that event until the count exceeds the rising trigger and descends again below the falling trigger Sample Window The time in seconds in which to count events 14 97 14 Command Reference XX Set Config Threshold QLOGIC CCC Notes The switch will down a port if an alarm condition is not cleared within three consecutive sampling windows by default 30 seconds Reset the port to bring it back online An alarm is cleared when the threshold monitoring detects that the error rate has fallen below the falling trigger Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Threshold command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config threshold A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the
171. d Fctrace commands require the SANdoctor license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller You can verify Fibre Channel connections between the switch and the fabric and display routing information Enter the Fcping command to verify a Fibre Channel connection to a switch or a device as shown in the following example The target device can be defined as a Fibre Channel address or a WWN SANbox gt fcping 970400 count 28 bytes from local switch to 28 bytes from local switch to 28 bytes from local switch to 3 0x970400 time 0x970400 time 0x970400 time 10 usec 11 usec 119 usec The following is an example of a connection failure SANbox gt fcping 0x113344 count 3 28 bytes from local switch to 0x113344 failed 5 28 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Managing Switch Feature Upgrades TO OM Enter the Fctrace command to display Fibre Channel routing information between two devices as shown in the following example The devices can be defined as Fibre Channel addresses or WWNs SANbox gt fctrace 970400 970e00 hops 5 36 bytes from 0x970400 to 0x970e00 5 hops max Domain Ingress Port WWN Port Egress Port WWN Port a7 20 04 00 cO dd 02 cc 2e 4 20 0e 00 cO dd 02 cc 2e 14 97 20 0e 00 c0 dd 02 cc 2e 14 20 04 00 c0 dd 02 cc 2e 4 Managing Switch Feature Upgrades The following features are available to upgrade your switch through the purchase
172. d in do not take effect until that account logs in again The following is an example of the User Accounts command SANbox admin gt user accounts Current list of user accounts images admin authority False never expires admin admin authority True never expires chuckca admin authority False expires in lt 50 days gregj admin authority True expires in lt 100 days fred admin authority True never expires The following is an example of the User Add command SANbox admin gt user add Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account name 1 15 chars userl account password 8 20 chars E RAKREKK please confirm account password set account expiration in days 0 2000 O never 0 100 should this account have admin authority y n n y OK to add user account userl with admin authority and to expire in 100 days Please confirm y n n y 14 202 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference User The following is an example of the User Edit command SANbox admin gt user edit Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account name 1 15 chars gt userl set account expiration in days 0 2000 O never 0 should this account have admin authority y n n OK to modify user account userl with no admin authority and to expire in 0 days Please confirm y n n The following is an example of the User
173. dmin start SANbox admin gt snmpv3user delete snmpuserl The user account will be deleted Please confirm y n n y SNMPV3 user deleted The following is an example of the Snmpv3user List command SANbox gt snmpv3user list Username Group AuthType PrivType snmpuserl ReadWrite MD5 DES 59263 01 A 14 193 14 Command Reference XX Test Cancel QLOGIC e Test Cancel Cancels a port test that is in progress Authority Admin session Syntax test cancel port port_number Keywords port port_number Cancel the test for the port given by port_number port_number can be 0 23 Examples The following example cancels the test running on port 15 SANbox admin gt test cancel port 15 14 194 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Test Port re Test Port Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Tests individual ports using an offline or online test Admin session test port port_number offline loopback_type online port_number The port to be tested port_number can be 0 23 offline loopback_type Performs an offline test of the type given by loopback_type on the port given by port_number Use the Set Port command to place the port in the diagnostics state before running the test loopback_type can have the following values internal Exercises the internal port connections NOTE An internal test on an XPAK port verifies that a complete path exists but does
174. dress 10 20 3 4 Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n y 59263 01 A 5 19 5 Switch Configuration XKX Resetting a Switch QLOGIC E ee Resetting a Switch Table 5 2 describes the methods for resetting a switch the corresponding command and the impact on the switch Table 5 2 Switch Reset Methods Soft Reset Hard Reset Description GES e ie te here Soules command command Activates pending firmware Y Y Y Disrupts I O traffic Y Y Reconnects Enterprise Fabric Y Y Y Suite 2007 and QuickTools ses sions afterwards Clears the event log Y Y Y Deletes supports files firmware Y Y image files that have not been unpacked and configuration backup files Closes all management sessions Y Y Y Performs power on self test Y Installing Firmware New firmware becomes available periodically either on CD ROM or from the QLogic web site Installing firmware on a switch involves the following steps 1 Download the firmware image file to the switch 2 Unpack the firmware image file 3 Activate the new firmware The activation can be disruptive or non disruptive Refer to Non disruptive Activation on page 5 21 for information about the conditions for a non disruptive activation The Firmware Install and the Image Install commands automate the firmware installation process and perform a disruptive activation as described in One Step Firmware Installation on page 5 22
175. dress 30000 FlashSize MBytes 28 LogFilterLevel Critical MaxPorts 24 NumberOfResets gt ReasonForLastReset PowerUp ActiveImageVersion build date Vx x x 0 day month date time year PendingImageVersion build date Vx x x 0 day month date time year ActiveConfiguration default AdminState Online AdminModeActive False BeaconOnStatus off OperationalState Online PrincipalSwitchRole False POSTFaultCode 00000000 POSTStatus Passed TestFaultCode 00000000 TestStatus NeverRun BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius 32 SwitchTemperatureStatus Normal 59263 01 A 5 3 5 Switch Configuration XKX Displaying Switch Information QLOGIC System Process Information The Ps command displays system process information to help you determine what processes are running and CPU usage The following example displays current system processes SANbox gt ps PID PPID CPU MEM TIME ELAPSED COMMAND 244 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 04 2 03 02 31 cns 3 245 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 06 2 03 02 31 ens 246 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 09 2 03 02 31 dlog 247 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 33 2 03 02 31 ds 248 224 0 3 2 8 00 09 59 2 03 02 31 mgmtApp 249 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 16 2 03 02 31 sys2swlog 251 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 06 2 03 02 30 fc2 252 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 16 2 03 02 30 nserver 253 224 0 0 0 8 00 00 08 2 03 02 30 PortApp 254 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 03 2 03 02 30 qfsApp 255 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 09 2 03 02 30 mserver 256 224 0 0 0 7 00 00 06 2 03 02 30 eport 257 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 13 2 03 02 30 zon
176. e state state can be one of the following on Enables the flashing beacon off Disables the flashing beacon The following is an example of the Set Beacon command SANbox gt set beacon on 14 85 14 Command Reference XX Set Config Port QLOGIC ew Set Config Port Authority Syntax Keywords 14 86 Sets the port configuration parameters for one or more ports The changes you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save command Admin session and a Config Edit session set config port port_number or set config ports port_number port port_number Initiates an edit session in which to change configuration parameters for the port number given by port_number If you omit port_number the system begins with port 0 and proceeds in order through the last port For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Enter q to end the configuration for one port or qq to end the configuration for all ports Table 14 19 describes the port configuration parameters ports port_number Initiates an editing session in which to change configuration parameters for all ports based on the configuration for the port given by port_number If you omit port_number port 0 is used For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current v
177. e Description string value 0 127 bytes SourceAddress IPv4 IPv6 or hostname PrefixLength SourcePort decimal value 1 65535 DestinationAddress IPv4 IPv6 or hostname PrefixLength DestinationPort decimal value 1 65535 Protocol decimal value or keyword Allowed keywords icmp icmp6 ip4 tcp udp or any s tcp Direction l in 2 out Priority value 2147483647 to 2147483647 Action l discard 2 none 3 ipsec ProtectionDesired select one transport mode only l ah Authentication Header 2 esp Encapsulating Security Payload 3 both ahRuleLevel l default 2 use 3 require espRuleLevel l default 2 use 3 require The security policy has been edited This configuration must be saved with the ipsec save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the ipsec cancel command SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 59263 01 A 4 13 4 Network Configuration AK Managing IP Security QLOGIC ee Renaming a User Defined Policy To rename a policy policy_1 enter the Ipsec Policy Rename command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec policy rename policy_1 policy_4 The security policy will be renamed Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will
178. e group4 Level Warn Format FullText MaxSize any size up to max of 100000 EmailSubject CallHome Warn RecipientEmail adminl company com RecipientEmail admin2 company com RecipientEmail admin3 company com RecipientEmail admin7 company com RecipientEmail admin8 company com RecipientEmail admin9 company com RecipientEmail adminl0 company com ProfileName group5 Level Alarm Format ShortText MaxSize any size up to max of 40000 EmailSubject CallHome Alarm RecipientEmail mel company com RecipientEmail mel0 company com The following is an example of the Callhome Test Profile command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome test profile group4 A callhome profile test has been started A notification with the test result will appear on the screen when the test has completed SANbox admin gt Test for Callhome Profile group4 Passed The following is an example of the Callhome Queue Clear command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome queue clear The callhome queue will be cleared Please confirm y n n y The following is an example of the Callhome Queue Stats command SANbox gt callhome queue stats Callhome Queue Information FileSystemSpaceInUse 534 bytes EntriesInQueue 3 59263 01 A 14 9 14 Command Reference XX Capture QLOGIC Se Capture Authority Syntax Keywords 14 10 Manages the data capture configuration for the Tech_Support_Center Call Hom
179. e profile The data capture configuration determines the time and frequency by which status and trend data is collected from the switch and sent to recipients specified in the Tech_Support_Center profile Admin session and a Callhome Edit session Refer to the Callhome command on page 14 6 for information about starting a Callhome Edit session capture add edit remove add Adds data capture instructions to the Tech_Support_Center profile Table 14 1 describes the data capture parameters Table 14 1 Data Capture Configuration Parameters Parameters Description TimeOfDay Time of day to send status and trend data to the Tech_Support_Center profile e mail recipients The format is hh mm on a 24 hour clock The default 02 00 DayOfWeek Day of the week to send status and trend data to the Tech_Support_Center profile e mail recipients Values can be Sun Mon Tue Wed Thur Fri Sat The default is Sat Interval Number of weeks between capture data e mails to the Tech_Support_Center profile e mail recipients Values can be 1 26 The default is 1 edit Opens an edit session in which to modify the data capture configuration of the Tech_Support_Center profile Refer to Table 14 1 for a description of the data capture configuration parameters remove Removes the data capture configuration from the Test_Support_Center profile 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Capture Examples The
180. e 9 13 Copy example 9 12 Create example 9 12 Delete example 9 12 Edit example 9 14 Members example 9 5 Remove example 9 14 Rename example 9 12 Securitysets example 9 5 H hard reset 5 20 Hardreset command 14 37 hardware information 5 8 Heartbeat LED 5 8 Help command 2 4 14 38 History command 14 39 host bus adapter 14 148 hot reset 5 20 Hotreset command 14 40 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide n O I O Stream Guard 14 89 idle session limits 5 30 Image command 14 41 Install example 5 20 inactivty limits 5 30 informative event 11 1 internal test 6 13 14 195 14 198 Internet Protocol security 4 6 4 7 4 18 version 4 4 2 version 6 4 4 Inter Switch Link connection count 6 11 group 9 1 9 12 14 32 IP address 4 1 4 2 14 124 14 125 IP Security configuration history 4 9 configuration limits 4 10 reset 4 7 Ipsec Association command 14 46 Copy example 4 18 Create example 4 15 Delete example 4 16 Edit example 4 17 Rename example 4 18 Ipsec command 14 44 Clear example 4 18 Ipsec History command example 4 9 Ipsec Limits command example 4 10 Ipsec List command 14 50 example 4 9 Ipsec Policy command 14 53 Copy example 4 14 Create example 4 11 Delete example 4 12 Edit example 4 13 Rename example 4 14 ISL See Inter Switch Link 59263 01 A K keywords 14 2 L license key description 5 29 display 5 30 install 5 30 14 25 limits 14 219 Lin
181. e Alias Add command to add ports devices to alias_1 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt alias add alias_1 1 4 1 5 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Remove Members from an Alias Enter the Alias Remove command to remove ports devices from alias_1 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt alias remove alias_1 1 4 1 5 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save 7 20 59263 01 A XX eo Rel c eq 8 Connection Security Configuration NOTE SSH and SSL connection security require the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller This section describes the following tasks m Managing SSL and SSH Services m Displaying SSL and SSH Services m Creating an SSL Security Certificate The switch supports secure connections with Telnet and switch management applications The Secure SHell protocol SSH secures Telnet connections to the switch The Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol secures switch connections to the following management applications m Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 m QuickTools Application Programming Interface E Storage Management Initiative Specification SMI S 59263 01 A 8 1 8 Connection Security Con
182. e Rename command to rename zone_1 to zone_a as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zone rename zone_1l zone_a SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Copy a Zone Enter the Zone Copy command to copy the contents of an existing zone zone_1 to a new zone zone_2 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zone copy zone_l zone_2 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save 59263 01 A 7 17 7 Zoning Configuration AK Managing Zones QLOGIC a Add Members to a Zone Enter the Zone Add command to add ports devices to zone_1 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zone add zone_1l alias_1 1 4 1 5 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Remove Members from a Zone 7 18 Enter the Zone Remove command to remove ports devices from zone_1 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zone remove zone_1l alias_1 1 4 1 5 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration LOGIC Managing Aliases TO Managing Aliases Managing aliases consists of the following tasks Create an Alias Delete an Alia
183. e Sets 000 00 eeeeeee 7 13 Resetting the Zoning Database 0 0 cece ee 7 13 Removing Inactive Zone Sets Zones and Aliases 7 14 Managing Zone SetS 2 5 2 edi eet ewe t ees wees bee ee ea wee teen eke 7 14 Create a Zone Set 2 2 ae 7 14 Delete a Zone Set fae t2aeteel ees bos Saas eenedeawuds 7 15 Rename a Zone Set caccs debheeesd este peaws tee a 7 15 Copy a Zone S l nish casei see te dea Ge See a ae en Cease ee wes 7 15 Add Zones to a Zone Set nnna ees Genes ees gabe isa eeiaes 7 15 Remove Zones from a Zone Set 00 0 eee eee 7 16 Activate a Zone Set bdewd Pie wise ee heed eh ead ehdRiaks 7 16 Deactivate a Zone Selec scsiccteVeeetabseenedeekedeeentiees 7 16 Managing Zones 02542402 auauna 7 16 Create A ZON ns crids eee hy bees a eiia a a EE e 7 17 Delete a ZONE sec eee beet eb eta eee baa Keni eae eta as 7 17 Rename a Zone 1 1 ee eens 7 17 Copy AZON 255465552 220058 424 Fab neiaa ien beet tee a 24 7 17 Add Members to a Zone 2200 ee 7 18 Remove Members froma Zone 00 cee e eee eee 7 18 Managing Aliases sssri esi teu ved oooh bee aE EELE dered aaved Ped 7 19 Create an Alias 0 0 02 ee 7 19 Delete an AlidS aci0 25424 44 550 4545904 04084 Red Set eRe x 7 19 Rename anAliaS 0 0 0 eee 7 19 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide TOO aaa 59263 01 A Copy an Alias
184. e an IP address version 4 or 6 ora DNS host name If an account name needs a password to access the FTP server the system will prompt you for it install Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch installs the firmware then resets the switch to activate the firmware This is disruptive The command prompts you for the following a File transfer protocol FTP or TFTP m P address or DNS host name of the remote host E Anaccount name and password on the remote host FTP only m Pathname for the firmware image file list Displays the list of image files that reside on the switch tftp ip_address file_source file_destination Retrieves image file given by file_source using TFTP and stores it on the switch with the file name given by file_destination The image file is retrieved from the host IP address given by ip address ip address can be an IP address version 4 or 6 ora DNS host name 14 41 14 Command Reference XX Image QLOGIC ee Notes Examples unpack file Installs the firmware file given by file After unpacking the file a message appears confirming successful unpacking The switch must be reset for the new firmware to take effect To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric ensure that all switches are running the same version of firmware To install firmware when the management workstation has an FTP server use the Image Install command or the Firmware In
185. e database profiles will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 59263 01 A 12 9 12 Call Home Configuration AK Managing the Call Home Database QLOGIC E hrc tw Deleting a Profile Enter the Profile Delete command to delete a Call Home profile as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt profile delete profile_1l The profile will be deleted Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHome database profiles will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 12 10 59263 01 A x 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Managing the Call Home Database a Modifying a Profile Enter the Profile Edit command to modify an existing Call Home profile as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt profile edit profile_l A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values Level Alarm Format ShortText MaxSize 1000 EmailSubject Switch Problem RecipientEmail up to 10 entries allowed 1 john smith domain com New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to qui
186. e following example displays user accounts that are logged on to the switch SANbox admin User Client Logged User Client Logged User Client Logged User Client Logged in in in in cim OB sessionl cim gt user list Since day month date time year snmp IB session2 Unknown Since day month date time year snmp OB session3 Unknown Since day month date time year admin OB session8 10 33 21 27 Since day month date time year 3 2 59263 01 A XKX 3 User Account Configuration LOGIC Creating User Accounts TT Creating User Accounts A user account consists of an account name an authority level and an expiration date The account name can be up to 15 characters the first character must be alphanumeric the remaining characters must be ASCII characters except semicolor comma and period The authority level grants admin authority true or denies it false The expiration date sets the date when the user account expires Only the Admin user account can create user accounts You add user accounts with the User Add command The following example creates a new user account named user1 with admin authority that expires in 100 days SANbox admin gt user add Press g and the ENTER key to abort this command account name 1 15 chars userl account password 8 20 chars E EKAA please confirm account password set account expiration in d
187. e of the Show Alarm command SANbox gt show alarm 1 Fri Jan 19 13 50 26 508 UTC 2007 A 1004 000F Port 4 Eport Isolating due to Merge Zone Failure 2 Fri Jan 19 13 50 26 513 UTC 2007 A 1004 0030 Topology change lost route to switch with domain ID 1 3 Sun Jan 21 07 59 28 677 UTC 2007 A 1004 0030 Topology change lost route to switch with domain ID 99 4 Sun Jan 21 07 59 29 367 UTC 2007 A 1004 0030 Topology change lost route to switch with domain ID 101 The following is an example of the Show Alarm Settings command SANbox gt show alarm settings Current settings for alarm display ON 59263 01 A 14 135 14 Command Reference XX Show Broadcast QLOGIC E ee Show Broadcast Displays the broadcast tree information and all ports that are currently transmitting and receiving broadcast frames Authority None Syntax show broadcast Examples The following is an example of the Show Broadcast command SANbox gt show broadcast Group Member Ports ISL Ports 14 136 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Chassis 00 0 C CCCCSCSCSCC Show Chassis Displays chassis component status and temperature Authority None Syntax show chassis Examples The following is an example of the Show Chassis command for model 5602 SANbox gt show chassis Chassis Information BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius 36 FanStatus 1 Good FanStatus 2 Good FanDirec
188. e_set zone_list rename zone_set_old zone_set_new zones zone_set activate zone_set Activates the zone set given by zone_set This keyword deactivates the active zone set Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword active Displays the name of the active zone set This keyword does not require Admin session add zone_set zone _list Adds a list of zones and aliases given by zone_list to the zone set given by zone_set Use a lt space gt to delimit zone and alias names in zone _list You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes copy zone_set_source zone_set_destination Creates a new zone set named zone_set_destination and copies into it the zones from the zone set given by zone_set_source You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Zoneset T_T Notes 59263 01 A create zone_set Creates the zone set with the name given by zone_set A zone set name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 zone sets You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes deactivate Deactivates the active zone set Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword delete zone_set Deletes the zone set given by zone_set If the specified zone set
189. efined through the use of security sets and groups A group is a list of device worldwide names that are authorized to attach to a switch There are three types of groups one for other switches ISL another for devices port and a third for devices issuing management server commands MS A security set is a set of up to three groups with no more than one of each group type The security database is made up of all security sets on the switch In addition to authorization the switch can be configured to require authentication to validate the identity of the connecting switch device or host Authentication can be performed locally using the switch s security database or remotely using a Remote Dial In User Service RADIUS server such as Microsoft RADIUS 59263 01 A a 9 Device Security Configuration AK Displaying Security Database Information QLOGIC ee Displaying Security Database Information You can display the following information about the security database Configured Security Set Information Active Security Set Information Security Set Membership Information Group Membership Information m Security Database Modification History Security Database Limits Configured Security Set Information The Securityset List and the Security List commands display information about the all security sets in the security database Enter the Securityset List command to display a list of the security sets as shown in the f
190. el Closes the current Zoning Edit session Any unsaved changes are lost Authority Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Syntax zoning cancel Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Cancel command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoning cancel Zoning edit mode will be canceled Please confirm y n n y 14 212 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Zoning Clear T_T Zoning Clear Authority Syntax Examples 59263 01 A Clears all inactive zone sets from the volatile edit copy of the zoning database This keyword requires a zoning edit session This keyword does not affect the non volatile zoning database However if you enter the Zoning Clear command followed by the Zoning Save command the non volatile zoning database will be cleared from the switch NOTE The preferred method for clearing the zoning database from the switch is the Reset Zoning command Admin session and a Zoning Edit session zoning clear The following is an example of the Zoning Clear command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoning clear SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save 14 213 14 Command Reference XX Zoning Configured QLOGIC E LL Zoning Configured Displays the contents of the non volatile zoning database Authority None Syntax zoning configured Examples The following is an ex
191. elnet Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 or another management application You must also open a Zoning Edit session with the Zoning Edit Configured command To modify the temporary merged zone set if one exists enter the Zoning Edit Merged command The Zoning Edit session provides access to the Zoneset Zone Alias and Zoning commands with which you make modifications to the zoning database SANbox gt admin start SANbox SANbox admin gt zoning edit admin zoning gt zoneset SANbox admin zoning gt zone SANbox admin zoning gt alias SANbox admin zoning gt zoning When you are finished making changes enter the Zoning Save command to save the changes and close the Zoning Edit session SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save To close the Zoning Edit session without saving changes enter the Zoning Cancel command SANbox admin zoning gt zoning cancel Changes to the active zone set do not take effect until you activate it with the Zoneset Activate command The active zone set is propagated throughout the fabric SANbox admin gt zoneset activate zoneset_1l SANbox admin gt admin end The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators when you are done making changes to the switch To remove all zoning database objects aliases zones and zone sets and restore t
192. els In addition to the basic switch configurations the Show Config command displays parameters that control how data is maintained in the security and zoning databases The Show Config command displays the following types of information Switch Configuration Parameters m Zoning Configuration Parameters m Security Configuration Parameters Refer to Displaying Port Information on page 6 1 for information about displaying port configuration information 59263 01 A 5 5 5 Switch Configuration Displaying Switch Information XX QLOGIC ee Switch Configuration Parameters Enter the Show Config Switch command to display the switch configuration parameters These parameters determine the operational characteristics of the switch Refer to Table 14 22 for a description these parameters SANbox gt show config switch Configuration Name AdminState BroadcastEnabled InbandEnabled FDMIEnabled FDMIEntries DefaultDomainID DomainIDLock SymbolicName R_A_TOV E_D_TOV PrincipalPriority ConfigDescription ConfigLastSavedBy ConfigLastSavedOn InteropMode default Online False True False 10 19 0x13 True swl08 10000 2000 254 Default Config admin OB session5 day month date time year Standard Zoning Configuration Parameters Enter the Show Config Zoning command to display zoning configuration parameters These parameters determine how zoning is applied to the switch Refer to Table 14 24 for a de
193. ement Commands associated with configuration tasks are available only within an Admin session An account must have Admin authority to enter the Admin Start command which opens an Admin session Some commands require that you open additional editing sessions within an Admin session such as the following E Commands that modify zoning require a Zoning Edit session which is opened by the Zoning Edit command These commands include the Alias Zone Zoneset and Zoning commands E Commands that modify device security require a Security Edit session which is opened by the Security Edit command These commands include the Group Security and Securityset commands Commands that modify the switch configuration require a Config Edit session which is opened by the Config Edit command These commands include all of the Set Config commands Commands that modify the Call Home e mail notification configuration require a Callhome Edit session which is opened by the Callhome Edit command These commands include the Callhome Capture and Profile commands 59263 01 A 14 1 14 Command Reference XX Syntax and Keywords LOGIC ee m Commands that modify the Internet Protocol Security configuration require an Ipsec Edit session which is opened by the Ipsec Edit command These commands include the Ipsec Ipsec Association and Ipsec Policy commands Syntax and Keywords The Syntax paragraph defines the command syntax using the following
194. en Alarm thresholds can be defined for certain port errors to customize when to generate an alarm m Critical The critical level describes events that are generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but require no action m 8 Warning The warning level describes events that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but are more important than the informative level events Informative The informative level describes routine events associated with a normal fabric 59263 01 A 11 1 11 Event Log Configuration AK Starting and Stopping Event Logging QLOGIC E Starting and Stopping Event Logging Enter the Set Log Stop command in an Admin session to stop recording event messages in the switch Log as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set log stop Enter the Set Log Start command to start recording event message in the switch log as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set log start Displaying the Event Log Enter the Show Log command to display the event log Each message has the following format ordinal time_stamp severity message_ID source message_text Table 11 1 describes the message format components Table 11 1 Event Log Message Format Component Description ordinal A number assigned to each message in sequence since the last time the alarm history was cleared time_stamp The time the alarm
195. en a Config Edit session with the Config Edit command and indicate which configuration you want to modify If you do not specify a configuration name the active configuration is assumed The Config Edit session provides access to the Set Config Zoning command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit The config named default is being edited SANbox admin config gt set config zoning A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so MergeAutoSave True False True DefaultZone Allow Deny Allow DiscardInactive True False False Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command SANbox admin config gt config save SANbox admin gt config activate SANbox admin gt admin end 7 Zoning Configuration AK Modifying the Zoning Database QLOGIC E ee Modifying the Zoning Database To modify the non volatile zoning database you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time through T
196. er to Table 14 3 For MS member attributes refer to Table 14 4 Enter the Group Add command to add a member to a group SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt security edit SANbox admin security gt group add Group_1l A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value with exception of the Group Member WWN field which is mandatory If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Group Name Group_1 Group Type ISL Member WWN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 Authentication None Chap None chap PrimaryHash MD5 SHA 1 MD5 PrimarySecret 32 hex or 16 ASCII char value 012345678 9abcdef SecondaryHash MD5 SHA 1 None None SecondarySecret 40 hex or 20 ASCII char value Binding domain ID 1 239 0 None 0 Finished configuring attributes To discard this configuration use the security cancel command 59263 01 A 9 13 9 Device Security Configuration AK Managing Groups QLOGIC eee Modify a Group Member Modifying a group member involves changing the member attributes The member attributes define the authentication method encryption methods secrets and fabric binding depending on the group type a For ISL member attributes refer to Table 14 2 a For Port member attributes refer to Table 14 3 E
197. erica Nassau America Nipigon America Noronha America Panama Press ENTER for more options or Enter selection or q to quit America North_Dakota Center Enter selection or q to quit America Asia Australia Indian UTC q to make a selection America Guadeloupe America Guayaquil America Halifax America Hermosillo America Indianapolis America Montevideo America Montserrat America New_York America Nome America North_Dakota America Pangnirtung q to make a selection america north_dakota america north_dakota center 14 132 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show About a el Show About Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the switch This command is equivalent to the Show Version command Authority Syntax Notes 59263 01 A None show about Table 14 37 describes the entries in the Show About command display Table 14 37 Show About Display Entries Entry Description SystemDescription HostName EthIPv4NetworkAddress EthIPv6NetworkAddress EthMacAddress WorldWideName ChassisSerialNumber SymbolicName ActiveSWVersion ActiveTimestamp POSTStatus LicensedPorts SwitchMode Switch system description DNS host name IP address version 4 IP address version 6 Switch MAC address Switch worldwide name Switch serial number Switch symbolic name Firmware version Date and time that the firmware was activated
198. es begin with DynamicSP_ and DynamicSA_ respectively You can apply IP security to all communication between two systems or to select protocols such as ICMP TCP or UDP Furthermore instead of applying IP security you can choose to discard all inbound or outbound traffic or allow all traffic without encryption Both the AH and ESP security protocols provide source authentication ensure data integrity and protect against replay 59263 01 A 4 7 4 Network Configuration AK Managing IP Security QLOGIC Me A security association defines the encryption algorithm and encryption key to apply when called by a security policy A security policy may call several associations at different times but each association is related to only one policy The security association database is the set of all security associations IP Security configurations can be complex it is possible to unintentionally configure policies and associations that isolate a switch from all communication If this happens you can disable IP Security by placing the switch in maintenance mode and correct the problem through the serial port interface Refer to the SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide for information about using maintenance mode and connecting through the serial port Displaying IP Security Information You can display the security policy and security association databases in the following ways m Active policies and associations that i
199. es require the Fabric Security license key Enter the Show Setup Services command to display the current switch service status as shown in the following example SANbox gt show setup services System Services TelnetEnabled True SSHEnabled False GUIMgmtEnabled True SSLEnabled False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True SNMPEnabled True NTPEnabled True CIMEnabled True FTPEnabled True Mgmt ServerEnabled True CallHomeEnabled True 5 10 59263 01 A Da 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Managing Switch Services TT Enter the Set Setup Services command within an Admin session to configure the switch services as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set setup services A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so PLEASE NOTE Further configuration may be required after enabling a service If services are disabled the connection to the switch may be lost When enabling SSL please verify that the date time settings on this switch and the workstation from where the SSL connection will be started match and then a new certificate may need to be created to ensure a secure connection to this switch TelnetEnabled True False True SSHEnabled True False
200. escription DeviceAuthOrder Authenticator priority for devices Local Authenticate devices using only the local security data base This is the default E Radius Authenticate devices using only the security database on the RADIUS server E RadiusLocal Authenticate devices using the RADIUS server security database first If the RADIUS server is unavailable then use the local switch security database UserAuthOrder Authenticator priority for user accounts Local Authenticate users using only the local security data base This is the default m Radius Authenticate users using only the security database on the RADIUS server m RadiusLocal Authenticate users using the RADIUS server security database first If the RADIUS server is unavailable then use the local switch security database 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Setup Radius COO a aaa aa Table 14 26 Common RADIUS Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Description TotalServers Number of RADIUS servers to configure during this session Set ting TotalServers to 0 disables all RADIUS authentication The default is 0 server server_number Prompts you in a line by line fashion to configure parameters for the RADIUS server given by server_number server_number is a positive integer To configure common and specific RADIUS server parameters omit the keyword Table 14 27 describes the specific RADIUS server confi
201. ess the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Default Values Level Alarm Format FullText MaxSize 100000 EmailSubject lt undefined gt RecipientEmail up to 10 entries allowed New Value press ENTER to accept default value q to quit Level Alarm Critical Warn None Format 1 FullText 2 ShortText 3 Tscl MaxSize decimal value 650 100000 EmailSubject string max 64 chars N None Technical problem RecipientEmail ex admin company com N None 1 lt undefined gt adminO company com The profile has been created This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHome database profiles will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 59263 01 A 14 63 14 Command Reference XX Profile QLOGIC The following is an example of the Profile Edit command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt profile edit profile_1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q a
202. eter Enter the Zoning Merged command to display merged zone set information as shown in the following example SANbox gt zoning merged KKEKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK To permanently save the merged database locally execute the zoning merged capture command To edit the merged database use the zoning edit merged command To remove the merged database use the zoning restore command KEKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKKK Merged unsaved Zoning Information Zoneset Zone ZoneMember Z1 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 9 10 00 00 cO dd 00 b9 fa Z2 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 b9 fb 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 fc Edited Zone Set Information The edited zone set is a zone set that you were modifying when a change in active zone set or a fabric merge occurred Enter the Zoning Edited command to display the unsaved edited zone set information as shown in the following example SANbox admin zoning gt zoning edited Edited unsaved Zoning Information Zoneset Zone ZoneMember Z1 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 f9 10 00 00 cO dd 00 b9 fa 59263 01 A 7 5 7 Zoning Configuration AA Displaying Zoning Database Information QLOGIC ee Zone Set Membership Information The Zoneset Zones Zone List and Zone Zonesets commands display zone set membership information Enter the Zoneset Zones command to display the member zones for a specified z
203. etworkDiscovery Static EthIPv6NetworkAddress 2001 1 64 EthIPv6GatewayAddress fe80 1 Configuring the Ethernet Port Use the Set Setup System command in an Admin session to configure the Ethernet port and other network parameters You can configure all of the following parameters in one session or you can configure specific parameters by adding the corresponding keyword m IP Version 4 Configuration m P Version 6 Configuration m DNS Server Configuration IP Version 4 Configuration The switch supports IP version 4 which includes the following Network discovery method m P address m Subnet mask m IP gateway address The network discovery method determines how the switch acquires its IP address The IP address can come from the IP address that resides on the switch or froma server The switch supports network discovery from the following server types mE Bootstrap Protocol BootP m Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP m Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 4 Network Configuration Configuring the Ethernet Port a To configure the IP version 4 parameters enter the Set Setup System lpv4 command SANbox admin gt set setup system ipv4 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q
204. eviously entered commands Control A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line Control E Moves the cursor to the end of the command line Control U Clears the command line Getting Help To display help for a command enter the Help command followed by the command you are inquiring about The following is an example of the help that is available for the Config Edit command SANbox gt help config edit config edit CONFIG_NAME This command initiates a configuration session and places the current session into config edit mode If CONFIG_NAME is given and it exists it gets edited otherwise it gets created If it is not given the currently active configuration is edited Admin mode is required for this command Usage config edit CONFIG_NAME 59263 01 A XKX 2 Command Line Interface Usage QLOGIC Setting Page Breaks ls Setting Page Breaks Some display commands deliver so much information to the screen that it scrolls by too quickly to read it You can limit the display to 20 lines by turning on page breaks By default page breaks are turned off The following is an example of how to turn page breaks on and how it affects the display SANbox gt set pagebreak on SANbox gt zone list Zone ZoneSet Zonel alpha beta Zone2 delta echo Zone3 sierra tango Zone4 gamma delta Press any key to continue gq to quit 59263 01 A 2 5 2 Command Line Interface Usage AK Creat
205. ey to do so LoopCount decimal value 1 4294967295 100 FrameSize decimal value 40 2148 256 DataPattern 32 bit hex value or keyword Default Default StopOnError True False True LoopForever True False False Do you want to start the switch test y n n y When the test is complete remember to place the switch back online The switch resets when it leaves the diagnostics state SANbox admin gt set switch state online 59263 01 A 5 27 5 Switch Configuration Verifying and Tracing Fibre Channel Connections XX QLOGIC Me Displaying Switch Test Status You can display the test status while the test is in progress by entering the Test Status Switch command as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt test status Blade Test D Type o0 Offline internal Ol Offline internal 02 Offline internal 03 Offline internal 04 Offline internal o5 Offline internal 06 Offline internal 07 Offline internal CPUO Offline internal CPU1 Offline internal Canceling a Switch Test switch Test Status StoppedOnError Never Passed Never Never Never Never StoppedOnError Never Never Run Run Run Run Run Run Run Loop Test Count Failures 12 D S boeoeo 8 amp GOGO Ww To cancel a switch test that is in progress enter the Test Cancel Switch command Verifying and Tracing Fibre Channel Connections NOTE The Fcping an
206. f you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so LoopCount decimal value 1 4294967295 100 FrameSize decimal value 40 2148 256 DataPattern 32 bit hex value or Default Default StopOnError True False True LoopForever True False False Do you want to start the test y n n y 59263 01 A 14 199 14 Command Reference XX Uptime QLOGIC E ee Uptime Displays the elapsed up time since the switch was last reset and the reset method A hot reset or non disruptive firmware activation does not reset the elapsed up time reported by this command Authority None Syntax uptime Examples The following is an example of the Uptime command SANbox gt uptime Elapsed up time 0 day s 2 hour s 28 min s 44 sec s Reason last reset NormalReset 14 200 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference User a User Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Administers and displays user accounts Admin account name and an Admin session The Accounts and List keywords are available to all account names without an Admin session user accounts add delete account_name edit list brief accounts Displays all user accounts that exist on the switch This keyword is available to all account names without an Admin session add Add a user account to the switch You will be prompted for an account name a pa
207. fer to Table 14 34 for descriptions of the event logging configuration parameters ntp Displays NTP server configuration parameters To display all system configuration parameters omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 35 for descriptions of the NTP server configuration parameters timers Displays timer configuration parameters To display all system configuration parameters omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 36 for descriptions of the timer configuration parameters 14 177 14 Command Reference XX Show Setup System QLOGIC ee Examples The following is an example of the Show Setup System Dns command SANbox gt show setup system dns System Information DNSClientEnabled False DNSLocalHostname lt undefined gt DNSServerDiscovery Static DNSServerlAddress lt undefined gt DNSServer2Address lt undefined gt DNSServer3Address lt undefined gt DNSSearchListDiscovery Static DNSSearchListl lt undefined gt DNSSearchList2 lt undefined gt DNSSearchList3 lt undefined gt DNSSearchList4 lt undefined gt DNSSearchList5 lt undefined gt The following is an example of the Show Setup System lpv4 command SANbox gt show setup system ipv4 System Information EthIPv4NetworkEnable True EthIPv4NetworkDiscovery Static EthIPv4NetworkAddress 10 20 11 32 EthIPv4NetworkMask 255 255 252 0 EthIPv4GatewayAddress 10 20 8 254 The following is an example of the Show Setup System lpv6 command SANbox gt show setup
208. ference Show Switch OO QLOGIC Show Switch Displays switch operational information Authority None Syntax show switch Notes Table 14 41 describes the switch operational parameters Table 14 41 Switch Operational Parameters Parameter Description SymbolicName SwitchWWN BootVersion CreditPool DomainID FirstPortAddress FlashSize MBytes LogFilterLevel MaxPorts NumberOfResets ReasonForLastReset ActivelmageVersion build date PendinglmageVersion build date ActiveConfiguration AdminState AdminModeActive BeaconOnStatus OperationalState Descriptive name for the switch Switch worldwide name PROM boot version Number of port buffer credits available to recipient ports Switch domain ID Fibre Channel address of switch port 0 Size of the flash memory in megabytes Event severity level used to record events in the event log Number of ports available on the switch Number of times the switch has been reset over its service life Action that caused the last reset Active firmware image version and build date Firmware image version and build date that is pending This image will become active at the next reset or power cycle Name of the switch configuration that is in use Switch administrative state Admin session status Beacon status as set by the Set Beacon com mand Switch operational state 59263 01 A 14 181 14 Command Reference XKX Show Switch LOGIC a
209. ficate example 8 3 Support example 2 6 credit 14 146 critical event 11 1 Cyclic Redundancy Check errors 6 11 D data capture add configuration 12 13 delete configuration 12 15 modify configuration 12 14 date 5 17 5 19 Date command 5 17 14 20 decode errors 6 11 default switch configuration 14 70 zone 7 10 device access 7 1 security configuration 9 1 discard inactive 7 10 discovery method 4 1 display control 2 5 DNS See Domain Name System domain ID binding 14 30 14 34 display 14 145 Domain Name System configuration donor port 14 146 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 14 124 14 125 E elapsed time 5 4 Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 license 14 25 errors 6 11 59263 01 A Ethernet network information 4 1 port configuration 4 2 Ethernet connection 12 2 event message format 11 2 output stream control 11 4 remote logging 11 6 severity level 11 1 event log clear 11 5 configuration 11 1 11 4 configuration management 11 4 display 11 2 display configuration 11 5 filter 11 3 restore configuration 11 5 event logging by component 14 101 14 150 by port 14 103 14 152 by severity level 14 152 display 14 150 remote 11 6 restore defaults 14 104 save settings 14 104 settings 14 152 severity level 14 103 start and stop 11 2 14 104 Exit command 14 21 expiration date 3 1 extended credit 14 146 external test 6 13 14 195 14 198 F fabric binding 9 7 configuration 4 1 Fabric Device Management Interface 14 1
210. figuration XKX Managing IP Security QLOGIC E Notes 4 20 59263 01 A XX o Relc leq 5 Switch Configuration Switch configuration consists of the following tasks Displaying Switch Information Managing Switch Services Managing Switch Configurations Paging a Switch Setting the Date and Time Resetting a Switch Installing Firmware Testing a Switch Verifying and Tracing Fibre Channel Connections Managing Switch Feature Upgrades Managing Idle Session Timers Displaying Switch Information You can display the following types of the switch information Name Server Information Switch Operational Information System Process Information Elapsed Time Between Resets Configuration Information Hardware Information Firmware Information 59263 01 A 5 1 5 Switch Configuration AK Displaying Switch Information QLOGIC SSS ee Name Server Information The Show Ns command displays the list of WWNs in fabric as shown in the following example SANbox gt show ns all Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodewwNn No entries found for domain ID 1 Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodewwNn No entries found for domain ID 4 Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodewwNn 1 8 0x8 0824ba NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 08 00 20 00 00 20 37 2b 08 00 2 8 0x8 0824c3 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 2b 08 78 20 00 00 20 37 2b 08 78 3 8 0x8 0824c5 NL 3 22 00 00 20 37 lb cf fd 20 00 00 20
211. figuration XKX Managing SSL and SSH Services QLOGIC SS ee Managing SSL and SSH Services Consider the following when enabling SSH and SSL services m To establish a secure Telnet connection your workstation must use an SSH client m To enable secure SSL connections you must first synchronize the date and time on the switch and workstation Refer to Setting the Date and Time on page 5 17 m The SSL service must be enabled to authenticate users through a RADIUS server Refer to Configuring a RADIUS Server on the Switch on page 10 3 m To disable SSL when using a user authentication RADIUS server the RADIUS server authentication order must be local m Enabling SSL automatically creates a security certificate on the switch Enter the Set Setup Services command to manage both SSH and SSL services as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set setup services A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so PLEASE NOTE Further configuration may be required after enabling a service If services are disabled the connection to the switch may be lost When enabling SSL please verify that the date time settings on this switch and the workstation from where the SSL
212. figuration to the factory defaults as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt reset callhome The callhome configuration will be reset and the default values activated Please confirm y n n y Reset and activation in progress 59263 01 A 12 17 12 Call Home Configuration XKX Resetting the Call Home Database QLOGIC E ee Notes 12 18 59263 01 A XX o Relc leq 13 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration This section describes the following tasks Managing the SNMP Service Displaying SNMP Information Modifying the SNMP Configuration Resetting the SNMP Configuration Managing the SNMP Version 3 Configuration The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP provides for the management of the switch through third party applications that use SNMP Security consists of a read community string and a write community string that serve as passwords that control read and write access to the switch These strings are set at the factory to well known defaults and should be changed if SNMP is to be enabled The switch supports SNMP version 3 in the CLI which is disabled by default 59263 01 A 13 1 13 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration AK Managing the SNMP Service QLOGIC SS ee Managing the SNMP Service You control the SNMP service SNMPEnabled parameters through the Set Setup SNMP or Set Setup Services commands Refer to Modifying the SNMP
213. figurationLastEditedon DatabaseChecksum ProfileName ProfileLevel ProcessedCount ProcessedLast ProfileName ProfileLevel ProcessedCount ProcessedLast 59263 01 A admin OB session2 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy 000014a3 group4 Warn 286 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy group5 Alarm 25 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy 12 7 12 Call Home Configuration AK Managing the Call Home Database QLOGIC rll Enter the Callhome List command to display a list of Call Home profiles as shown in the following example SANbox gt callhome list Configured Profiles group4 group5 Enter the Callhome List Profile command to display a list of Call Home profiles and their details as shown in the following example SANbox gt callhome list profile ProfileName group4 Level Warn Format FullText MaxSize any size up to max of 100000 EmailSubject CallHome Warn RecipientEmail adminl company com RecipientEmail admin2 company com RecipientEmail admin3 company com RecipientEmail admin7 company com RecipientEmail admin8 company com RecipientEmail admin9 company com RecipientEmail adminl0 company com ProfileName group5 Level Alarm Format ShortText MaxSize any size up to max of 40000 EmailSubject CallHome Alarm RecipientEmail mel company com RecipientEmail mel0 company com Enter the Callhome Queue Stats command to display information about email messages in the Call Home queue as shown in the following example SA
214. fined gt indicates principal switch The following is an example of the Show Fabric Brief command SANbox gt show fabric brief Domain WWN SymbolicName 16 0x10 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 77 81 swsb1l 11 17 0x11 10 00 00 cO dd 00 6a 2d swl2 18 0x12 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 c3 04 sw 160 19 0x13 10 00 00 cO dd 00 bc 56 Sb2 108 indicates principal switch 59263 01 A 14 147 14 Command Reference XX Show FDMI QLOGIC ee Show FDMI Displays detailed information about the device host bus adapter Authority None Syntax show fdmi port_wwn Keywords port_wwn The device worldwide port name for which to display information If you omit port_wwn the command displays a summary of host bus adapter information for all attached devices in the fabric Illegal characters in the display appear as question marks 7 Examples The following is an example of the Show FDMI command SANbox gt show fdmi HBA ID PortID Manufacturer Model Ports 21 01 00 e0 8b 27 aa bc 610000 QLogic Corporation QLA2342 2 21 00 00 00 ca 25 9b 96 180100 QLogic Corporation QL2330 2 The following is an example of the Show FDMI WWN command SANbox gt show fdmi 21 00 00 e0 8b 09 3b 17 FDMI Information Manufacturer QLogic Corporation SerialNumber 04202 Model QLA2342 ModelDescription QLogic QLA2342 PCI Fibre Channel Adapter PortID 610000 NodewwN 20 00 00 e0 8b 07 aa be HardwareVersion FC5010409 10 DriverVersion 8 2 3 10 Beta 2 W2K VI OptionRomVe
215. following is an example of the Capture Add command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt capture add A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Value press ENTER to accept the default q to quit TimeOfDay HH MM 02 00 DayOfWeek Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sat Interval decimal value 1 26 weeks 1 A capture entry has been added to profile Tech_Support_Center This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command The following is an example of the Capture Edit command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt capture edit Capture Entries for Profile Tech_Support_Center Index TimeOfDay DayOfWeek Interval 1 02 00 Sat 1 weeks Please select a capture entry from the list above q to quit 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Value press ENTER to accept the def
216. g Backup command creates a file on the switch named configdata This file can be used to restore a switch configuration only from the command line interface it cannot be used to restore a switch using Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 SANbox gt config backup The configdata file contains the following switch configuration information E All named switch configurations including port switch port threshold alarm and zoning configurations E All SNMP and network information defined with the Set Setup command m The zoning database includes all zone sets zones and aliases m The security database except the group primary and secondary secrets m The Call Home database and Call Home service configuration NOTE Configuration backup files are deleted from the switch during a power cycle or switch reset Downloading the Configuration File You use FTP to download the configdata file to your workstation for safe keeping and to upload the file back to the switch for the restore function To download the configdata file open an FTP session on the switch and login with the account name images and password images Transfer the file in binary mode with the Get command as shown in the following example gt ftp ip_address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt get configdata XXXXxX bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit You should rename the configdata file on your workstation with the switch name and date for example config_switch_169_
217. ge file to install the new firmware in flash memory SANbox admin gt image unpack filename Wait for the unpack to complete Image unpack command result Passed 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Testing a Switch SO aaa a 5 A message will prompt you to reset the switch to activate the firmware Use the Hotreset command to attempt a non disruptive activation SANbox admin gt hotreset Testing a Switch You can test all ports on a switch using the Test Switch command There are three test types online offline and connectivity Refer to Testing a Port on page 6 13 for information about testing individual and ports The following sections describe the test types displaying test status and cancelling a switch test Online Tests for Switches Offline Tests for Switches Connectivity Tests for Switches Displaying Switch Test Status Canceling a Switch Test Online Tests for Switches An online test is a non disruptive test that exercises port to device connections for all ports that are online The following is an example of an online test SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt test switch online A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so LoopCount decimal val
218. gt config list Current list of configurations default config_1l config_2 Activating a Switch Configuration Enter the Config Activate command in an Admin session to activate a switch configuration config_1 as shown in the following example SANbox admin config activate config_1l Copying a Switch Configuration Enter the Config Copy command in an Admin session to create a copy of an existing configuration as shown in the following example SANbox admin config copy config_l config_2 5 12 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Managing Switch Configurations S OO Deleting a Switch Configuration Enter the Config Delete command in an Admin session to delete a configuration from the switch as shown in the following example You cannot delete the active configuration nor the default configuration Default Config SANbox admin config delete config_2 Modifying a Switch Configuration To modify a switch configuration you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time through Telnet Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 or another management application You must also open a Config Edit session with the Config Edit command and indicate which configuration you want to modify If you do not specify a configuration name the active configuration is assumed The Config Edit session provides access to the Set Config commands with
219. guration edit session in the configuration given by config_name If you omit config_name the value for config_name you chose for the most recent Config Edit command is used config_name can be up to 31 characters excluding semicolon and comma The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration Notes Changes you make to an active or inactive configuration can be saved but will not take effect until you activate that configuration Examples The following shows an example of how to open and close a Config Edit session SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit The config named default is being edited SANbox admin config gt config cancel Configuration mode will be canceled Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin gt admin end 59263 01 A Pee 14 Command Reference XX Config QLOGIC e The following is an example of how to create a backup file configdata and download the file to the workstation SANbox gt config backup SANbox gt exit gt ftp symbolic_name or ip address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt get configdata ftp gt quit The following is an example of how to upload a configuration backup file configdata from the workstation to the switch and then restore the configuration gt ftp symbolic_name or ip_address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt put configdata ftp gt quit SANbox gt
220. guration parameters Table 14 27 Specific RADIUS Server Configuration Parameters Parameter Description ServerlPAddress IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the RADIUS server The default is 10 0 0 1 ServerUDPPort User Datagram Protocol UDP port number on the RADIUS server The default is 1812 DeviceAuthServer Enable True or disable False this server for device authenti cation The default is False UserAuthServer Enable True or disable False this server for user account authentication A user authentication RADIUS server requires a secure management connection SSL The default is True AccountingServer Enable True or disable False this server for auditing of activity during a user session When enabled user activity is audited whether UserAuthServer is enabled or not The default is False The accounting server UDP port number is the ServerUDPPort value plus 1 The default is 1813 Timeout Number of seconds to wait to receive a response from the RADIUS server before timing out The default is 2 Retries Number of retries after the first attempt to establish communica tion with the RADIUS server fails The default is 0 SignPackets Enable True or disable False the use of sign packets to pro tect the RADIUS server packet integrity The default is False Secret 22 byte ASCII string used as a password for authentication pur poses between the switch and the RADIUS server 14 Com
221. gurationLastEditedOn Sat Mar 8 07 14 36 2008 Active Database Checksum 00000144 Inactive Database Checksum 00000385 History information includes the following Time of the most recent activation and the user account that performed it E Time of the most recent modification to the IP Security configuration and the user account that made it a Checksum for the active and inactive databases 59263 01 A 4 9 4 Network Configuration AK Managing IP Security QLOGIC ne IP Security Configuration Limits To display a summary of the objects in the IP Security configuration and their maximum limit enter the Ipsec Limits command to as shown in the following example SANbox gt ipsec limits Configured saved IPsec Information IPsec Attribute Maximum Current MaxConfiguredSAs 512 0 MaxConfiguredSPs 128 0 In an Ipsec Edit session Ipsec Limits command displays the number of both configured associations and policies plus those created in the edit session but not yet saved Managing the Security Policy Database The security policy database is made up of user defined policies and dynamic policies policies created by the switch In addition to creating a policy you can delete modify rename and copy user defined policies Dynamic policies can only be copied Creating a Policy Deleting a Policy Modifying a User Defined Policy Renaming a User Defined Policy Copying a Policy 59263 01 A XX 4 Network Configurat
222. h reset Total number of link resets since the last port or switch reset Number of loop initialization primitive frames received by this port Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted by this port Total number of Offline Sequences issued and received by this port Total number of frames received by this port Total number of words received by this port Total number of frames issued by this port Total number of words issued by this port Number of Link Resets issued by this port Number of Offline Sequences issued by this port Transmitter status True False 14 169 14 Command Reference XX Show Port QLOGIC SSS Examples The following is an example of the Show Port command SANbox gt show port 1 Port Number 1 AdminState Online OperationalState Offline AsicNumber 0 PerfTuningMode Normal AsicPort 2 PortID 3a0100 ConfigType GL PortWWN 20 01 00 c0 dd 0d 4f 08 POSTFaultCode 00000000 RunningType Unknown POSTStatus Passed MediaPartNumber FTLF8528P2BCV DownstreamISL False MediaRevision A EpConnState None MediaType 800 MX SN S EpIsoReason NotApplicable MediaVendor FINISAR CORP TOSt reamGuard Disabled MediaVendorID 00009065 Licensed True SymbolicName Portl LinkSpeed Auto SyncStatus SyncLost LinkState Inactive TestFaultCode 00000000 LoginStatus NotLoggediIn TestStatus NeverRun MaxCredit 16 UpstreamISL False MediaSpeeds 2Gb s 4Gb s 8Gb s XmitterEnabled True ALInit LIP_F8_F7 ALInitErro
223. hanges you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save command Authority Admin session and a Config Edit session Syntax set config zoning Initiates an editing session in which to change the zoning database configuration The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Table 14 24 Zoning Configuration Parameters Parameter Description MergeAutoSave Enables True or disables False the saving of changes to active zone set in the switch s non volatile zoning database The default is True Disabling the MergeAutoSave parameter can be useful for pre venting the propagation of zoning information when experiment ing with different zoning schemes However leaving the MergeAutoSave parameter disabled can disrupt device configura tions should a switch have to be reset For this reason the Mer geAutoSave parameter should be enabled in a production environment DefaultZone Enables Allow or disables Deny communication among ports devices that are not defined in the active zone set or when there is no active zone set The DefaultZone value must be the same on all switches in the fabric The default is Allow DiscardInactive Enables True or disables False the discarding of all inactive zone sets from that zoni
224. he zoning database to its factory state enter the Reset Zoning command as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt reset zoning 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration QLOGIC Saving the Active and Merged Zone Sets o Saving the Active and Merged Zone Sets You can save the active zone set and merged zone set to the non volatile zoning database Enter the Zoning Active Capture to save the active zone set as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt zoning active capture This command will overwrite the configured zoning database in NVRAM Please confirm y n n y The active zoning database has been saved Enter the Zoning Merged Capture to the save the merged zone set as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt zoning merged capture This command will overwrite the configured zoning database in NVRAM Please confirm y n n y The merged zoning database has been saved Resetting the Zoning Database There are two ways to remove all aliases zones and zone sets from the zoning database m Enter the Zoning Clear command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoning clear SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save m Enter the Reset Zoning command as shown in the following example The zoning configuration values MergeAutoSave DefaultZone and DiscardInactive remain
225. home gt callhome SANbox admin callhome gt profile SANbox admin callhome gt capture When you are finished making changes enter the Callhome Save command to save the changes and close the Callhome Edit session Changes take effect immediately SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save To close the Callhome Edit session without saving changes enter the Callhome Cancel command SANbox admin callhome gt callhome cancel 12 6 59263 01 A XKX 12 Call Home Configuration QLOGIC Managing the Call Home Database A O The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators when you are done making changes to the switch To remove all Call Home profiles and restore the Call Home service configuration to its factory state enter the Reset Callhome command SANbox admin gt reset callhome Managing the Call Home database consists of the following tasks Displaying Call Home Database Information Creating a Profile Deleting a Profile Modifying a Profile Renaming a Profile Copying a Profile Adding a Data Capture Configuration Modifying a Data Capture Configuration Deleting a Data Capture Configuration Displaying Call Home Database Information Enter the Callhome History command to display the Call Home data base change history information as shown in the following example SANbox gt callhome history CallHome Database History ConfigurationLastEditedBy Con
226. ibutes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so PortBindingEnabled True False False true WWN N None WWN None 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 f9 WWN N None WWN None 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 f8 WWN N None WWN None n Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Config Switch a Set Config Switch Sets the switch configuration parameters The changes you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save command Authority Admin session and a Config Edit session Syntax set config switch This command initiates an editing session in which to change switch configuration settings The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Table 14 22 describes the switch configuration parameters Table 14 22 Switch Configuration Parameters Parameter Description AdminState Switch admi
227. ical events The informative level describes routine events associated with a normal fabric NOTE Logging events at the Info severity level can deplete switch resources because of the high volume of events None Monitors none of the severity levels port port_list Specifies one or more ports to monitor for events Choose one of the following values port_list Specifies the port or ports to monitor port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 All Specifies all ports None Disables monitoring on all ports 59263 01 A 14 103 14 Command Reference XX Set Log LOGIC SSS OOOO restore Restores and saves the port component and level settings to the default values save Saves the log settings for the component severity level port and display level These settings remain in effect after a switch reset The log settings can be viewed using the Show Log Settings command To export log entries to a file use the Set Log Archive command start Starts the logging of events based on the Port Component and Level keywords assigned to the current configuration The logging continues until you enter the Set Log Stop command stop Stops logging of events Notes In addition to critical warn and informative severity levels the highest event severity level is alarm The alarm level describes events that are disr
228. ifying Port Operating Characteristics QLOGIC ee You can configure all ports based a specified source port using the Set Config Ports command The following example configures ports 0 23 based on port 3 SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin config edit SANbox admin gt set config ports 3 SANbox admin config gt config save SANbox admin gt config activate SANbox admin gt admin end The following example temporarily changes the port 1 administrative state to Down SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set port 1 state down 6 8 59263 01 A XKX 6 Port Configuration QLOGIC Port Binding aaa Port Binding Port binding establishes up to 32 switches or devices that are permitted to log in to a particular switch port Switches or devices that are not among the 32 are refused access to the port Enter the Show Config Security Portbinding command to display the port binding configuration for all ports as shown in the following example SANbox gt show config security portbinding Configuration Name default Port Binding Status WWN 0 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 1 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 2 False No port binding entries found 3 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 4 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 5 False No port binding entries found 6 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 81 7 False No port binding entries found 8 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 9 False No port binding entries found 0 False No po
229. igured zoning database in NVRAM Please confirm y n n y The merged zoning database has been saved 59263 01 A 14 221 14 Command Reference XX Zoning Restore QLOGIC ee Zoning Restore Restores the volatile zoning database with the contents of the non volatile zoning database If the MergeAutoSave parameter is False see Table 14 13 you can use this command to revert changes to the merged zone set that were propagated from another switch in the fabric through zone set activation or merging fabrics Authority Admin session Syntax zoning restore 14 222 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Zoning Save FFT Zoning Save Saves changes made during the current Zoning Edit session The system informs you that the zone set must be activated to implement any changes Authority Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Syntax zoning save Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Save command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save The changes have been saved however they must be activated before they can take effect see zoneset activate command 59263 01 A 14 223 14 Command Reference XKX Zoning Save QLOGIC Notes 14 224 59263 01 A Index A account name admin 2 2 display 14 201 14 204 factory 3 1 maintenance mode 3 1 activation firmware 5 20 5 21 security 9 9 9 11 switch
230. ile this will take several seconds FIP the dump support file to another machine y n n SANbox admin gt quit gt ftp switch_ip_address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt get dump_support tgz XXXxx bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit The following is an example of the Create Certificate command SANbox admin gt create certificate The current date and time is day mon date hh mm ss UTC yyyy This is the time used to stamp onto the certificate Is the date and time correct y n n y Certificate generation successful 14 Command Reference AK Date QLOGIC E e Date Authority Syntax Keywords Notes Examples 14 20 Displays or sets the system date and time To set the date and time the information string must be provided in this format MMDDhhmmCCYY The new date and time takes effect immediately Admin session except to display the date date MMDDhhmmCCYY MMDDhhmmCCYY Specifies the date this requires an Admin session If you omit MMDDhhmmCCYY the current date is displayed which does not require an Admin session Network Time Protocol NTP must be disabled to set the time with the Date command Enter the Set Setup System command to disable the NTPClientEnabled parameter When setting the date and time on a switch that is enabled for SSL connections the switch time must be within 24 hours of the workstation time Otherwise the connection will fai
231. ime of the most recent IP security database modification and the user who performed it 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Ipsec a m Checksums for the active and inactive IP security databases limits Displays the maximum and current numbers of configured associations and policies This Keyword does not require an Admin session nor an Ipsec Edit session However in an Ipsec Edit session this command displays the number of both configured associations and policies plus those created in the edit session but not yet saved save Saves changes made during the current Ipsec Edit session Examples The following is an example of the Ipsec History command SANbox gt ipsec history IPsec Database History ConfigurationLastEditedBy johndoe OB session5 ConfigurationLastEditedon Sat Mar 8 07 14 36 2008 Active Database Checksum 00000144 Inactive Database Checksum 00000385 The following is an example of the Ipsec Limits command SANbox gt ipsec limits Configured saved IPsec Information IPsec Attribute Maximum Current MaxConfiguredSAs 512 0 MaxConfiguredSPs 128 0 59263 01 A 14 45 14 Command Reference XX lpsec Association QLOGIC Se Ipsec Association Authority Syntax Keywords 14 46 Creates and manages associations in the Security Association database Admin session and an Ipsec Edit session ipsec association copy association_source association_destination create association
232. ing 282 254 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 26 qfsApp 284 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 08 2 03 02 26 snmpservicepath 285 282 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 26 qfsApp 308 224 0 0 0 8 00 00 29 2 03 02 25 cim_server 322 224 0 0 0 7 00 00 16 2 03 02 24 util 323 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 09 2 03 02 24 port_mon 324 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 07 2 03 02 24 diagAgent 325 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 03 2 03 02 24 diagExec 289 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 00 2 03 02 25 snmpd 290 224 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 25 snmpmain 335 290 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 23 snmpmain 336 335 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 2 03 02 23 snmpmain The column titles are as follows PID Process identifier PPID Parent process identifier CPU Percentage CPU usage MEM Percentage memory usage TIME Actual processing time ELAPSED Elapsed time since the process started COMMAND The command that initiated the process 5 4 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Switch Information a Elapsed Time Between Resets The Uptime command displays the elapsed time since the switch was last reset and the reset method A hot reset or non disruptive firmware activation does not reset the elapsed time reported by this command The following example displays the time since the last reset SANbox gt uptime Elapsed up time 0 day s 2 hour s 28 min s 44 sec s Reason last reset NormalReset Configuration Information The Show Config command displays a variety of configuration information at the port and switch lev
233. ing a Support File QLOGIC ee Creating a Support File If you contact technical support about a problem with your switch they may request that you create and send a support file This support file contains all of the switch configuration information which can be helpful in diagnosing the problem The Create Support command creates the support file dump_support tgz on the switch If your workstation has an FTP server you can proceed with the command prompts to send the file from the switch to a remote host Otherwise you can use FTP to download the support file from the switch to your workstation NOTE Support files are deleted from the switch during a power cycle or switch reset The following example creates a support file and sends it to a remote host if your workstation has an FTP server SANbox gt create support Log Msg Creating the support file this will take several seconds FTP the dump support file to another machine y n y Enter IPv4 IPv6 Address or hostname of remote computer 10 20 33 130 Login name johndoe Enter remote directory name bin support Would you like to continue downloading support file y n n y Connected to 10 20 33 130 10 20 33 130 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 331 Password required for johndoe Password XXXXXXX 230 User johndoe logged in cd bin support 250 CWD command successful led itasca conf images Local directory now itasca c
234. ing firmware on a second switch m Ports that change states during the non disruptive activation will be reset When the non disruptive activation is complete Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 and QuickTools sessions reconnect automatically However Telnet sessions must be restarted manually m This command clears the event log and all counters NOTE After upgrading firmware that includes changes to QuickTools an open QuickTools session may indicate that the firmware is not supported This means the new firmware is not supported by the previous QuickTools version To correct this situation close the QuickTools session and the browser window then open a new QuickTools session 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Image I Image Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Manages and installs switch firmware Admin session image cleanup fetch account_name ip address file_source file_destination install list tftp ip address file source file destination unpack file cleanup Removes all firmware image files from the switch All firmware image files are removed automatically each time the switch is reset fetch account_name ip_address file_source file_destination Retrieves image file given by file_source using FTP and stores it on the switch with the file name given by file_destination The image file is retrieved from the host IP address given by ip address ip address can b
235. inued Parameter Description TrapCommunity Trap community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to receive traps This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The trap community password can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is public AuthFailureTrap Enables True or disables False the generation of traps in response to trap authentication failures The default is False ProxyEnabled Enables True or disables False SNMP communication with other switches in the fabric The default is True SNMPv3Enabled Enables True or disables False SNMP version 3 The default is False trap trap_number Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change SNMP trap parameters for the trap number given by trap_number trap_number can be 1 5 For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value To configure common parameters and trap parameters omit the Trap keyword Refer to Table 14 29 for a description of the SNMP trap parameters Table 14 30 describes the trap parameters Table 14 30 SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Trap 1 5 Address Workstation IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name to which SNMP traps are sent The default address for trap 1 is 10 0 0 254 The default address for traps 2 5 is 0 0 0 0 Addresses other than 0 0 0 0 for all tr
236. ion Create a Group Creating a group involves specifying a group name and a group type There are three types of groups m ISL group secures connected switches E Port group secures connected devices m MS group secures management server commands Enter the Group Create command to create a new port group as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt group create group_port port Delete a Group Enter the Group Delete command to delete group_port from the security database as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt group delete group_port Rename a Group Enter the Group Rename command to rename group_port to port_1 as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt group rename group_port port_1l Copy a Group Enter the Group Copy command to copy the contents of an existing group group_port to a new group port_1 as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt group copy group_port port_l 9 12 59263 01 A XKX 9 Device Security Configuration QLOGIC Managing Groups TO Add Members to a Group Adding a member to a group involves specifying a group the member worldwide name and the member attributes The member attributes define the authentication method encryption method secrets and fabric binding depending on the group type a For ISL member attributes refer to Table 14 2 For Port member attributes ref
237. ion QLOGIC Managing IP Security a Creating a Policy To create a policy enter the Ipsec Policy Create command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec policy create h2h sh sp A list of attributes with formatting will follow Enter a value or simply press the ENTER key to skip specifying a value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Required attributes are preceded by an asterisk Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit Description string value 0 127 bytes Host to host switch gt host SourceAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address PrefixLength fe80 2c0 ddff fe03 d4cl SourcePort decimal value 1 65535 DestinationAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address PrefixLength fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 DestinationPort decimal value 1 65535 Protocol decimal value or keyword Allowed keywords icmp icmp6 ip4 tcp udp or any any Direction l in 2 out 2 2 Priority value 2147483647 to 214783647 Action l discard 2 none 3 ipsec gt 3 ProtectionDesired select one transport mode only 1 ah Authentication Header 2 esp Encapsulating Security Payload 3 both gt 2 espRuleLevel l default 2 use 3 require s 3 The security policy has been created This configuration must be saved with the ipsec save command before
238. ion among ports devices that are not defined in the active zone set m Discardlnactive This parameter enables or disables the discarding of all zone sets except the active zone set If MergeAutoSave is False on a switch and a new zone set is activated elsewhere in the fabric or a fabric merge occurs you can choose how to dispose of the merged zone set E Enter the Zoning Merged command to display merged zone set m Enter the Zoning Edit Merged command to edit the merged zone set m Enter the Zoning Merged Capture command to save the merged zone set to the non volatile zoning database m Enter the Zoning Restore command to discard the merged zone set If you are editing the configured zone set that corresponds to the active zone set and a zone set merge occurs you have the same options plus you can enter the Zoning Edited command to display the edited zoning database To restore the zoning configuration to its factory values enter the Reset Config or Reset Factory commands Notice however these commands restore other aspects of the switch configuration also 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration LOGIC Configuring the Zoning Database O To modify the zoning configuration you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time through Telnet QuickTools Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 or another management application You must also op
239. ion may be required after enabling a service If services are disabled the connection to the switch may be lost When enabling SSL please verify that the date time settings on this switch and the workstation from where the SSL connection will be started match and then a new certificate may need to be created to ensure a secure connection to this switch TelnetEnabled True False True SSHEnabled True False False GUIMgmt Enabled True False rue SSLEnabled True False False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True False True SNMPEnabled True False rue NTPEnabled True False False CIMEnabled True False False FTPEnabled True False True Mgmt ServerEnabled True False True CallHomeEnabled True False True Do you want to save and activate this services setup y n n 14 118 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Setup SNMP rT Set Setup SNMP Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Configures SNMP on the switch Admin session set setup snmp common trap trap_number common Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change SNMP configuration parameters that are common for all traps For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value To configure common parameters and trap parameters omit the Common keyword Refer to Table 14 30 for a description of the SNMP trap parameters Table 14 29 describes the common SNMP configuration p
240. istration 14 201 59263 01 A User command 14 201 Accounts example 3 2 Add example 3 3 Delete example 3 4 Edit example 3 4 List example 3 2 V Virtual Interface preference routing 14 88 W warning 11 1 web applet service 14 117 Whoami command 14 204 workstation date and time 8 3 settings 2 2 Z zone add member port 14 205 add to zone set 7 15 7 18 copy 7 17 14 205 create 7 17 14 205 definition 7 1 delete 7 17 14 206 delete member port 14 206 list 14 206 list members 14 206 management 7 16 membership 7 7 orphan 14 206 orphans 7 7 remove 7 14 remove from zone set 7 16 remove ports devices 7 18 rename 7 17 14 206 Index 11 SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide XX QLOGIC ee Zone command 14 205 Add example 7 18 Copy example 7 17 Create example 7 17 Delete example 7 17 Members example 7 7 Remove example 7 18 Rename example 7 17 Zonesets example 7 6 zone set activate 7 16 14 208 active 7 1 7 4 7 13 14 211 add member zone 14 208 add zones 7 15 configured 7 2 copy 7 15 14 208 create 7 14 14 209 deactivate 7 16 14 69 14 209 definition 7 1 delete 7 15 14 209 delete member zone 14 209 display 14 209 display active 14 208 display members 14 209 display zones 14 206 information 7 2 management 7 14 membership 7 6 merged 7 5 7 13 remove 7 14 remove zones 7 16 rename 7 15 14 209 Zoneset command 14 208 Activate example 7 16 Active example 7 4 Add exa
241. it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the ipsec cancel command 4 Network Configuration XKX Managing IP Security QLOGIC ee Deleting a Policy To delete a user defined policy enter the Ipsec Policy Delete command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec policy delete policy_1l The security policy will be deleted Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save The IPsec configuration will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 4 12 59263 01 A XX 4 Network Configuration QLOGIC Managing IP Security ae Modifying a User Defined Policy To modify an existing user defined policy enter the Ipsec Policy Edit command in an Admin session and an Ipsec Edit session as shown in the following example An asterisk indicates a required entry SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec policy edit h2h sh sp A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value To remove a value for an optional attribute use n If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values Description Host to host switch gt host espRuleLevel require New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit n for non
242. k Control Frame 14 88 link state database 14 154 Lip command 14 57 log archive 14 101 clear 14 101 display 14 102 14 151 event 14 101 14 150 local 14 125 POST 14 171 remote 14 125 log file 11 7 download 2 7 upload 2 8 logged in users 14 188 login errors 6 11 limit 2 3 login session 5 30 Logout command 14 58 logout errors 6 11 loop port initialization 14 57 loss of signal errors 6 11 maintenance mode 3 1 Management Server group 9 1 9 12 14 32 service 14 118 manufacturer information 14 173 mask address 14 124 14 125 Index 5 SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide XX QLOGIC ee MD5 authentication 14 31 memory activity 14 159 message format 12 3 queue 12 8 12 16 MS See Management Server Multi Frame Sequence bundling 14 88 N name server information 5 2 14 160 network configuration 4 1 configuration reset 14 69 discovery 4 1 4 2 14 124 14 125 enable 14 124 gateway address 14 124 14 125 interfaces 14 149 IP address 14 124 14 125 mask 14 124 14 125 Network Time Protocol 5 19 client 14 126 description 5 17 interaction with Date command 14 20 server address 14 126 service 14 117 non disruptive activation 5 21 14 40 NTP See Network Time Protocol O offline test port 6 14 switch 5 26 online test port 6 13 switch 5 25 operational information 5 3 orphan zones 7 7 output stream control 11 4 Index 6 P page break 2 5 Passwd command 3 4 14 59 password
243. l The following is an example of the Date command SANbox gt date Mon Apr 07 07 51 24 200x 59263 01 A x 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Exit TT Exit Closes the Telnet session Authority None Syntax exit Notes You can also press Control D to close the Telnet session 59263 01 A 14 21 14 Command Reference AK Fcping QLOGIC ee Fcping Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 14 22 NOTE This command requires the SANdoctor license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Use the Feature command to install a license key Verifies a Fibre Channel connection with another switch or a device and reports status None fcping destination address count number timeout seconds address The address of the port or device with which to verify the Fibre Channel connection address can have one of the following formats m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex Enter addresses with or without the Ox prefix m 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XX IXX IXX XXIXXIXXIXX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX count number Number of times given by number to repeat the command If you omit this keyword the command is repeated once timeout seconds Number of seconds given by seconds to wait for a response If you omit this keyword the switch waits 1 second for a response The f
244. ld take several minutes Alarm Msg day month date time year A1000 000A SM The switch will be reset in 3 seconds due to a config restore SANbox admin gt Alarm Msg day month date time year A1000 0005 SM The switch is being reset 5 16 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Paging a Switch TT Paging a Switch To help you locate a particular switch in a rack of switches you can turn on the beacon feature with the Set Beacon command This causes all port Logged In LEDs to flash in unison The following is an example of how to turn the beacon on and off SANbox gt set beacon on SANbox gt set beacon off Setting the Date and Time The switch date and time can be set explicitly using the Date command or it can be set automatically through a Network Time Protocol NTP server The Date command also displays the current time Unlike the Date command the NTP server also synchronizes the date and time on the switch with the date and time on the workstation which is required for Secure Socket Layer SSL connections NOTE To set the date with the Date command the NTP client must be disabled For information about disabling the NTPClientEnabled parameter refer to the Set Setup System command If you are using the date command you can set the time zone using the Set Timezone command The default time zone is Universal Time UTC also known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT Changing the time zone c
245. lf test EpConnects Number of times an E_Port connected through ISL negotia tion EpConnState E Port connection status EplsoReason E_Port isolation reason FBusy Number of times the switch sent a F_BSY because Class 2 frame could not be delivered within ED_ TOV time The num ber of class 2 and class 3 fabric busy F_BSY frames gener ated by this port in response to inbound frames This usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N_Port that is pre venting delivery of this frame Flowerrors Number of frames received there were no available credits FReject Number of frames from devices that were rejected InvalidCRC Invalid CRC detected InvalidDestAddr Invalid destination address detected lOStreamGuard 1 O StreamGuard status Licensed Port activation status LinkFailures Number of optical link failures detected by this port A link fail ure is a loss of synchronization or a loss of signal while not in the offline state A loss of signal causes the switch to attempt to re establish the link If the link is not re established a link failure is counted A link reset is performed after a link failure LinkSpeed Port transmission speed LinkState Port activity status LIP_AL_PD ALPS Number of F7 AL_PS LIPs or AL_PD vendor specific resets performed LIP_F7_AL_PS This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop An L_Port identified by AL_PS may have noticed a performance degradation and is trying to restore the loop
246. llisec onds the switch waits to allow two ports to allocate enough resources to establish a link The default is 10000 Error Detect Timeout Value The number of milliseconds a port is to wait for errors to clear The default is 2000 E D_TOV PrincipalPriority The priority used in the FC SW 2 principal switch selection algorithm 1 is high 255 is low The default is 254 ConfigDescription Switch configuration description The configuration descrip tion can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is Config Default Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Switch command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config switch A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so AdminState 1 Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics Online BroadcastEnabled True False True InbandEnabled True False True FDMIEnabled True False True FDMIEntries decimal value 0 1000 1000 DefaultDomainID decimal value 1 239 2 DomainIDLock True False False SymbolicName string max 32 chars SANbox R_A_TOV decimal value 100 100000 msec 10000 E_D_TOV decimal value 10 20000 msec 2000 PrincipalPriority decim
247. llowing subsections present IP security concepts and management tasks m P Security Concepts m Displaying IP Security Information m Managing the Security Policy Database m Managing the Security Association Database Resetting the IP Security Configuration IP Security Concepts IP Security provides encryption based security for IP version 4 and IP version 6 communications through the use of security policies and associations The security policy database is the set of all security policies configured on the switch A security policy defines the following parameters Connection source and destination m Data traffic direction inbound or outbound m Protocols for which to protect data traffic Security protocols Authentication Header AH or Encapsulating Security Payload ESP Level of protection IP Security discard or none Policies can define security for host to host host to gateway and gateway to gateway connections one policy for each direction For example to secure the connection between two hosts you need two policies one for outbound traffic from the source to the destination and another for inbound traffic to the source from the destination You can specify sources and destinations by IP addresses version 4 or 6 or DNS host names If a host name resolves to more than one IP address the switch creates the necessary policies and associations You can recognize these dynamic policies and associations because their nam
248. lobal Engineering Documents 15 Inverness Way East Englewood CO 80112 5776 Phone 800 854 7179 or 303 397 7956 Fax 303 397 2740 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 1 Introduction Technical Support A y Technical Support Customers should contact their authorized maintenance provider for technical support of their QLogic switch products QLogic direct customers may contact QLogic Technical Support others will be redirected to their authorized maintenance provider Visit the QLogic support Web site listed in Contact Information for the latest firmware and software updates Availability Training 59263 01 A QLogic Technical Support for products under warranty is available during local standard working hours excluding QLogic Observed Holidays QLogic offers certification training for the technical professional for both the SANblade HBAs and the SANbox switches From the training link at www qglogic com you may choose Electronic Based Training or schedule an intensive hands on Certification course Technical Certification courses include installation maintenance and troubleshooting QLogic SAN products Upon demonstrating knowledge using live equipment QLogic awards a certificate identifying the student as a Certified Professional The training professionals at QLogic may be reached by email at tech training qlogic com 1 Introduction XX Technical Support QLOGIC Contact Information Support Headquarter
249. log display warn Managing the Event Log Configuration Managing the Event Log Configuration consists of the following tasks Configure the Event Log m Display the Event Log Configuration m Restore the Event Log Configuration Configure the Event Log You can customize what events are recorded in the switch event log according to component severity level and port Enter the Set Log Component Set Log Level and Set Log Port commands in an Admin session to filter the events to be recorded You can choose from the following component events E E_Port events Management server events Name server events Port events Switch management events Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP events Zoning events Call Home events The following example configures the event log to record switch management events with warning and critical severity levels associated with ports 0 3 Entering the Set Log Save command ensures that this configuration is preserved across switch resets SANbox admin gt set log component switch SANbox admin gt set log level warn SANbox admin gt set log port 0 1 2 3 SANbox admin gt set log save 11 4 59263 01 A QC 11 Event Log Configuration QLOGIC Clearing the Event Log Se Display the Event Log Configuration Enter the Show Log Settings command to display all event log configuration settings as shown in the following example SANbox gt show log settings
250. log file path name var adm messages messages name local0 info lt tab gt var adm messages messages name Consult your host operating system documentation for information on how to configure remote logging Enter the Set Setup System Logging command to control local logging through the LocalLogEnabled parameter and remote logging through the RemoteLogEnabled and RemoteLogHostAddress parameters as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set setup system logging A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list q or Q and the ENTER key to do so press Current Values LocalLogEnabled True RemoteLogEnabled False RemoteLogHostAddress 10 0 0 254 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none LocalLogEnabled True False RemoteLogEnabled True False RemoteLogHostAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address Do you want to save and activate this system setup y n n 11 6 59263 01 A XX 11 Event Log Configuration LOGIC Creating and Downloading a Log File I Creating and Downloading a Log File Enter the Set Log Archive command to collect the event log messages in a file on the switch named ogfile This file can have a maximum of 1200 event messages Use FTP to download the file from the switch
251. lse MFSEnabled False MSEnabled True IOStreamGuard Disabled ViIEnabled False PDISCPingEnabled True 59263 01 A 14 139 14 Command Reference XX Show Config Security QLOGIC SS SS Se Show Config Security Displays the security database configuration parameters Authority None Syntax show config security Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Security command SANbox gt show config security Configuration Name default FabricBindingEnabled False AutoSave True Port Binding Status WWN 0 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 1 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 2 False No port binding entries found 3 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 4 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 5 False No port binding entries found 6 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 81 7 False No port binding entries found 8 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 9 False No port binding entries found 0 False No port binding entries found 1 False No port binding entries found 2 False No port binding entries found 3 False No port binding entries found 4 False No port binding entries found 5 False No port binding entries found 6 False No port binding entries found 7 False No port binding entries found 8 False No port binding entries found 9 False No port binding entries found 20 False No port binding entries found 21 False No port binding entries found 22 False No port binding entries found 23 False No port binding entries found 14 140 59263
252. mal value 40 2148 256 J DataPattern 32 bit hex value or Default Default StopOnError True False True LoopForever True False False Do you want to start the test y n n y The test has been started A notification with the test result s will appear on the screen when the test has completed SANbox admin gt Test for port 1 Passed When the test is complete remember to place the port back online SANbox admin gt set port 1 state online 6 14 59263 01 A XKX 6 Port Configuration QLOGIC Testing a Port a Display Port Test Results You can display the test status while the test is in progress by entering the Test Status Port command in an Admin session as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt test status port 1 Port Test Test Loop Test Num Port Type Status Count Failures Al 1 Offline Internal Passed 12 0 Cancel a Port Test To cancel a port test that is in progress enter the Test Cancel Port command SANbox gt show donor Port Config Ext Credit Max Credit Donated Member of Valid Groups to Number Type Requested Available to Port Donor Group Extend Credit 0 GL 0 16 None 0 0 1 GL 0 16 None 0 0 2 GL 0 16 None 0 0 3 GL 0 16 None 0 0 4 GL 0 16 None 0 0 5 GL 0 16 None 0 0 6 GL 0 16 None 0 0 a GL 0 16 None 0 0 8 GL 0 16 None 0 0 9 GL 0 16 None 0 0 0 GL 0 16 None 0 0 1 GL 0 16 None 0 0 2 GL 0 16 None 0 0 3 GL 0 16 None 0 0 4 GL 0 16 None 0 0
253. mand Reference XX Set Setup Radius QLOGIC Se Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup Radius Common command SANbox admin gt set setup radius common A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the attributes for the server being processed press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so If you wish to terminate the configuration process completely press qq or Q and the ENTER key to so do PLEASE NOTE SSL must be enabled in order to configure RADIUS User Authentication SSL can be enabled using the set setup services command Current Values DeviceAuthOrder Local UserAuthOrder Local TotalServers 1 New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit DeviceAuthOrder 1 Local 2 Radius 3 RadiusLocal UserAuthOrder 1 Local 2 Radius 3 RadiusLocal TotalServers decimal value 0 5 Do you want to save and activate this radius setup y n n 14 114 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Setup Radius A The following is an example of the Set Setup Radius Server command SANbox admin gt set setup radius server 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this pr
254. mmand Reference XX Ipsec QLOGIC Se Ipsec Authority Syntax Keywords 14 44 Manages the IP Security database The IP Security database consists of the Security Association database and the Security Policy database The lpsec Edit command opens a session in which to create and manage associations and policies Admin session except for the History keyword The Clear keyword also requires an lpsec Edit session ipsec cancel clear edit history limits save cancel Closes the current Ipsec Edit session Any unsaved changes are lost clear Deletes all associations and policies from the from the volatile edit copy of the IP security configuration This keyword requires an lpsec Edit session This keyword does not affect the non volatile IP security configuration However if you enter the Ipsec Clear command followed by the Ipsec Save command the non volatile IP security configuration will be deleted from the switch NOTE The preferred method for deleting the IP security configuration from the switch is the Reset Ipsec command edit Open an Ipsec Edit session in which to create and manage associations and policies Ipsec Edit session commands include Ipsec Clear Ipsec Association commands and Ipsec Policy commands This keyword requires an Admin session history Displays a history of IP security modifications This keyword does not require an Admin session History information includes the following T
255. month date time year Passed 24 Full Fabric 14 190 59263 01 A x 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Shutdown SS a Shutdown Terminates all data transfers on the switch at convenient points and closes the Telnet session Always power cycle the switch after entering this command Authority Admin session Syntax shutdown Notes When the shutdown is complete the Heartbeat LED is extinguished 59263 01 A 14 191 14 Command Reference XX Snmpv3user QLOGIC Ce Snmpv3user Authority Syntax Keywords 14 192 Manages SNMP version 3 user accounts on the switch Admin session except for the List keyword snmpv3user add delete account edit list add Creates an SNMP version 3 user account prompting you for the parameters that are described in Table 14 43 Table 14 43 SNMP Version 3 User Account Parameters Parameter Description Username Account user name Group Group type Read Only or Read Write The default is Read Only Authentication Enables True or disables False authentication The default is False AuthType Authentication type can be MD5 or SHA AuthPhrase Authentication phrase Confirm AuthPhrase Authentication phrase confirmation Re enter the phrase Privacy Enables True or disables False privacy The default is False PrivType Privacy type The default is DES PrivPhrase Privacy phrase Confirm PrivPhrase Privacy phrase confirmation Re enter the phrase delete
256. mple SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoneset delete zoneset_1 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Rename a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Rename command to rename a zone set as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoneset rename zoneset_old zoneset_new SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Copy a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Copy command to copy a zone set and its contents to a new zone set as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoneset copy zoneset_1l zoneset_2 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Add Zones to a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Add command to add a zone to a zone set as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoneset add zoneset_1 zone_l zone_2 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save 59263 01 A 7 15 7 Zoning Configuration AA Managing Zones QLOGIC Me Remove Zones from a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Remove command to remove zones from a zone set as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zo
257. mple 7 15 Copy example 7 15 Create example 7 14 Deactivate example 7 16 Delete example 7 15 List example 7 2 Merged example 7 5 Remove example 7 16 Rename example 7 15 Zones example 7 6 zoning configuration 7 1 14 99 configuration display 14 144 configuration parameters 5 6 database 14 69 edit session 14 1 hardware enforced 7 1 information 7 2 limits 14 219 list definitions 14 220 merged zone set 7 10 modification history 7 8 modify 7 11 reset 7 12 restore 7 10 revert changes 14 222 save edits 14 223 Zoning Active command 14 211 Capture example 7 13 example 7 4 Zoning Cancel command 14 212 Zoning Clear command 14 213 example 7 13 Zoning command Merged Capture example 7 13 Zoning Configured command 14 214 zoning database configuration 7 10 limits 7 9 modify 7 12 reset 7 13 Index 12 59263 01 A x SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch QLOGIC Command Line Interface Guide TO Zoning Delete command example 7 14 Zoning Delete Orphans command 14 215 Zoning Edit command 14 216 example 7 12 Zoning Edited command 14 217 Zoning History command 14 218 example 7 8 Zoning Limits command 14 219 example 7 9 Zoning List command 14 220 example 7 3 Zoning Merged command 14 221 Capture example 7 13 Zoning Restore command 14 222 Zoning Save command 14 223 59263 01 A Index 13 SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch XKX Command Line Interface Guide QLOGIC ee Index 14 59263 01 A
258. ms are always displayed on the screen Admin session set log archive clear component filter_list display filter level filter port port_list restore save start default stop archive Collects all log entries and stores the result in new file named ogfile that is maintained in switch memory where it can be downloaded using FTP To download ogfile open an FTP session log in with account name password of images for both and type get logfile clear Clears all log entries component filter_list Specifies one or more components given by filter_list to monitor for events A component is a firmware module that is responsible for a particular portion of switch operation Use a lt space gt to delimit values in the list filter_list can be one or more of the following All Monitors all components To maintain optimal switch performance do not use this setting with the Level keyword set to Info Eport Monitors all E_Ports 14 101 14 Command Reference AK Set Log LOGIC ee Mgmtserver Monitors management server status Nameserver Monitors name server status None Monitor none of the component events Port Monitors all port events QFS Monitors all QLogic Fabric Service QFS events QFS governs Call Home e mail notification SNMP Monitors all SNMP events Switch Monitors switch management events Zoning Monitors zoning conflict events display filter Specifies
259. n config log pagebreak port setup switch 14 39 14 Command Reference XX Hotreset QLOGIC ee Hotreset Authority Syntax Notes 14 40 Resets the switch for the purpose of activating the pending firmware without disrupting traffic This command terminates all management sessions saves all configuration information and clears the event log After the pending firmware is activated the configuration is recovered This process may take a few minutes To save the event log to a file before resetting enter the Set Log Archive command Admin session hotreset To ensure a successful non disruptive activation you should first satisfy the following conditions Q No changes are being made to switches in the fabric including powering up powering down disconnecting or connecting ISLs changing switch configurations or installing firmware Q No port on the switch is in the diagnostic state m No Zoning Edit sessions are open on the switch Q No changes are being made to attached devices including powering up powering down disconnecting connecting and HBA configuration changes QJ Fora fabric in which one or more switches are running firmware prior to version 7 4 only one Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 session can be open Install firmware on one switch at a time in the fabric If you are installing firmware on one switch wait two minutes after the activation is complete before install
260. n display 14 174 information 10 2 reset 14 68 Registered State Change Notification 14 89 Remote Dial In User Service 10 1 remote host logging description 11 6 enable 14 125 host address 14 125 remote logging 4 2 59263 01 A Reset command 14 67 Callhome example 12 7 12 16 12 17 Config example 7 10 Factory example 7 10 IP Security example 4 7 Ipsec example 4 19 Port example 6 10 Security example 9 10 SNMP example 13 5 Zoning example 7 12 7 13 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol 14 124 14 125 routing 14 88 14 180 RSCN See Registered State Change Notification S SANdoctor license 14 25 secret 14 31 Secure Shell description 8 1 service 8 2 14 116 Secure Socket Layer certificate 8 3 14 17 description 8 1 service 8 2 14 117 switch time 14 20 security certificate 8 2 8 3 configuration 14 92 configuration display 14 140 configuration parameters 5 7 connection 8 1 database 14 68 edit session 14 1 group 9 1 revert changes 9 7 security association database 4 14 information 4 8 Index 7 SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide XX QLOGIC ee Security command 14 77 Activate example 9 9 Active example 9 4 Clear example 9 10 Edit example 9 9 History example 9 6 Limits example 9 6 List example 9 3 Save example 9 9 security database autosave 9 7 clear 14 77 configuration 9 7 description 9 1 display 14 78 display history 14 78 information 9 2 limits 9 6 14 78 modifica
261. nState Alinit AlinitError AsicNumber AsicPort BadFrames BBCR_FrameFailures BBCR_RRDYFailures ClassXFramesin ClassXFramesOut ClassXWordsIn ClassXWordsOut ClassXToss ConfigType Administrative state Number of times the port began arbitrated loop initialization Number of times the port entered initialization and the initial ization failed ASIC number ASIC port number Number of frames that have framing errors Number of times more frames were lost during a credit recov ery period than the recovery process could resolve This causes a Link Reset to recover the credits Number of times more R_RDYs were lost during a credit recovery period than the recovery process could resolve This causes a Link Reset to recover the credits Number of class x frames received by this port Number of class x frames sent by this port Number of class x words received by this port Number of class x words sent by this port Number of times an SOFi3 or SOFn3 frame is tossed from TBUF Configured port type 59263 01 A XKX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Port Table 14 40 Show Port Parameters Continued Entry Description DecodeError Number of decode errors detected DownstreamlSL Downstream ISL state True indicates a connection to another switch that is not the principal switch POSTFaultCode Fault code from the most recent Power on self test POSTStatus Status from the most recent Power on se
262. nd activate this snmp setup y n n 14 Command Reference XKX Set Setup SNMP QLOGIC ne The following is an example of the Set Setup Snmp Trap command SANbox admin gt set setup snmp trap 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values TraplEnabled True TraplAddress 10 20 33 181 TraplPort 5001 TraplSeverity info TraplVersion 2 TraplCommunity northdakota New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit TraplEnabled True False TraplAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address TraplPort decimal value 1 65535 TraplSeverity select a severity level 1 unknown 6 warning 2 emergency 7 notify 3 alert 8 info 4 critical 9 debug S error 10 mark TraplVersion 1 2 TraplCommunity string max 32 chars Do you want to save and activate this snmp setup y n n 14 122 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Setup System rT Set Setup System Configures the network logging NTP server and timer configurations on the switch Authority Admin session Syntax set setup system dns ipv4 ipv6 logging ntp timers Keywords dns Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change DNS host name configuration parameters described in Table 14 31 T
263. nd as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt security clear All security information will be cleared Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin security gt security save m Enter the Reset Security command as shown in the following example The security configuration values autosave and fabric binding remain unchanged SANbox admin gt reset security Managing Security Sets Managing Security Sets consists of the following tasks Create a Security Set Delete a Security Set Rename a Security Set Copy a Security Set Add Groups to a Security Set Remove Groups from a Security Set Activate a Security Set Deactivate a Security Set All of these tasks except Activate a Security Set and Deactivate a Security Set require a Security Edit session Create a Security Set Enter the Securityset Create command to create a new security set as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt securityset create securityset_1l Delete a Security Set Enter the Securityset Delete command to delete a security set as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt securityset delete securityset_1l 9 10 59263 01 A XKX 9 Device Security Configuration QLOGIC Managing Security Sets a __ Rename a Security Set Enter the Securityset Rename command to rename a security set as shown in the following example SANbox admin security gt securityset rename se
264. nd the ENTER key to do so Current Values Level Alarm Format ShortText MaxSize 1000 EmailSubject Switch Problem RecipientEmail up to 10 entries allowed 1 john smith domain com New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit Level Alarm Critical Warn None Format 1 FullText 2 ShortText 3 Tscl 1 MaxSize decimal value 650 100000 EmailSubject string max 64 chars N None RecipientEmail ex admin company com N None 1 john smith domain com 2 lt undefined gt The profile has been edited This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHome database profiles will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 14 64 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Ps Tk Ps Displays current system process information Authority None Syntax ps Examples The following is an example of the Ps command SANbox gt ps PID PPID CPU MEM TIME ELAPSED COMMAND 244 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 04 2 03 02 31 cns 245 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 06 2 03 02 31 ens 246 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 09 2 03 02 31 dlog 247 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 33 2 03 02 31 ds 248 224 0 3 2 8 00 09 59 2 03 02 31 mgmtApp 249 224 0 0 0 3 00 00 16 2 03 02 31 sys2swlog 251 224 0 0 0 4 00 00 06 2 03 02 30 fc2 252 224 0 0 0 6 00 00 16 2 03 02 30 nserver 253 224 0 0
265. net Port 00 20 cece eee ee eee eee 4 2 IP Version 4 Configuration 0 000 c ee eee 4 2 IP Version 6 Configuration 0 0000 cee ee 4 4 DNS Server Configuration 22 5 scc228s0 eeen Heeenepiaw ere es 4 5 Verifying a Switch in the Network 0000 e eee eee 4 6 Managing IP SeCuntys 2ictvecacaxtesetadetawss Ges 4d40senSenase 4 6 IP Security CONCepis adcuyer etek hela ees Oe ds Medak anwek ead 4 7 59263 01 A Page iii SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide XX QLOGIC We Page iv Displaying IP Security Information Policy and Association Information IP Security Configuration History IP Security Configuration Limits Managing the Security Policy Database Creating a Policy 0005 Deleting a Policy n nnan auaa aaa Modifying a User Defined Policy Renaming a User Defined Policy Copying a POC sis teeabae eae ds baka Managing the Security Association Database Creating an Association Deleting an Association Modifying a User Defined Association Renaming a User Defined Association Copying an Association Resetting the IP Security Configuration Switch Configuration Displaying Switch Information Name Server Information 20005 Switch Operational Information System P
266. nfiguration Parameters Continued Parameter Description NTPClientEnabled Enables True or disables False the Network Time Pro tocol NTP client on the switch This client enables the switch to synchronize its time with an NTP server This feature supports NTP version 4 and is compatible with version 3 An Ethernet connection to the server is required and you must first set an initial time and date on the switch The synchronized time becomes effective immediately The default is False NTPServerAddress The IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the NTP server from which the NTP client acquires the time and date The default is 10 0 0 254 timers Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change the timer configuration parameters described in Table 14 36 To configure all system parameters omit the keyword For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value Table 14 36 Timer Configuration Parameters Parameter Description AdminTimeout Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before termi nating an idle Admin session Zero 0 disables the time out threshold The default is 30 the maximum is 1440 Inactivity Timeout Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before termi nating an idle Telnet command line interface session Zero 0 disables the time out threshold The default is 0 the maximum is 1440 14 126 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Comm
267. ng a Feature License Key Enter the Feature Add command to install a license key on your switch as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt feature add 1 LCVXOWUNOJBE6 License upgrade to 24 ports Do you want to continue with license upgrade procedure y n n y Alarm Msg day mon date time year A1005 0030 SM Upgrading Licensed Ports to 24 Managing Idle Session Timers 5 30 You can limit the duration of idle login sessions and idle Admin sessions Admin Start command You can specify limits up to 1 440 minutes specifying 0 means unlimited Idle login sessions that exceed the limit are logged off Inactivity Timeout An idle Admin session that exceeds the limit is ended but the login session may be maintained AdminTimeout By default no limit is enforced on idle login sessions idle Admin sessions are ended after 30 minutes Enter the Show Setup System Timers command to display the idle login and Admin session configuration as shown in the following example SANbox gt show setup system timers System Information AdminTimeout 30 InactivityTimeout 0 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 5 Switch Configuration Managing Idle Session Timers rT Enter the Set Setup System Timers command to configure idle login and Admin session limits as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set setup system timers A list of attributes with formatting and current values will
268. ng database Inactive zone sets are all zone sets except the active zone set The default is False 59263 01 A 14 99 14 Command Reference XX Set Config Zoning QLOGIC SLL Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Zoning command SANbox SANbox The SANbox A list gt admin start admin gt config edit config named default is being edited admin config gt set config zoning of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so MergeAutoSave True False True DefaultZone Allow Deny Allow DiscardInactive True False False Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 14 100 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Log Oe Set Log Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Specifies the events to record in the event log and display on the screen You determine what events to record in the switch event log using the Component Level and Port keywords You determine what events are automatically displayed on the screen using the Display keyword Alar
269. ning gt zoneset remove zoneset_1l zone_l zone_2 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Activate a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Activate command to apply zoning to the fabric as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoneset activate zoneset_l Deactivate a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Deactivate command to deactivate the active zone set and disable zoning in the fabric SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoneset deactivate Managing Zones Managing Zones consists of the following tasks Create a Zone Delete a Zone Rename a Zone Copy a Zone Add Members to a Zone Remove Members from a Zone All of these tasks require an Admin session and a Zoning Edit session 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration QLOGIC Managing Zones TO Create a Zone Enter the Zone Create command to create a new zone as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zone create zone_l SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Delete a Zone Enter the Zone Delete command to delete zone_1 from the zoning database as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zone delete zone_l SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Rename a Zone Enter the Zon
270. nished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 59263 01 A 14 93 14 Command Reference XX Set Config Security Portbinding LOGIC E ee Set Config Security Portbinding Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 14 94 Configures port binding Admin session and a Config Edit session set config security portbinding port_number port_number Initiates an editing session in which to change the port binding configuration for the port given by port_number The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Enter q or Q to end the editing session Table 14 21 describes the Set Config Security Portbinding parameters Table 14 21 Port Binding Configuration Parameters Parameter Description PortBindingEnabled Enables True or disables False port binding for the port given by port_number WWN Worldwide port name for the port device that is allowed to connect to the port given by port_number The following is an example of the Set Config Security Portbinding command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin config edit SANbox admin config gt set config security portbinding 1 A list of attr
271. nistrative state E Online Activates and prepares the ports to send data This is the default E Offline Prevents the ports from receiving signal and accepting a device login Diagnostics Prepares the ports for testing and prevents the ports from accepting a device login m Down Disables the ports by removing power from the port lasers BroadcastEnabled Broadcast Enables True or disables False forwarding of broadcast frames The default is True InbandEnabled Inband management Enables True or disables False the ability to manage the switch over an ISL The default is True FDMlEnabled Fabric Device Monitoring Interface Enables True or dis ables False the monitoring of target and initiator device information The default is True FDMleEntries The number of device entries to maintain in the FDMI data base Enter a number from 0 1000 The default is 1000 DefaultDomainID Default domain ID The default is 1 Domain IDLock Prevents True or allows False dynamic reassignment of the domain ID The default is False SymbolicName Descriptive name for the switch The name can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is SANbox 59263 01 A 14 95 14 Command Reference XKX Set Config Switch QLOGIC See Table 14 22 Switch Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Description R_A_TOV Resource Allocation Timeout Value The number of mi
272. nt of the active zone set the zone will not be removed from the active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes list Displays a list of all zones and the zone sets of which they are components This keyword does not require an Admin session members zone Displays all members of the zone given by zone This keyword does not require an Admin session orphans Displays a list of zones that are not members of any zone set remove zone member _list Removes the ports devices given by member_list from the zone given by zone Use a lt space gt to delimit aliases and ports devices in member_list member_list can have any of the following formats Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex m 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX m Alias name You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes rename zone_old zone_new Renames the zone given by zone_old to the zone given by zone_new You must enter the Zoning Save command afterwards to save your changes zonesets zone Displays all zone sets of which the zone given by Zone is a component This keyword does not require an Admin session 14 206 59263 01 A XX 14 Command
273. ntries Table 14 42 Show Version Display Entries Entry Description SystemDescription HostName EthIPv4NetworkAddress EthIPv6NetworkAddress MacAddress WorldWideName ChassisSerialNumber SymbolicName ActiveSWVersion ActiveTimestamp POSTStatus LicensedPorts SwitchMode Switch system description DNS host name Switch IP address version 4 Switch IP address version 6 Switch MAC address Switch worldwide name Switch serial number Switch symbolic name Firmware version Date and time that the firmware was activated Results of the Power on Self Test Number of licensed ports Full Fabric indicates that the switch operates with the standard Fibre Channel port types G GL F FL E 14 189 14 Command Reference Show Version XX QLOGIC hrc Examples SANbox gt show version The following is an example of the Show Version command KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKKAK Command Line Interface SHell CLISH KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKK KKK KK KK SystemDescription HostName EthIPv4NetworkAddress EthIPv6NetworkAddress MACAddress WorldWideName ChassisSerialNumber SymbolicName ActiveSWVersion ActiveTimestamp POSTStatus LicensedPorts SwitchMode SANbox 5802V FC Switch lt undefined gt 10 20 11 192 00 c0 dd 00 71 ee 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 7l ed 033100024 SANbox V7 4 X X XX XX day
274. nts other accounts from making changes at the same time either through the CLI QuickTools or Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 You must also open a Config Edit session with the Config Edit command and indicate which configuration you want to modify If you do not specify a configuration name the active configuration is assumed The Config Edit session provides access to the Set Config Security command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config security A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so FabricBindingEnabled True False False AutoSave True False True Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command SANbox admin config gt config save SANbox admin gt config activate SANbox admin gt admin end 9 8 59263 01 A XKX 9 Device Security Configuration QLOGIC Modifying the Security Database a Modifying the Security Database To modify the security database you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command
275. o configure all system parameters omit the keyword For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value Table 14 31 DNS Host Name Configuration Parameters Parameter Description DNSClientEnabled Enables True or disables False the DNS client DNSLocalHostname Name of local DNS server DNSServerDiscovery DNS server boot method 1 Static 2 DHCP 3 DHCP version 6 The default is 1 Static DNSServer1 Address IP addresses version 4 or 6 of up to three DNS serv DNSServer2Address ers DNSServer3Address DNSSearchListDiscovery DNS search list discovery method E Static m DHCP for IP version 4 m DHCP for IP version 6 DNSSearchList1 A suffix that is appended to unqualified host names to DNSSearchList2 extend the DNS search You can specify up to five searchlists or suffixes DNSSearchList3 DNSSearchList4 DNSSearchList5 59263 01 A 14 123 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup System LOGIC ee 14 124 ipv4 Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change the switch IPv4 Ethernet configuration parameters described in Table 14 32 To configure all system parameters omit the keyword For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value NOTE Changing the IP address will terminate all Ethernet management sessions Table 14 32 IP Version 4 Ethernet Configuration Parameters Entry Description EthIPv4NetworkEnable Enable
276. o port binding entries found 59263 01 A 14 141 14 Command Reference XX Show Config Switch QLOGIC e sO Show Config Switch Displays the switch configuration parameters Authority None Syntax show config switch Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Switch command SANbox gt show config switch Configuration Name default AdminState Online BroadcastEnabled False InbandEnabled True FDMIEnabled False FDMIEntries 10 DefaultDomainID 19 0x13 DomainIDLock True SymbolicName swl08 R_A_TOV 10000 E_D_TOV 2000 PrincipalPriority 254 ConfigDescription Default Config ConfigLastSavedBy admin OB session5 ConfigLastSavedOn day month date time year InteropMode Standard 14 142 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Config Threshold I Show Config Threshold Displays alarm threshold parameters for the switch Authority None Syntax show config threshold Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Threshold command SANbox gt show config threshold Configuration Name default ThresholdMonitoringEnabled False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 25 FallingTrigger SampleWindow 0 DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 25 FallingTrigger 0 SampleWindow 0 ISLMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 2 FallingTrigger 0 SampleWindow 0 LoginMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 5 FallingTrigger SampleWindow 0 LogoutMonitoringEnabled True
277. ocal TotalServers 2 Server 1 ServerIPAddress 10 0 0 13 ServerUDPPort 1812 DeviceAuthServer False UserAuthServer False AccountingServer False Timeout 2 Retries 0 SignPackets False Secret KKK KKK KK Server 2 ServerIPAddress bacd 1234 bacd 1234 bacd 1234 bacd 1234 ServerUDPPort 1812 DeviceAuthServer True UserAuthServer True AccountingServer True Timeout 2 Retries 0 SignPackets False Secret KKK KK KKK 10 2 59263 01 A XKX 10 RADIUS Server Configuration QLOGIC Configuring a RADIUS Server on the Switch OO a Configuring a RADIUS Server on the Switch Enter the Set Setup Radius command to configure a RADIUS server on the switch There are two groups of RADIUS configuration parameters One group of parameters is common to all RADIUS server configurations The second group is server specific You can configure both groups of parameters for all RADIUS servers or you can configure the common and server specific parameters separately Refer to Table 14 26 for a description of the common and server specific RADIUS configuration parameters The following example configures the common RADIUS server configuration parameters SANbox admin gt set setup radius common A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the attributes for the server being p
278. ocess before reaching the end of the attributes for the server being processed press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so If you wish to terminate the configuration process completely press qq or Q and the ENTER key to so do PLEASE NOTE SSL must be enabled in order to configure RADIUS User Authentication SSL can be enabled using the set setup services command Server 1 Current Values ServerIPAddress 10 20 11 8 ServerUDPPort 1812 DeviceAuthServer True UserAuthServer True AccountingServer False Timeout 10 Retries 0 SignPackets False Secret KKKK KKK KKK New Server 1 Value press ENTER to accept current value q to skip ServerIPAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 address ServerUDPPort decimal value DeviceAuthServer True False UserAuthServer True False AccountingServer True False Timeout decimal value 10 30 secs i Retries decimal value 1 3 0 None SignPackets True False Secret 1 63 characters recommend 22 3 Do you want to save and activate this radius setup y n n 59263 01 A 14 115 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup Services QLOGIC ee Set Setup Services Configures services on the switch Authority Admin session Syntax set setup services This command prompts you in a line by line fashion to enable or disable switch services Table 14 28 describes the switch service parameters For each parameter enter a new value or press the Ente
279. ode name to the logged in NL_Port The default is True Automatic performance tuning for FL_Ports only The default is True E f AutoPerfTfuning is enabled True and the port is an FL_Port MFSEnable is automatically enabled LCFEn able and VlEnable are overridden to False m f AutoPerfTuning is disabled False MFSEnable LCFEnable and VlEnable retain their original values Link control frame preference routing This parameter appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False Enables True or disables False preferred routing of frames with R_CTL 1100 Class 2 responses The default is False Enabling LCFEnable will disable MFSEnable Multi Frame Sequence bundling This parameter appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False Prevents True or allows False the interleaving of frames in a sequence The default is False Enabling MFSEnable disables LCFEnable and VlEnable Virtual Interface VI preference routing This parameter appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False Enables True or disables False VI preference routing The default is False Enabling ViEnable will disable MFSEnable Management server enable Enables True or disables False management server on this port The default is True Loop circuit closure prevention Enables True or disables False the loop s ability to remain in the open state indefi nitely True reduces the amount of arbitration on a loop when there is only one device on the loop The default i
280. ollowing example SANbox gt securityset list Current list of SecuritySets alpha beta 9 2 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 9 Device Security Configuration Displaying Security Database Information _ Enter the Security List command to display all security sets groups and group members in the security database as shown in the following example SANbox gt security list Active Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember No active securityset defined Configured Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember groupl ISL 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 16 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret RE RIS Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret ERED EE Binding 0 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 17 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret KERRAN Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret ENESESSE Binding 0 59263 01 A 9 3 9 Device Security Configuration AK Displaying Security Database Information QLOGIC E ee Active Security Set Information The Security Active and Securityset Active commands display information about the active security set Enter the Security Active command to display component groups and group members as shown in the following example SANbox gt security active Active Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember groupl ISL 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 16 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret BERD Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret
281. ollowing is an example of the Fcping command SANbox gt fcping 970400 count 3 28 bytes from local switch to 0x970400 time 10 usec 28 bytes from local switch to 0x970400 time 11 usec 28 bytes from local switch to 0x970400 time 119 usec 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Fctrace Fctrace NOTE This command requires the SANdoctor license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Use the Feature command to install a license key Displays the path from an initiator device port in the fabric to a target device port in the same zone To trace the path between two initiator ports you must disable the I O StreamGuard feature Use the Set Config Port command to change the lOStreamGuard parameter Path information includes the following a Domain IDs E Inbound port name and physical port number m Outbound port name and physical port number Authority None Syntax fctrace port_source port_destination hop_count Keywords _ port_source The Fibre Channel port from to begin the trace port_source can have the following formats m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex Enter addresses with or without the Ox prefix m 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XX IXX IXX XXIXXIXXIXX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX port_destination The Fibre Channel port at which to end the trace port_destination
282. ommand 14 166 example 6 3 Show Post Log command 14 171 Show Setup Callhome command 14 172 example 12 6 Show Setup Mfg command 14 173 Show Setup Radius command 14 174 example 10 2 Show Setup Services command 14 175 example 5 10 SSL and SSH example 8 3 Show Setup SNMP command 14 176 example 13 3 Index 9 SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide XX QLOGIC ee Show Setup System command 14 177 example 4 2 Show Steering command 14 180 Show Switch command 14 181 Show System command 14 184 Show Test Log command 14 185 Show Timezone command 14 186 Show Topology command 14 187 Show Users command 14 188 Show Version command 14 189 example 5 9 Shutdown command 14 191 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server 12 16 Simple Network Management Protocol configuration 13 1 14 119 configuration display 14 176 information 13 3 modify configuration 13 4 reset 14 68 reset configuration 13 5 service 13 2 14 117 user account 13 7 version 3 13 4 13 6 14 192 SMI S See Storage Management Initiative Specification Snmpv3user command 14 192 soft reset 5 20 zone 7 1 SSH See Secure Shell SSL See Secure Socket Layer Storage Management Initiative Specification 14 117 subnet mask 4 1 support file 14 17 create 2 6 download 2 7 upload 2 8 Index 10 switch administrative state 14 131 configuration 5 1 5 12 14 95 configuration defaults 14 70 configuration display 14 142 configuration parameters 5 6 5
283. on and encryption over the network SNMP version 3 provides the following security features m Message integrity ensures that packets have not been altered m Authentication ensures that the packet is coming from a valid source Em 6Encryption ensures that packet contents cannot be read by an unauthorized source To configure SNMP version 3 you must enable SNMP version 3 on the switch and create one or more SNMP version 3 user accounts To enable SNMP version 3 enter the Set Setup SNMP Common command and set the SNMPv3Enabled parameter to True SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set setup snmp common A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values SnmpEnabled True Contact lt sysContact undefined gt Location lt sysLocation undefined gt ReadCommunity public WriteCommunity private AuthFailureTrap False ProxyEnabled True SNMPv3Enabled False New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit SnmpEnabled True False Contact string max 64 chars Location string max 64 chars ReadCommunity string max 32 chars WriteCommunity string max 32 chars AuthFailureTrap True False ProxyEnabled True False SNMPv3Enabled True False ie Do you want to sa
284. one set as shown in the following example SANbox gt zoneset zones ssss Current List of Zones for ZoneSet ssss Enter the Zone List command to display the zones and the zone sets to which they belong as shown in the following example SANbox gt zone list Zone Zoneset wwn_b0241f zone_set_l wwn_23bd31 zone_set_l wwn_221416 zone_set_2 wwn_2215c3 zone_set_2 wwn_0160ed zone_set_3 Enter the Zone Zonesets command to display the zone sets for which a specified zone is a member as shown in the following example SANbox gt zone zonesets zonel Current List of ZoneSets for Zone zonel zone_set_l 7 6 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Zoning Database Information OO OOOO Zone Membership Information Enter the Zone Members command to display the members for a specified zone as shown in the following example SANbox gt zone members wwn_b0241f Current List of Members for Zone wwn_b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 SO 06T04 82ibtrd2 116 1d2 21 00 00 e0 8b 02 41 2f Orphan Zone Information Enter the Zone Orphans command to display a list of zones that are not members of any zone set as shown in the following example SANbox gt zone orphans Current list of orphan zones zone3 zone4 Alias and Alias Membership Information The Alias List and Alias Members commands display information about aliases Enter the Alias List command to display a list of all
285. onf images bin 200 Type set to I put dump_support tgz local dump_support tgz remote dump_support tgz 227 Entering Passive Mode 10 20 33 130 232 133 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for dump_support tgz 226 Transfer complete 43430 bytes sent in 0 292 secs 1 5e 02 Kbytes sec Remote system type is UNIX Using binary mode to transfer files 221 You have transferred 43430 bytes in 1 files 221 Total traffic for this session was 43888 bytes in 1 transfers 221 Thank you for using the FTP service on localhost localdomain 2 6 59263 01 A XC 2 Command Line Interface Usage LOGIC Downloading and Uploading Files al If your workstation does not have an FTP server enter the Create Support command to create the support file and then use FTP to download the support file from the switch to your workstation as shown in the following example SANbox gt create support Log Msg Creating the support file this will take several seconds FIP the dump support file to another machine y n n To download the support file from the switch to the workstation do the following 1 Open a terminal window and move to the directory where you want to download the support file 2 Enter the FTP command and the switch IP address or symbolic name gt ftp 10 0 0 1 3 When prompted for a user and password enter the FTP account name and password images images user images password images 4 Set binary
286. onverts the current time to the time in the new time zone For this reason if you are not using an NTP server set the time zone first then set the date and time See the following date and time management examples m Displaying the Date and Time m Setting the Date and Time Explicitly H Setting the Date and Time through NTP Displaying the Date and Time Enter the Date command to display the date and time as shown in the following example SANbox gt date Mon Apr 07 07 51 24 200x 59263 01 A 5 17 5 Switch Configuration XKX Setting the Date and Time QLOGIC SS Setting the Date and Time Explicitly To set the switch date and time explicitly use the Set Timezone and Date commands To change the time zone to America North Dakota for example enter the Set Timezone command in an Admin session as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set timezone Africa America Antarctica Asia Atlantic Australia Europe Indian Pacific UTC Press ENTER for more options or q to make a selection America Grenada America Guadeloupe America Guatemala America Guayaquil America Guyana America Halifax America Havana America Hermosillo America Indiana America Indianapolis America Monterrey America Montevideo America Montreal America Montserrat America Nassau America New_York America Nipigon America Nome America Noronha America North_Dakota America Panama America Pangnirtung Press ENTER for m
287. or Default Default StopOnError True False True LoopForever True False False Do you want to start the test y n n y When the test is complete remember to place the switch back online The switch resets when it leaves the diagnostics state SANbox admin gt set switch state online 5 26 59263 01 A xX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Testing a Switch OO Connectivity Tests for Switches A connectivity test is a disruptive test that exercises all port and inter port connections for a switch in the diagnostics state You must place the switch in the diagnostics state using the Set Switch State command before starting the test There are two types of connectivity test internal loopback and external loopback m An internal loopback test exercises all internal port and inter port connections m An external loopback test exercises all internal port transceiver and inter port connections A transceiver with a loopback plug is required for all ports The following example performs a connectivity internal test on a switch SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set switch state diagnostics SANbox admin gt test switch connectivity internal A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER k
288. ore options or q to make a selection Enter selection or q to quit america north_dakota America North_Dakota Center Enter selection or q to quit america north_dakota center To set the date and time January 31 10 15 AM 2008 enter the date command as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt date 013110152008 SANbox admin gt date Thu Jan 31 10 15 03 america north_dakota center 2008 5 18 59263 01 A xX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Setting the Date and Time rT Setting the Date and Time through NTP An NTP server can automatically set the switch date and time To configure the switch to use an NTP server enter the Set Setup System Ntp command in an Admin session to enable the NTP client on the switch and specify the NPT server IP address as shown in the following example SANbox admin gt set setup system ntp A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values NTPClientEnabled False NTPServerDiscovery Static NTPServerAddress 10 20 10 10 New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit n for none NTPClientEnabled True False True NTPServerDiscovery 1 Static 2 Dhcp 3 Dhcpv6 NTPServerAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Ad
289. ore reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Required attributes are preceded by an asterisk Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit Description string value 0 127 bytes Host to host switch gt host SourceAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address fe80 2c0 ddff fe03 d4cl DestinationAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address fe80 250 daff feb7 9d02 Protocol l esp 2 esp old 3 ah 4 ah old 2 ub SPI decimal value 256 4294967295 s 333 Authentication select an authentication algorithm 1 hmac md5 16 byte key 2 hmac shal 20 byte key 3 hmac sha256 32 byte key 4 aes xcbc mac 16 byte key authentication algorithm choice 2 AuthenticationKey quoted string or raw hex bytes gt 12345678901234567890 Encryption select an encryption algorithm 1 des cbc 8 byte key 2 3des cbc 24 byte key 3 null 0 byte key 4 blowfish cbc 5 56 byte key 5 aes cbc 16 24 32 byte key 6 twofish cbc 16 32 byte key encryption algorithm choice 2 EncryptionKey quoted string or raw hex bytes 123456789012345678901234 The security association has been created This configuration must be saved with the ipsec save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the ipsec cancel command 59263 01 A 4 15 4 Network Configuration AK Managing IP Security QLOGIC ee Deleting an Association To delete a user defined association enter
290. ored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a switch configuration Authority Admin session Syntax set switch state state Keywords state state can be one of the following online Activates and prepares the ports to send data This is the default offline Prevents the ports from receiving signal and accepting a device login diagnostics Prepares the ports for testing and prevents each port from accepting a device login When you leave the diagnostics state the switch automatically resets Examples The following is an example of the Set Switch command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set switch state offline 59263 01 A 14 131 14 Command Reference Set Timezone XX QLOGIC ne Set Timezone Specifies the time zone for the switch and the workstation The default is Universal Time UTC also known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT This keyword prompts you to choose a region then a subregion to specify the time zone Changing the time zone converts the currently displayed time to the time in the new time zone Authority Syntax Examples Admin session set timezone The following is an example of the Set Timezone command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set timezone Africa Antarctica Atlantic Europe Pacific Press ENTER for more options or America Grenada America Guatemala America Guyana America Havana America Indiana America Monterrey America Montreal Am
291. p Closes the Admin session The Hardreset Hotreset Quit Shutdown and Reset Switch commands will also end an Admin session cancel Terminates an Admin session opened by another user Use this keyword with care because it terminates the Admin session without warning the other user and without saving pending changes Notes Closing a Telnet window during an Admin session does not release the session In this case you must either wait for the Admin session to time out or use the Admin Cancel command Examples The following example shows how to open and close an Admin session SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt SANbox admin gt admin end 59263 01 A 14 3 14 Command Reference XX Alias QLOGIC CS Alias Authority Syntax Keywords 14 4 Creates a named set of ports devices Aliases make it easier to assign a set of ports devices to many zones An alias can not have a zone or another alias as a member Admin session and Zoning Edit session for all keywords except List and Members alias add alias member _list copy alias_source alias_destination create alias delete alias list members alias remove alias member _list rename alias_old alias_new add alias member_list Specifies one or more ports devices given by member _list to add to the alias named alias Use a lt space gt to delimit ports devices in member _list An alias can have a maximum of 2000 members
292. paces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for ports 0 15 Press any key to stop the display inbyte port_list Displays continuous performance data in bytes second received for the ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for ports 0 15 Press any key to stop the display 59263 01 A 14 163 14 Command Reference XX Show Perf LOGIC a outbyte port_list Displays continuous performance data in bytes second transmitted for the ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for ports 0 15 Press any key to stop the display frame port_list Displays continuous performance data in total frames second transmitted and received for the ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for ports 0 15 Press any key to stop the display inframe port_list Display
293. page 14 77 for information about starting a Security Edit session The Active Groups and List keywords are available without an Admin session You must close the Security Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate keywords securityset activate security_set active add security_set group_list copy security_set_source security_set_destination create Security_set deactivate delete security_set groups security_set list remove security_set group rename security_set_old Security_set_new activate security_set Activates the security set given by security_set and deactivates the currently active security set Close the Security Edit session using the Security Save or Security Cancel command before using this keyword active Displays the name of the active security set This keyword is available to without an Admin session add security_set group_list Adds one or more groups given by group _list to the security set given by security_set Use a lt space gt to delimit multiple group names in group_list A security set can have a maximum of three groups but no more than one group of each group type 14 81 14 Command Reference XX Securityset QLOGIC E copy security_set_source security_set_destination Creates a new security set named security_set_destination and copies into it the membership from the security set given by security_set_source create security_set
294. ple of the Zoneset List command SANbox gt zoneset list Current List of ZoneSets The following is an example of the Zoneset Zones command SANbox gt zoneset zones ssss Current List of Zones for ZoneSet ssss 14 210 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Zoning Active ee Zoning Active Displays information for the active zone set or saves the active zone set to the non volatile zoning database Authority Admin session for the Capture keyword Syntax zoning active capture Keywords capture Saves the active zone set to the non volatile zoning data base Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Active command SANbox gt zoning active Active enforced ZoneSet Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn_b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 21 00 00 e0 8b 02 41 2f wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10200200200 2c92 23 bd231 wwn_221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn_2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 102007002002c9 22 152 3 The following is an example of the Zoning Active Capture command SANbox admin gt zoning active capture This command will overwrite the configured zoning database in NVRAM Please confirm y n n y The active zoning database has been saved 59263 01 A 14 211 14 Command Reference pa Zoning Cancel QLOGIC ee Zoning Canc
295. port cancel copy config_source config_destination delete config_name edit config_name export account_name ip address file_name import account_name ip address file_name list restore import save config_name activate config_name Activates the configuration given by config_name If you omit config_name the currently active configuration is used Only one configuration can be active ata time backup export Creates a file named configdata which contains the system configuration information This keyword does not require an Admin session Configuration backup files are deleted from the switch during a power cycle or switch reset The optional Export keyword creates the configuration backup file and exports it to a remote server prompting you for the server an account name the server IP address or DNS host name destination file name and a password if the server requires one cancel Terminates the current configuration edit session without saving changes that were made copy config_source config_destination Copies the configuration given by config_source to the configuration given by config_destination The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration 14 13 14 Command Reference XX Config LOGIC P delete config_name Deletes the configuration given by config_name from the switch You cannot delete the default configuration Default Config nor the
296. psEnabled True New Value press ENTER to accept current value q to quit PrimarySMTPServerAddr IPv4 IPv6 or hostname PrimarySMTPServerPort decimal value PrimarySMTPServerEnable True False SecondarySMTPServerAddr IPv4 IPv6 or hostname SecondarySMTPServerPort decimal value SecondarySMTPServerEanble True False ContactEmailAddress ex admin company com PhoneNumber ex 1 800 123 4567 StreetAddress include all address info FromEmailAddress ex bldg3 company com ReplyToEmailAddress ex admin3 company com ThrottleDupsEnabled True False Do you want to save and activate this Callhome setup y n 59263 01 A 14 111 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup Radius QLOGIC E CO O C CYCNNCNOW TOOUUO Set Setup Radius Authority Syntax Keywords 14 112 NOTE This command requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller Use the Feature command to install a license key Configures RADIUS servers on the switch Admin session set setup radius common server server _number common Prompts you in a line by line fashion to configure parameters that are common to all RADIUS servers To configure common and specific RADIUS server parameters omit the keyword Table 14 26 describes the common RADIUS configuration parameters Table 14 26 Common RADIUS Configuration Parameters Parameter D
297. pts A O Call Home Messages The Call Home service generates email messages for the specified event severity level and the following switch actions Switch comes online Switch goes offline Reboot Power up Power down SFP failure When a qualifying switch action or event occurs an email message is created and placed in the Call Home queue to be sent to the active SMTP server You can monitor activity in the queue using the Callhome Queue Stats command You can also clear the queue of email messages using the Callhome Queue Clear command There are three email message formats full text short text and Tsc1 The full text format contains the switch and event information plus the contact information from the Call Home profile and SNMP configurations The short text and Tsc1 formats contains basic switch and event information Tsc1 is formatted for automated parsing The following is an example of a short text email From john doe qlogic com mailto john doe qlogic com Sent Wednesday July 25 2007 5 03 PM Subject CallHome Test Alarm generated on Switch_8 SwitchName Switch_8_83 215 SwitchIP 10 20 30 40 SwitchWWN 102002002 cOiddi0cr66 2 Level Alarm Text CALLHOME TEST PROFILE MESSAGE ID 8B00 0002 Time Wed Jul 25 17 02 40 343 CDT 2007 If the switch is forced to power down before the message is sent to the SMTP server no message will be transmitted 59263 01 A 12 3 12 Call Home Configuration AK
298. r LinkFailures BadFrames Login BBCR_FrameFailures Logout BBCR_RRDYFailures LongFramesiIn Class2FramesiIn LoopTimeouts Class2FramesOut LossOfSync Class2WordsIn LostFrames Class2WordsOut LostRRDYs Class3FramesIn PrimSeqErrors Class3FramesOut RxLinkResets o oc oo Sc co coc oc NN CoS O ce occ oe ee oe eB elle el eS G Class3Toss RxOfflineSeq Class3WordsIn ShortFramesIn Class3WordsOut TotalErrors DecodeErrors TotalLinkResets EpConnects TotalLIPsRecvd FBusy TotalLIPsxXmitd FlowErrors TotalofflineSeq FReject TotalRxFrames InvalidCRC TotalRxWords InvalidDestAddr TotalTxFrames LIP_AL_PD_AL_PS TotalTxWords LIP_F7_AL_PS TxLinkResets LIP_F7_F7 TxOfflineSeq lm OO OS oO oO co O Oo O co CO GC CO co CO Oo Cc ao O a a H LIP_F8_AL_PS 14 170 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Postlog re Show Postlog Displays the Power On Self Test POST log which contains results from the most recently failed POST Authority None Syntax show postlog or show port log Examples SANbox gt show postlog Queue Sequence Count Success Count Failed Count Records Record Time Sequence Number Consecutive Passes Record Time Sequence Number Test Subtest Fault Code Loops Blade Asic Register Address Received Data Expected Data The following is an example of the Show Postlog command POST 467 452 42 53 1 of 53 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy
299. r True Timeout 2 Retries 0 SignPackets False Secret KKK KKK RK 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Setup Services aaa O kaaa Show Setup Services Displays switch service status information Authority None Syntax show setup services Examples The following is an example of the Show Setup Services command SANbox gt show setup services System Services TelnetEnabled True SSHEnabled False GUIMgmtEnabled True SSLEnabled False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True SNMPEnabled True NTPEnabled True CIMEnabled True FTPEnabled True Mgmt ServerEnabled True CallHomeEnabled True 59263 01 A 14 175 14 Command Reference XX Show Setup Snmp LOGIC ee Show Setup Snmp Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 14 176 Displays the current SNMP settings None show setup snmp common trap common Displays SNMP configuration parameters that are common to all traps To display common and trap specific parameters omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 29 for descriptions of the common configuration parameters trap Displays trap specific SNMP configuration parameters To display common and trap specific parameters omit the keyword Refer to Table 14 30 for descriptions of the trap specific configuration parameters The following is an example of the Show Setup Snmp Common command SANbox gt show setup snmp common SNMP Information SNMPEnabled True Contact lt sysContact undefined gt
300. r key to accept the current value shown in brackets NOTE Disabling TelnetEnabled or GUIMgmtEnabled will immediately terminate the current Telnet or switch management session Disable services with caution itis possible to disable all Ethernet access to the switch Table 14 28 Switch Services Settings Entry Description TelnetEnabled Enables True or disables False the ability to manage the switch over a Telnet connection Disabling this service is not recommended The default is True SSHEnabled Enables True or disables False Secure Shell SSH con nections to the switch SSH secures the remote connection to the switch To establish a secure remote connection your workstation must use an SSH client The default is False The SSH service requires the Fabric Security license key To purchase a license key contact your authorized maintenance provider or authorized reseller GUIMgmtEnabled Enables True or disables False out of band management of the switch with Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 and the Appli cation Programming Interface If this service is disabled the switch can only be managed inband or through the serial port The default is True 14 116 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Setup Services TOO rr Table 14 28 Switch Services Settings Continued Entry Description SSLEnabled EmbeddedGUlEnabled SNMP Enabled NTPEnabled CIMEnabled FTPEnabled
301. rComponent NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp The following is an example of the Show Log Level command SANbox gt show log level Current settings for log FilterLevel Info DisplayLevel Critical The following is an example of the Show Log Options command SANbox gt show log options Allowed options for log FilterComponent All None NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp CLI Qfs FilterLevel Critical Warn Info None DisplayLevel Critical Warn Info None 14 152 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Log rT The following is an example of the Show Log command SANbox gt show log 327 day month date E_AO_GET_DOMAIN_ID 328 day month date 329 day month date 330 day month date 331 day month date 332 day month date len 0x30 333 day month date 334 day month date 335 day month date time time time time time time time time time year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport Port 0 8 Eport State Port Port Port Port Ports Port POTET Port 0 8 FSPF PortUp state 0 0 8 Sending init hello 0 8 Processing EFP oxid 0x8 0 8 Eport State E_A2_IDLE 0 8 EFP WWN 0x100000c0dd00b845 0 8 Sending LSU oxid 0xc type 1 0 8 Send Zone Merge Request 0 8
302. rIPAddress 10 20 11 8 ServerUDPPort 1812 DeviceAuthServer True UserAuthServer True AccountingServer False Timeout 10 Retries 0 SignPackets False Secret KKKK KKK KKK New Server 1 Value press ENTER to accept current value q to skip ServerIPAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 address ServerUDPPort decimal value DeviceAuthServer True False UserAuthServer True False AccountingServer True False Timeout decimal value 10 30 secs i Retries decimal value 1 3 0 None SignPackets True False Secret 1 63 characters recommend 22 3 Do you want to save and activate this radius setup y n n 10 4 59263 01 A XX o Relc leq 17 Event Log Configuration This section describes the following tasks Starting and Stopping Event Logging Displaying the Event Log Managing the Event Log Configuration Clearing the Event Log Logging to a Remote Host Creating and Downloading a Log File Event messages originate from the switch or from the management application in response to events that occur in the fabric Refer to the SANbox Fibre Channel Switch Event Message Guide for a complete listing of switch event messages Events are classified by the following severity levels m Alarm The alarm level describes events that are disruptive to the administration or operation of a fabric and require administrator intervention Alarms are always logged and always displayed on the scre
303. ration Name default Port Number 3 AdminState Offline LinkSpeed Auto PortType GL SymbolicName Port3 ALFairness False DeviceScanEnabled True ForceOfflineRSCN False ARB_FF False InteropCredit 0 ExtCredit 0 FANEnabled True AutoPerfTuning False LCFEnabled False MFSEnabled True ViIEnabled False MSEnabled True NoClose False T1OStreamGuard Disabled PDISCPingEnable True 6 2 59263 01 A XKX 6 Port Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Port Information 00 0 0 Port Operational Information Enter the Show Port command to display port operational information SANbox gt show port 1 Port Number 1 AdminState Online OperationalState Offline AsicNumber 0 PerfTuningMode Normal AsicPort 2 PortID 3a0100 ConfigType GL Port WWN 20 01 00 c0 dd 0d 4f 08 POSTFaultCode 00000000 RunningType Unknown POSTStatus Passed MediaPartNumber FTLF8528P2BCV DownstreamISL False MediaRevision A EpConnState None MediaType 800 MX SN S EpIsoReason NotApplicable MediaVendor FINISAR CORP T1OStreamGuard Disabled MediaVendorID 00009065 Licensed True SymbolicName Portl LinkSpeed Auto SyncStatus SyncLost LinkState Inactive TestFaultCode 00000000 LoginStatus NotLoggediIn TestStatus NeverRun MaxCredit 16 UpstreamISL False MediaSpeeds 2Gb s 4Gb s 8Gb s XmitterEnabled True ALInit 1 LIP_F8_F7 0 ALInitError 0 LinkFailures 0 BadFrames 0 Login 0 BBCR_FrameFailures 0 Logout 0 BBCR_RRDYFailures 0 LongFramesiIn 0 Class2FramesiIn 0 Loop
304. ration file system error 5 Overheating Five blink cluster Over temperature 5 8 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 5 Switch Configuration Displaying Switch Information CTO Firmware Information Enter the Show Version command to display a summary of switch identity information including the firmware version The following is an example of the Show Version command SANbox gt show version KKEKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK EK im Command Line Interface SHell CLISH x KKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KE SystemDescription HostName EthIPv4NetworkAddress EthIPv6NetworkAddress MACAddress WorldWideName ChassisSerialNumber SymbolicName ActiveSWVersion ActiveTimestamp POSTStatus LicensedPorts SwitchMode SANbox 5802V FC Switch lt undefined gt 10 20 11 192 00 c0 dd 00 71l ee 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 7l ed 033100024 SANbox V7 4 X X XX XX day month date time year Passed 24 Full Fabric 59263 01 A 5 9 5 Switch Configuration AK Managing Switch Services QLOGIC ee Managing Switch Services You can configure your switch to suit the demands of your environment by enabling or disabling a variety of switch services You manage the switch services using the Show Setup Services and Set Setup Services commands Refer to Table 14 28 for a description of the switch services NOTE The SSH and SSL servic
305. rations If you omit the profile keyword the command lists the profile names queue option Clears the Call Home e mail queue or displays Call Home e mail queue statistics depending on the value of option option can be one of the following clear Clears the Call Home e mail queue stats Displays Call Home e mail queue statistics Statistics include the number of e mail messages in the queue and the amount of file system space in use save Saves changes made during the current Callhome Edit session test profile profile Tests the Call Home profile given by profile 59263 01 A 14 7 14 Command Reference Callhome XX QLOGIC E ee Examples The following is an example of the Callhome History command SANbox gt callhome history CallHome Database History ConfigurationLastEditedBy ConfigurationLastEditedOn DatabaseChecksum ProfileName ProfileLevel ProcessedCount ProcessedLast ProfileName ProfileLevel ProcessedCount ProcessedLast The following is an example of the Callhome List command SANbox gt callhome list Configured Profiles group4 group5 admin OB session2 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy 000014a3 group4 Warn 286 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy group5 Alarm 25 day mmm dd hh mm ss yyyy 14 8 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Callhome ls The following is an example of the Callhome List Profile command SANbox gt callhome list profile ProfileNam
306. re on one switch wait two minutes after the activation is complete before installing firmware on a second switch Ports that change states during the non disruptive activation will be reset When the non disruptive activation is complete Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 and QuickTools sessions reconnect automatically However Telnet sessions must be restarted manually NOTE After upgrading firmware that includes changes to QuickTools a QuickTools session that was open during the upgrade may indicate that the new firmware is not supported To correct this close the QuickTools session and the browser window then open a new QuickTools session 59263 01 A 5 21 5 Switch Configuration AK Installing Firmware QLOGIC Fee One Step Firmware Installation The Firmware Install and Image Install commands download the firmware image file from an FTP or TFTP server to the switch unpacks the image file and performs a disruptive activation in one step The one step installation process prompts you to enter the following _ 5 22 The file transfer protocol FTP or TFTP IP address of the remote host An account name and password on the remote host FTP only Pathname for the firmware image file Enter the following commands to download the firmware from a remote host to the switch install the firmware then reset the switch to activate the firmware SANbox gt admin start SANbox gt firmware install The switch will
307. rimary server is active The switch will reroute Call Home e mail messages to the secondary SMTP server if the primary should become unavailable Primary and secondary identities do not change upon transfer of control Callhome profiles determine the events conditions and e mail recipients of Call Home e mail messages Refer to the Profile command on page 14 61 for information about creating Call Home profiles 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Setup Callhome rT Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup Callhome command SANbox admin gt set setup callhome A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so If either the Primary or Secondary SMTP Servers are enabled the FromEmailAddress attribute must be configured or the switch will not attempt to deliver messages Current Values PrimarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 PrimarySMTPServerPort 25 PrimarySMTPServerEnable False SecondarySMTPServerAddr 0 0 0 0 SecondarySMTPServerPort 25 SecondarySMTPServerEnable False ContactEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain PhoneNumber lt undefined gt StreetAddress lt undefined gt FromEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ReplyToEmailAddress nobody localhost localdomain ThrottleDu
308. rity Edit session Refer to the Security command on page 14 77 for information about starting a Security Edit session The List Members Securitysets and Type keywords are available without an Admin session group add group copy group_ source group_ destination create group type delete group edit group member list members group remove group member_list rename group_old group_new securitysets group type group 14 29 14 Command Reference Group XX QLOGIC ee Keywords add group Initiates an editing session in which to specify a group member and its attributes for the existing group given by group ISL Port and MS member attributes are described in Table 14 2 Table 14 3 and Table 14 4 respectively The group name and group type attributes are read only fields common to all three tables Table 14 2 ISL Group Member Attributes Attribute Description Member Authentication Primary Hash Primary Secret Secondary Hash Secondary Secret Binding Worldwide name of the switch that would attach to the switch A member cannot belong to more than one group Enables CHAP or disables None authentication using the Chal lenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP The default is None The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Pri mary Secret sent by the ISL member The hash functions are MD5 or SHA 1 If the ISL member does not support
309. rity database If the AutoSave parameter is False you can use this keyword to revert changes to the volatile security database that were propagated from another switch in the fabric through security set activation or merging fabrics Refer to Table 14 18 for information about the AutoSave parameter save Saves the changes that have been made to the security database during a Security Edit session Changes you make to any security set will not take effect until you activate that security set Refer to the Securityset command on page 14 81 for information about activating a security set 14 78 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Security aaa Examples The following is an example of the Security Active command SANbox gt security active Active Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember groupl ISL 10700 00 00 00 10 21 16 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret HORE RIOR Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret TERETERE Binding 0 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 17 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret cae td Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret BARRA AE Binding 0 The following is an example of the Security History command SANbox gt security history Active Database Information SecuritySetLastActivated DeactivatedBy Remote SecuritySetLastActivated DeactivatedOn day month date time year Database Checksum 00000000 Inactive Database Information ConfigurationLastEditedBy
310. rocess Information 0 Elapsed Time Between Resets Configuration Information 005 Switch Configuration Parameters Zoning Configuration Parameters Security Configuration Parameters Hardware Information 000 ee eee Firmware Information 0000e eee Managing Switch Services Managing Switch Configurations Displaying a List of Switch Configurations Activating a Switch Configuration Copying a Switch Configuration Deleting a Switch Configuration Modifying a Switch Configuration 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide a 59263 01 A Backing Up and Restoring a Switch Configuration 5 14 Creating the Backup File 0 0 0 eee eee eae 5 15 Downloading the Configuration File 4 5 15 Restoring the Configuration File 0 00 eee 5 16 Paging a OWN s 4 c25 2006s been eed eens eid wedSi tees besugee dade 5 17 Setting the Date and Time 0 0 0 cece eee eee 5 17 Displaying the Date and Time 0 0 0 ee ee 5 17 Setting the Date and Time Explicitly 5 18 Setting the Date and Time through NTP 0 00 5 19 Resetting a Switch lt iscs0tcteedseesageieas dk HN ae WG eh aGeeedwee 5 20 Installing FIUnWAlE
311. rocessed press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so If you wish to terminate the configuration process completely press qq or QQ and the ENTER key to so do PLEASE NOTE SSL must be enabled in order to configure RADIUS User Authentication SSL can be enabled using the set setup services command Current Values DeviceAuthOrder Local UserAuthOrder Local TotalServers 1 New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit DeviceAuthOrder 1 Local 2 Radius 3 RadiusLocal UserAuthOrder 1 Local 2 Radius 3 RadiusLocal TotalServers decimal value 0 5 Do you want to save and activate this radius setup y n n 59263 01 A 10 3 10 RADIUS Server Configuration AK Configuring a RADIUS Server on the Switch QLOGIC Seen e The following example configures RADIUS server 1 SANbox admin gt set setup radius server 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the attributes for the server being processed press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so If you wish to terminate the configuration process completely press qq or Q and the ENTER key to so do PLEASE NOTE SSL must be enabled in order to configure RADIUS User Authentication SSL can be enabled using the set setup services command Server 1 Current Values Serve
312. rofile cancel Closes the current Callhome Edit session Any unsaved changes are lost changeover Toggles activation between the primary SMTP server and the secondary SMTP server Though the active server status changes the primary SMTP server remains the primary and the secondary SMTP server remains the secondary clear Clears all Call Home profile information from the volatile edit copy of the Call Home database This keyword requires a Callhome Edit session This keyword does not affect the non volatile Call Home database However if you enter the Callhome Clear command followed by the Callhome Save command the non volatile Call Home database will be cleared from the switch NOTE The preferred method for clearing the Call Home database from the switch is the Reset Callhome command edit Open a Callhome Edit session Callhome Edit session commands include Callhome Clear and all Profile commands 59263 01 A xX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Callhome history Displays a history of Call Home modifications This keyword does not require an Admin session History information includes the following E Time of the most recent Call Home database modification and the user who performed it m Checksum for the Call Home database m Profile processing information list profile profile Lists the configuration for the profile given by profile If you omit profile the command lists all profiles and their configu
313. roup group_l 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 71 ed 10 00 00 c0O dd 00 72 45 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 ef 10 00 00 cO dd 00 b8 b7 59263 01 A 9 5 9 Device Security Configuration AK Displaying Security Database Information QLOGIC MS Security Database Modification History Enter the Security History command to display a record of security database modifications as shown in the following example SANbox gt security history Active Database Information SecuritySetLastActivated DeactivatedBy Remote SecuritySetLastActivated DeactivatedOn day month date time year Database Checksum 00000000 Inactive Database Information ConfigurationLastEditedBy admin IB sessionll ConfigurationLastEditedOn day month date time year Database Checksum 00007558 History information includes the following Time of the most recent security set activation or deactivation and the user account that performed it Time of the most recent modifications to the security database and the user account that made them Checksum for the security database Security Database Limits Enter the Security Limits command to display a summary of the objects in the security database and their maximum limit as shown in the following example SANbox gt security limits Security Attribute Maximum Current Name MaxSecuritySets 4 MaxGroups 16 2 MaxTotalMembers 1000 19 MaxMembersPerGroup 1000 4 groupl 15 group2 9 6 59263 01 A XKX 9 Device Security Configuration QL
314. rsion 1 21 FirmwareVersion 0302713 OperatingSystem SunOS 5 8 MaximumCTPayload 2040 NumberOfPorts 1 Port 21 01 00 e0 8b 27 aa be SupportedFC4Types FCP SupportedSpeed 2Gb s CurrentSpeed 2Gb s MaximumFrameSize 2048 OSDeviceName HostName 14 148 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Interface FT a Show Interface Displays the status of the active network interfaces Authority None Syntax show interface Examples The following is an example of the Show Interface command SANbox gt show interface etho Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 C0 DD 00 00 27 inet addr 10 20 116 131 Bcast 10 20 116 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 inet6 addr d70 c154 c2df 116 2c0 ddff fe00 27 64 Scope Global inet6 addr fe80 2c0O ddff fe00 27 64 Scope Link UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 137168 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 2194 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RX bytes 47764214 45 5 Mb TX bytes 328639 320 9 Kb lo Link encap Local Loopback inet addr 127 0 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 255 inet6 addr 1 128 Scope Host UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU 16436 Metric 1 RX packets 3887 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 3887 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 0 RX bytes 272461 266 0 Kb TX bytes 272461 266 0 Kb 59263 01 A 14 149 14 Command Reference XX Show Log QLOGIC ee Show Log Authority Syntax Keywords 14 15
315. rt Would you like to continue downloading support file y n n y Connected to 10 20 33 130 10 20 33 130 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 331 Password required for johndoe Password XXXXXXX 230 User johndoe logged in cd bin support 250 CWD command successful led itasca conf images Local directory now itasca conf images bin 200 Type set to I put dump_support tgz local dump_support tgz remote dump_support tgz 227 Entering Passive Mode 10 20 33 130 232 133 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for dump_support tgz 226 Transfer complete 43430 bytes sent in 0 292 secs 1 5e 02 Kbytes sec Remote system type is UNIX Using binary mode to transfer files 221 You have transferred 43430 bytes in 1 files 221 Total traffic for this session was 43888 bytes in 1 transfers 221 Thank you for using the FTP service on localhost localdomain 14 18 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Create a a aaa _ The following is an example of the Create Support command to download the support file to your workstation When prompted to send the support file to another machine you decline close the Telnet session and open an FTP session on the switch and log in with the account name images and password images You then use the Get FTP command to transfer the dump_support tgz file in binary mode SANbox gt create support SANbox admin gt create support Log Msg Creating the support f
316. rt binding entries found 1 False No port binding entries found 2 False No port binding entries found 3 False No port binding entries found 4 False No port binding entries found 5 False No port binding entries found 6 False No port binding entries found 7 False No port binding entries found 8 False No port binding entries found 9 False No port binding entries found 20 False No port binding entries found 21 False No port binding entries found 22 False No port binding entries found 23 False No port binding entries found 59263 01 A 6 9 6 Port Configuration AA Resetting a Port QLOGIC _ amp Enter the Set Config Security Portbinding command to enable port binding for the selected port and to specify the world wide names of the authorized ports devices The following example enables port binding on port 1 and specifies two device world wide names SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config security port 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so PortBindingEnabled True False False true WWN N None WWN None 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 9 WWN N None WWN None 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b9 8 WWN N None
317. s Rename an Alias Copy an Alias Add Members to an Alias Remove Members from an Alias All of these tasks require an Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Create an Alias Enter the Alias Create command to create a new alias as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt alias create alias_1l SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Delete an Alias Enter the Alias Delete command to delete alias_1 from the zoning database as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt alias delete alias_1 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Rename an Alias Enter the Alias Rename command to rename alias_1 to alias _aas shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt alias rename alias_1 alias_a SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save 59263 01 A 7 19 7 Zoning Configuration AK Managing Aliases QLOGIC ee Copy an Alias Enter the Alias Copy command to copy alias_1 and its contents to alias_2 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt alias copy alias_1l alias_2 SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save Add Members to an Alias Enter th
318. s True or disables False the IP version 4 inter face The default is True EthIPv4NetworkDiscovery Ethernet boot method 1 Static 2 Bootp 3 DHCP 4 RARP The default is 1 Static EthlPv4NetworkAddress Ethernet IP address The default is 10 0 0 1 EthIPv4NetworkMask Ethernet IP subnet mask address The default is 255 0 0 0 EthIPv4GatewayAddress Ethernet address gateway The default is 10 0 0 254 ipv6 Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change the switch IP version 6 Ethernet configuration parameters described in Table 14 33 To configure all system parameters omit the keyword For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value NOTE Changing the IP address will terminate all Ethernet management sessions Table 14 33 IP Version 6 Ethernet Configuration Parameters Entry Description EthIPv6NetworkEnable Enables True or disables False the IP version 6 inter face The default is True EthIPv6NetworkDiscovery Ethernet boot method 1 Static 2 DHCPv6 3 NDP The default is 1 Static EthIlPv6NetworkAddress Ethernet IP address 59263 01 A XKX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Setup System T_T Table 14 33 IP Version 6 Ethernet Configuration Parameters Continued Description EthIPv6NetworkMask Ethernet IP subnet mask address EthIPv6GatewayAddress Ethernet IP address gateway logging Prompts you in a
319. s policies and associations currently in use Configured policies and associations that is policies and associations that have been saved in the database m Policies and associations that are being edited but have not been saved You can display the following types of IP Security configuration information m Policy and Association Information m P Security Configuration History m P Security Configuration Limits Policy and Association Information To display general or specific policy and association information enter the lpsec List command The Ipsec List command does not require an Admin session nor an Ipsec Edit session Within an Ipsec Edit session the Ipsec Association List and Ipsec Policy List commands display the same information 59263 01 A XX 4 Network Configuration LOGIC Managing IP Security Te The following example displays all active policies and associations SANbox gt ipsec list Active IPsec Information Security Association Database h2h sh sa h2h hs sa Security Policy Database h2h hs sp h2h sh sp Summary Security Association Count 2 Security Policy Count 2 IP Security Configuration History To display the IP Security configuration history enter the Ipsec History command to display a record of policy and association modifications as shown in the following example SANbox gt ipsec history IPsec Database History ConfigurationLastEditedBy johndoe OB session5 Confi
320. s False 14 88 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Config Port OOOO aaa a Table 14 19 Port Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Description lOStreamGuard Enables or disables the suppression of RSCN messages lOStreamGuard can have the following values m Enable Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages from other ports for which l OStreamGuard is enabled Disable Allows free transmission and reception of RSCN messages m Auto Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages when the port is connected to an initiator device with a QLogic HBA For older QLogic HBAs such as the QLA2200 the DeviceScanEnabled parameter must also be enabled The default is Auto PDISCPingEnable Enables True or disables False the transmission of ping SFP ports only messages from the switch to all devices on a loop port The default is True 59263 01 A 14 89 14 Command Reference Set Config Port XX QLOGIC a Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Port command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config port 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Configuring Port N
321. s QLogic Corporation 4601 Dean Lakes Boulevard Shakopee MN 55379 USA QLogic Web Site www qlogic com Technical Support Web Site support glogic com Technical Support Email support qlogic com Technical Training Email tech training qlogic com North American Region Email support qlogic com Phone 1 952 932 4040 Europe Middle East and Africa Region Email emeasupport qlogic com Phone Numbers by Language 353 1 6924960 English 353 1 6924961 Fran ais 353 1 6924962 Deutsch 353 1 6924963 Espa ol 353 1 6924964 Portugu s 353 1 6924965 Italiano Asia Pacific Region Email apacsupport qlogic com Phone Numbers by Language 63 2 885 6712 English 63 2 885 6713 Mandarin 63 2 885 6714 Japanese 63 2 885 6715 Korean Latin and South America Region Email calasupport qlogic com Phone Numbers by Language 52 55 5278 7016 English 52 55 5278 7017 Espa ol 52 55 5278 7015 Portugu s 1 4 59263 01 A XX o Rel c eq 2 Command Line Interface Usage This section describes the following tasks Logging In to the Switch Opening and Closing an Admin Session Entering Commands Getting Help Setting Page Breaks Creating a Support File Downloading and Uploading Files NOTE Throughout this document references in text to commands and keywords use initial capitalization for clarity Actual command and keyword entries are case insensitive
322. s continuous performance data in frames second received for the ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for ports 0 15 Press any key to stop the display outframe port_list Displays continuous performance data in frames second transmitted for the ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for ports 0 15 Press any key to stop the display errors port_list Displays continuous error counts for the ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for ports 0 15 Press any key to stop the display 14 164 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Perf 0 0 0C CCC CSCS Examples The following is an example of the Show Perf command SANbox gt show perf Port Bytes s Bytes s Bytes s Frames s Frames s Frames s Number in out total in out total 0 TK 136M 136M 245 68K 68K al 58K 0 58K 1K 0 1K 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0
323. scription of these parameters SANbox gt show config zoning Configuration Name MergeAutoSave DefaultZone DiscardInactive default True Allow False 5 6 59263 01 A XKX 5 Switch Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Switch Information gt Security Configuration Parameters Enter the Show Config Security command to display security configuration and port binding parameters These parameters determine how security is applied to the switch Refer to Table 14 20 for a description of the switch security configuration parameters Refer to Table 14 21 for a description of the port binding parameters SANbox gt show config security Configuration Name default FabricBindingEnabled False AutoSave True Port Binding Status WWN 0 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 1 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 2 False No port binding entries found 3 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 4 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 5 False No port binding entries found 6 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 81 7 False No port binding entries found 8 True 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 9 False No port binding entries found 0 False No port binding entries found 1 False No port binding entries found 2 False No port binding entries found 3 False No port binding entries found 4 False No port binding entries found 5 False No port binding entries found 6 False No port binding entries found 7 False No port binding entries found 8 False No
324. setting Authority None Syntax show pagebreak Notes The pagebreak setting limits the display of information to 20 lines On or allows the continuous display of information without a break Off Examples The following is an example of the Show Pagebreak command SANbox gt show pagebreak current setting ON 14 162 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Perf EEE eee Show Perf Displays port performance in frames second and bytes second If you omit the keyword the command displays data transmitted out data received in and total data transmitted and received in frames second and bytes second Transmission rates are expressed in thousands K and millions M Authority None Syntax show perf port_list or show perf byte port_list inbyte port_list outbyte port_list frame port_list inframe port_list outframe port_list errors port_list Keywords port list Displays the instantaneous performance data for up to sixteen ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 If you omit port_list the command displays performance data for all ports byte port_list Displays continuous performance data in total bytes second transmitted and received for up to sixteen ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by s
325. sion in the event log The default is False This parameter is the master control for the Set Setup System command parameter NTP ClientEnabled The default is False Enables True or disables False the management of the switch through third party applications that use SMI S Enables True or disables False the File Transfer Protocol FTP for transferring files rapidly between the workstation and the switch The default is True 59263 01 A 14 117 14 Command Reference XX Set Setup Services QLOGIC E ee Table 14 28 Switch Services Settings Continued Entry Description MgmtServerEnabled Enables True or disables False the management of the switch through third party applications that use GS 3 Man agement Server MS This parameter is the master control for the Set Config Port command parameter MSEnable The default is True CallHomeEnabled Enables True or disables False the Call Home service which controls e mail notification The default is True Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup Services command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set setup services A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so PLEASE NOTE Further configurat
326. ssion in which to change the security database configuration The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Enter q or Q to end the editing session Table 14 20 describes the security configuration parameters Table 14 20 Security Configuration Parameters Parameter Description AutoSave Enables True or disables False the saving of changes to active security set in the switch s permanent memory The default is True FabricBindingEnabled Enables True or disables False the configuration and enforcement of fabric binding on all switches in the fabric Fabric binding associates switch worldwide names with a domain ID in the creation of ISL groups The default is False 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Config Security T_T Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Security command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config security A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so FabricBindingEnabled True False False AutoSave True False True Fi
327. ssword authority and an expiration date m A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts An account name can be up to 15 characters the first character must be alphanumeric the remaining characters must be ASCII characters excluding semicolon comma and period E Passwords must be 8 20 characters m Admin authority grants permission to use the Admin command to open an Admin session from which all commands can be entered Without Admin authority you are limited to view only commands m The expiration date is expressed in the number of days until the account expires 2000 maximum The switch will issue an expiration alarm every day for seven days prior to expiration 0 zero specifies that the account has no expiration date delete account_name Deletes the account name given by account_name from the switch edit Initiates an edit session that prompts you for the account name for which to change the expiration date and authority 14 201 14 Command Reference XX User QLOGIC ee Notes Examples list brief Displays the list of users currently logged in the login date and the login time The User List command is equivalent to the Show Users command This keyword is available to all account names without an Admin session To display just the account name and client enter the User List Brief command Authority level or password changes that you make to an account that is currently logge
328. stall command The following is an example of the Image Install command SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt image install The switch will be reset This process will cause a disruption to I O traffic Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions including any Telnet sessions When the firmware activation is complete you may log in to the switch again Do you want to continue y n y Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command FTP or IFTP 2 tp User Account johndoe IP Address 10 0 0 254 Source Filename 7 4 00 xx_epc About to install image Do you want to continue y n y Connected to 10 0 0 254 10 0 0 254 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 331 Password required for johndoe Password XXXXXXXXX 230 User johndoe logged in bin 200 Type set to I verbose Verbose mode off This may take several seconds The switch will now reset Connection closed by foreign host 14 42 59263 01 A xX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Image i The following is an example of the Image Fetch and Image Unpack commands SANbox admin gt image fetch johndoe 10 0 0 254 7 4 00 11_epc gt ftp 10 0 0 254 user johndoe password KKKKK KKK ftp gt bin ftp gt put 7 4 00 11l_epc ftp gt quit SANbox admin gt image list SANbox admin S gt image unpack 7 4 00 11_epc Image unpack command result Passed 59263 01 A 14 43 14 Co
329. stl DNSSearchList2 DNSSearchList3 DNSSearchList4 DNSSearchList5 New Value press ENTER to DNSClientEnabled DNSLocalHostname DNSServerDiscovery DNSServerlAddress DNSServer2Address DNSServer3Address DNSSearchListDiscovery DNSSearchListl DNSSearchList2 DNSSearchList3 DNSSearchList4 DNSSearchList5 Do you want to save and activate this system setup and the ENTER key to do so False lt undefined gt Static lt undefined gt lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Static lt undefined gt lt undefined gt lt undefined gt lt undefined gt lt undefined gt accept current value q to quit n for none True False hostname 1 Static 2 Dhcp 3 Dhcpv6 IPv4 or IPv6 Address IPv4 or IPv6 Address IPv4 or IPv6 Address 1l Static 2 Dhcp 3 Dhcpv6 domain name domain name domain name domain name domain name y n n 59263 01 A 4 Network Configuration XKX Verifying a Switch in the Network QLOGIC ee Verifying a Switch in the Network You can verify that a switch is communicating in the network using the Ping command The following example successfully tests the network for a switch with IP address 10 20 11 57 SANbox gt ping 10 20 11 57 Ping command issued Waiting for response SANbox gt Response successfully received from 10 20 11 57 If the switch was unreachable you would see the following display SANbox gt ping 10 20 11 57 Ping command iss
330. t Level Alarm Critical Warn None Format 1 FullText 2 ShortText 3 Tscl 1 MaxSize decimal value 650 100000 EmailSubject string max 64 chars N None RecipientEmail ex admin company com N None 1 john smith domain com 2 lt undefined gt The profile has been edited This configuration must be saved with the callhome save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the callhome cancel command SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHome database profiles will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y 59263 01 A 12 11 12 Call Home Configuration AA Managing the Call Home Database QLOGIC ne Renaming a Profile Enter the Profile Rename command to rename profile_1 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt profile rename profile_1l profile_4 The profile will be renamed Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHome database profiles will be saved and activated Please confirm y n n y Copying a Profile Enter the Profile Copy command to copy profile_1 as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt callhome edit SANbox admin callhome gt profile copy profile_1l profile_a SANbox admin callhome gt callhome save The CallHome database profiles will be saved and activate
331. t list restore save The following is an example of the Help Config Edit command SANbox gt help config edit config edit CONFIG_NAME This command initiates a configuration session and places the current session into config edit mode If CONFIG_NAME is given and it exists it gets edited otherwise it gets created If it is not given the currently active configuration is edited Admin mode is required for this command Usage config edit CONFIG_NAME 14 38 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference History OT History Displays a numbered list of the previously entered commands from which you can re execute selected commands Authority None Syntax history Notes Use the History command to provide context for the command m Enter command_string to re execute the most recent command that matches command_string m Enter line number to re execute the corresponding command from the History display m Enter partial command string to re execute a command that matches the command string m Enter to re execute the most recent command Examples The following is an example of the History command SANbox gt history 1 2 3 4 show switch date help set history SANbox gt 3 help set set SET_OPTIONS There are many attributes that can be set Type help with one of the following to get more information Usage set 59263 01 A alarm beaco
332. t active Active SecuritySet Information ActiveSecuritySet alpha LastActivatedBy Remote LastActivatedOn day month date time year The following is an example of the Securityset Groups command SANbox gt securityset groups alpha Current list of Groups for SecuritySet alpha groupl ISL group2 Port The following is an example of the Securityset List command SANbox gt securityset list Current list of SecuritySets alpha beta 59263 01 A 14 83 14 Command Reference XX Set Alarm LOGIC OO ee Set Alarm Controls the display of alarms in the session output stream or clears the alarm log Authority Admin session for the Clear keyword Otherwise none Syntax set alarm option Keywords option option can be one of the following clear Clears the alarm log history This value requires an Admin session on Enables the display of alarms in the session output stream off Disables the display of alarms in the session output stream Disabling the display of alarms in the output stream allows command scripts to run without interruption Examples The following is an example of the Set Alarm command SANbox gt set alarm on 14 84 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Beacon OT rl Set Beacon Authority Syntax Keywords Examples 59263 01 A Enables or disables the flashing of the Logged In LEDs for the purpose of locating a switch None set beacon stat
333. t zones whose combined membership does not exceed 64 If this condition is not satisfied that port behaves as a soft zone member You can assign ports devices to a zone individually or as a group by creating an alias A zone can be a component of more than one zone set Several zone sets can be defined for a fabric but only one zone set can be active at one time The active zone set determines the current fabric zoning 59263 01 A 7 1 7 Zoning Configuration AK Displaying Zoning Database Information QLOGIC ee Displaying Zoning Database Information A switch maintains three zoning databases Non volatile This zoning database is permanent and contains all zone sets zones and aliases that you create and save on a switch The zone sets in the non volatile zoning database are known as configured zone sets Volatile This zoning database is temporary This means it is not retained across switch resets The volatile zoning database can be the working copy of a zone set being edited or the active zone set received from another switch In the latter case this is also known as the merged zone set Active This zoning database is the active zone set You can display the following information about the zoning database Configured Zone Set Information Active Zone Set Information Merged Zone Set Information Edited Zone Set Information Zone Set Membership Information Orphan Zone Information Alias and Alias Membership Information
334. tabase Information QLOGIC SS ee Active Zone Set Information The Zoning List and Zoneset Active commands display information about the active zone set Enter the Zoning Active command to display component zones and zone members as shown in the following example SANbox gt zoning active Active enforced ZoneSet Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn_b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 21 00 00 e0 8b 02 41 2f wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 23 bd 31 wwn_221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn_2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 c3 Enter the Zoneset Active command to display the name of the active zone set and its activation history as shown in the following example SANbox gt zoneset active Active ZoneSet Information ActiveZoneSet Bets LastActivatedBy admin OB session6 LastActivatedOn day month date time year 7 4 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration QLOGIC Displaying Zoning Database Information OOOO _ ar Merged Zone Set Information A merged zone set is a zone set that is received from another switch as a result of a change in active zone sets You can display the merged zone set on your switch if the MergeAutoSave parameter is set to False Refer to Configuring the Zoning Database on page 7 10 for more information about the MergeAutoSave param
335. tch given by domain_id domain_id is a switch domain ID port_id Displays the WWNs for the devices connected to the port given by port_id port_id is a port Fibre Channel address Examples The following is an example of the Show Ns local domain command SANbox gt show ns Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodewwNn 212002002202 37273 13 69 202002002202 372 73213269 212700700720237 73712 9 20 200 00 20 37 732122396 21200200220 37 732 05 26 20200 002202372 73 05226 21 01 00 e0 8b 27 a7 bc 20 01 00 e0 8b 27 a7 be 1 19 0x13 1301e1 NL 2 19 0x13 1301le2 NL 3 19 0x13 1301e4 NL 4 19 0x13 130d00 N The following is an example of the Show Ns domain_ID command SANbox gt show ns 18 Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodewwNn all 18 0x12 120700 N 3 21 00 00 e0 8b 07 a7 be 20 00 00 e0 8b 07 a7 be 14 160 59263 01 A xX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Show Ns TT OO The following is an example of the Show Ns port_ID command SANbox gt show ns 1301e1 Port ID 1301e1 PortType NL PortWWN 21 00 00 20 37 73 13 69 SymbolicPortName NodewwN 20 00 00 20 37 73 13 69 SymbolicNodeName NodeIPAddress diskarray7 anycompany com ClassOfService 3 PortIPAddress a FabricPortName 20 01 00 c0 dd 00 bc 56 FC4Type FCP FC4Desc NULL 59263 01 A 14 161 14 Command Reference XX Show Pagebreak QLOGIC e _ i Show Pagebreak Displays the current pagebreak
336. tenance provider or authorized reseller Displays transceiver operational and diagnostic information for one or more ports None show media port_list all installed port_list The port or ports for which to display transceiver information port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 all Displays transceiver information for all ports installed Displays transceiver information for all ports that have transceivers installed Table 14 39 describes the transceiver information in the Show Media display Table 14 39 Transceiver Information Information Type Description MediaType Media physical variant The variant indicates speed media transmitter and distance The media designator may be M5 multimode 50 micron M6 multimode 62 5 micron or MX MX indicates that the media supports both multimode 50 and 62 5 micron MediaType may also be on of the following m Notlinstalled transceiver is not installed E Unknown transceiver does not have a serial ID m NotApplicable transceiver is not needed MediaVendor Vendor name 14 155 14 Command Reference Show Media XX QLOGIC ee Table 14 39 Transceiver Information Continued Information Type MediaPartNumber MediaRevision MediaSerialNumber MediaSpeeds Temp Voltage Tx Bias Tx Power Rx Power Value Status HighAlarm
337. th formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Current Values TraplEnabled True TraplAddress 10 20 33 181 TraplPort 5001 TraplSeverity info TraplVersion 2 TraplCommunity northdakota New Value press ENTER to not specify value q to quit TraplEnabled True False TraplAddress hostname IPv4 or IPv6 Address TraplPort decimal value 1 65535 TraplSeverity select a severity level 1 unknown 6 warning 2 emergency 7 notify 3 alert 8 info 4 critical 9 debug S error 10 mark TraplVersion 1 2 TraplCommunity string max 32 chars Do you want to save and activate this snmp setup y n n Resetting the SNMP Configuration Enter the Reset SNMP command in an Admin session to reset the SNMP configuration back to the factory defaults as shown in the following example Refer to Table 14 14 for a listing of the SNMP configuration factory defaults SANbox admin gt reset snmp 59263 01 A 13 5 13 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration XKX Managing the SNMP Version 3 Configuration QLOGIC ee Managing the SNMP Version 3 Configuration SNMP version 3 is an interoperable standards based protocol for network management SNMP version 3 provides secure access to devices by a combination of packet authenticati
338. the Primary Hash the switch will use the Secondary Hash Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for authentication with the ISL group member The string has the follow ing lengths depending on the Primary Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte E SHA 1 hash 20 byte Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret sent by the ISL group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 The Secondary Hash is used when the Primary Hash is not available on the ISL group member The Primary Hash and the Secondary Hash cannot be the same Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for authentication The string has the following lengths depending on the Secondary Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte m SHA 1 hash 20 byte Domain ID of the switch to which to bind the ISL group member worldwide name This option is available only if FabricBindingEnabled is set to True using the Set Config Security command 0 zero specifies no binding 14 30 59263 01 A XKX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Group TO Table 14 3 Port Group Member Attributes Attribute Description Member Worldwide port name WWPN for the N_Port device that would attach to the switch A member cannot belong to more than one group All loop device WWPNs must be included in the group other wise the switch port will be downed and none of the devices will be able to log in Authentication Enables CHAP or disables None
339. the log events to automatically display on the screen according to the event severity levels given by filter filter can be one of the following values Critical Critical events The critical severity level describes events that are generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but require no action Warn Warning events The warning severity level describes events that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but are more important than the informative level events Info Informative events The informative severity level describes routine events associated with a normal fabric 14 102 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Log Se None Specifies no severity levels for display on the screen level filter Specifies the severity level given by filter to use in monitoring and logging events for the specified components or ports filter can be one of the following values Critical Monitors critical events The critical level describes events that are generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but require no action This is the default severity level Warn Monitors warning and critical events The warning level describes events that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but are more important than the informative level events Info Monitors informative warning and crit
340. the zoning database and deactivates the active zone set The zoning configuration parameters MergeAutoSave DefaultZone DiscardInactive remain unchanged Refer to Table 14 13 for information about the zoning configuration parameters 59263 01 A 14 69 14 Command Reference XX Reset LOGIC CO ee Notes The following tables specify the various factory default settings m Table 14 9 shows the Call Home service configuration defaults Enter the Show Setup Callhome command to display the Call Home service configuration values Table 14 10 shows the switch configuration default values Enter the Show Config Switch command to display switch configuration values Table 14 11 shows the port configuration default values Enter the Show Config Port command to display port configuration values Table 14 12 shows the port threshold alarm configuration defaults Enter the Show Config Threshold command to display port threshold alarm configuration values Table 14 13 shows the zoning configuration defaults Enter the Show Config Zoning command to display zoning configuration values Table 14 14 shows the SNMP configuration defaults Enter the Show Setup Snmp command to display SNMP configuration values Table 14 15 shows the RADIUS configuration defaults Enter the Show Setup Radius command to display RADIUS configuration values Table 14 16 shows the switch services configuration defaults Enter the Show Setup Services command to displ
341. tication can be performed locally using the switch s security database or remotely using a Remote Dial In User Service RADIUS server such as Microsoft RADIUS With a RADIUS server the security database for the entire fabric resides on the server In this way the security database can be managed centrally rather than on each switch You can configure up to five RADIUS servers to provide failover You can configure the RADIUS server to authenticate just the switch or both the switch and the initiator device if the device supports authentication When using a RADIUS server every switch in the fabric must have a network connection A RADIUS server can also be configured to authenticate user accounts Refer to Section 3 for information about user accounts A secure connection is required to authenticate user logins with a RADIUS server Refer to Section 8 for information about secure connections This section describes the following tasks m Displaying RADIUS Server Information Configuring a RADIUS Server on the Switch 59263 01 A TE 10 RADIUS Server Configuration AK Displaying RADIUS Server Information QLOGIC SSS ee Displaying RADIUS Server Information Enter the Show Setup Radius command to display RADIUS server information as shown in the following example Refer to Table 14 26 for a description of the RADIUS configuration parameters SANbox gt show setup radius Radius Information DeviceAuthOrder Local UserAuthOrder L
342. tion 1 BackToFront FanDirection 2 BackToFront PowerSupplyStatus 1 Good PowerSupplyStatus 2 Good HeartBeatCode 1 HeartBeatStatus Normal 59263 01 A 14 137 14 Command Reference Show Config Port XX QLOGIC ee Show Config Port Authority Syntax Keywords Examples None port_number The number of the port Ports are numbered beginning with 0 If you omit port_number all ports are specified Configuration Name Port Number 3 AdminState LinkSpeed PortType SymbolicName ALFairness DeviceScanEnabled ForceOfflineRSCN ARB_FF InteropCredit ExtCredit FANEnabled AutoPerfTuning LCFEnabled MFSEnabled ViIEnabled MSEnabled NoClose TOStreamGuard PDISCPingEnable Displays configuration parameters for one or more ports show config port port_number SANbox gt show config port 3 default Offline Auto GL Port3 False True False False 0 0 True False False True False True False Disabled True The following is an example of the Show Config Port command for port 3 14 138 59263 01 A xX 14 Command Reference LOGIC Show Config Port A OO The following is an example of the Show Config Port command for an XPAK port SANbox gt show config port 20 Configuration Name default Port Number 16 AdminState Online LinkSpeed 10Gb s PortType G SymbolicName 10G 20 DeviceScanEnabled True ForceOfflineRSCN False AutoPerfTuning False LCFEnabled Fa
343. tion NULL IPv4Address 0x000 IPv6Address fc00 1234 5678 9abc def0 1234 5678 9efg Unique ID 010500 P 4 0x4 D 59263 01 A 14 187 14 Command Reference Show Users XX QLOGIC ee Show Users Displays a list of logged in users This is equivalent to the User List command Authority None Syntax show users brief Keywords brief Displays just the account name and client Examples The following is an example of the Show Users command SANbox gt show users User Client Logged User Client Logged User Client Logged User Client Logged in in in in Since Since Since Since cim OB sessionl cim Tue Apr 8 05 22 47 2008 snmp IB session2 Unknown Tue Apr 8 05 22 55 2008 snmp OB session3 Unknown Tue Apr 8 05 22 55 2008 admin OB session5 1033 21 27 Thu Apr 10 04 14 11 2008 The following is an example of the Show Users Brief command SANbox gt show users brief User cim OB sessionl snmp IB session2 snmp OB session3 admin OB session5 Client cim Unknown Unknown 10 33 21 27 14 188 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Show Version a Show Version Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the switch This command is equivalent to the Show About command Authority Syntax Notes 59263 01 A None show version Table 14 42 describes the Show Version command display e
344. tion The string has the following lengths depending on the Secondary Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte E SHA 1 hash 20 byte Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Hash function for authentication with MS group members The string has the following lengths depending on the Hash function m MD5 hash 16 byte E SHA 1 hash 20 byte 14 33 14 Command Reference XX Group LOGIC ee Table 14 5 Group Member Attributes Continued Attribute Description Binding Domain ID of the switch to which to bind the ISL group mem ISL Groups ber worldwide name This option is available only if FabricBindingEnabled is set to True using the Set Config Security command 0 zero specifies no binding list Displays a list of all groups and the security sets of which they are members This keyword is available without an Admin session members group Displays all members of the group given by group This keyword is available without an Admin session remove group member _list Remove the port device worldwide name given by member from the group given by group Use a lt space gt to delimit multiple member names in member list rename group_ old group_new Renames the group given by group_old to the group given by group_new securitysets group Displays the list of security sets of which the group given by group is a member This keyword is available without an Admin session type group
345. tion about setting the time and date m Set Timezone command on page 14 132 for information about setting the time zone on the switch and workstation m Set Setup System command on page 14 123 System keyword for information about enabling the Network Time Protocol for synchronizing the time and date on the switch and workstation from an NTP server support Assembles all log files and switch memory data into a file dump_support tgz on the switch If your workstation has an FTP server you can proceed with the command prompts to send the file from the switch to a remote host Otherwise you can use FTP to download the support file from the switch to your workstation The support file is useful to technical support personnel for troubleshooting switch problems Use this command when directed by your authorized maintenance provider This keyword does not require an Admin session NOTE Support files are deleted from the switch during a power cycle or switch reset 14 17 14 Command Reference XX Create QLOGIC ee Examples The following is an example of the Create Support command when an FTP server is available on the workstation SANbox gt create support Log Msg Creating the support file this will take several seconds FIP the dump support file to another machine y n y Enter IPv4 IPv6 Address or hostname of remote computer 10 20 33 130 Login name johndoe Enter remote directory name bin suppo
346. tion history 9 6 modify 9 9 reset 9 10 restore 9 7 security edit session cancel 14 77 initiate 14 78 revert changes 14 78 save changes 14 78 security policy database 4 10 information 4 8 security set activate 9 11 14 81 active 9 4 add group 9 11 add member group 14 81 configured 9 2 copy 9 11 14 82 create 9 10 14 82 deactivate 9 11 14 82 delete 9 10 14 82 delete member group 14 82 description 9 1 display 14 82 display active 14 77 14 81 display members 14 82 information 9 2 management 9 10 membership 9 5 remove groups 9 11 rename 9 11 14 82 Securityset command 14 81 Activate example 9 11 Active example 9 4 Add example 9 11 Copy example 9 11 Create example 9 10 Deactivate example 9 11 Delete example 9 10 Group example 9 5 List example 9 2 Remove example 9 11 Rename example 9 11 services display 5 10 8 3 managing 5 10 SNMP 13 2 Set Beacon command 5 17 Set Config Port command 14 86 example 6 6 Set Config Security command 14 92 example 9 8 Set Config Security Port command 14 94 example 6 10 Index 8 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC SANbox 5802V Fibre Channel Switch Command Line Interface Guide a l Set Config Switch command 14 95 example 5 14 Set Config Threshold command 14 97 example 6 12 Set Config Zoning command 14 99 example 7 10 Set Log command 14 101 Archive example 11 7 Clear example 11 5 Display example 11 4 example 11 4 Restore example 11 5 Start example 11 2 Stop example 11
347. to your workstation as follows 1 Log into the switch through Telnet and create an archive of the event log Enter the Set Log Archive command in an Admin session to create a file on the switch named logfile SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set log archive 2 Open an FTP session on the switch and log in with the account name images and password images Transfer the file ogfile in binary mode with the Get command gt ftp ip_address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt get logfile XXXxXx bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit 11 Event Log Configuration XKX Creating and Downloading a Log File QLOGIC E ee Notes 11 8 59263 01 A XX eo Rel c eq 12 Call Home Configuration This section describes the following topics Call Home Concepts Configuring the Call Home Service Managing the Call Home Database Testing a Call Home Profile Changing SMTP Servers Clearing the Call Home Message Queue Resetting the Call Home Database Call Home Concepts The Call Home service improves fabric availability by notifying administrators by email of events that affect switch operation The Call Home service is active by default and is controlled by the Set Setup Services command To display the Call Home service status enter the Show Setup Services command To better understand the Call Home service consider the following m Call Home Requirements m Call Home Messages Technical Support Interface
348. tory default values for switch port port threshold alarm and zoning configuration as described in Table 14 10 through Table 14 18 If config_name does not exist on the switch a configuration with that name will be created If you omit config_name the active configuration is reset You must activate the configuration for the changes to take effect 59263 01 A 14 67 14 Command Reference XX Reset QLOGIC ee 14 68 factory Resets switch configuration port configuration port threshold alarm configuration zoning configuration SNMP configuration system configuration security configuration RADIUS configuration switch services configuration zoning configuration and Call Home configuration to the factory default values as described in Table 14 10 through Table 14 18 The switch configuration is activated automatically NOTE E Because this keyword changes network parameters the workstation could lose communication with the switch and release the Admin session m This keyword does not affect installed license keys ipsec Resets the IP security database configuration to its default values port port_list Reinitializes one or more ports given by port_list port_list can be a set of port numbers and ranges delimited by spaces For example 0 2 10 15 specifies ports 0 2 10 11 12 13 14 and 15 radius Resets the RADIUS configuration to the default values as described in Table 14 15 security
349. ublished November 2007 QLogic Corporation 26650 Aliso Viejo Parkway Aliso Viejo CA 92656 800 662 4471 or 949 389 6000 Page ii 59263 01 A XX o Relci leq Table of Contents 1 Introduction Intended Audience 25 cu ihe Kae Gp boo bbs SER ee eG se SUR R ewe eee aS es 1 2 Related Malenals lt ss5Gits toe eelie ee dieeteees bee taeeee sarees 1 2 Technical Support nassaan 0000 eee 1 3 AVGNADINY sii retinens Re Aka eRe e ee eee eee eae 1 3 TRAINING es es en POL SOLE RG eRe ee eee ewe oes 1 3 Contact InfOnmation lt s ngssecnnhersees ceeds deaaasaee canes 1 4 2 Command Line Interface Usage Logging In to the Switch o 0 si0ss eb eee ek iseecseeay wives chaos 2 2 Opening and Closing an Admin Session 0000 cece eee 2 3 Entering GOMMANGS 254 c200 964 Sadhsedbeeten Geen bGeedeteduda 2 4 Getting HENS jo0 ret ota teacisare ahd Seu des te shen Siu eeee ad k 2 4 Setting Page BreakS 0 00 eee 2 5 Creating a Support File a4 ccxvaces ceeds dao eee eee dee wa Mba ew ewes 2 6 Downloading and Uploading Files 0 0000 c eee eee eee 2 7 3 User Account Configuration Displaying User Account Information 000 0 eee eee eee 3 2 Creating User ACCOUNIG cacedvetbrsedveteesetaddeae adee ew wed 3 3 Modifying User Accounts and Passwords 00 ee eee eeeee 3 4 4 Network Configuration Displaying the Network Configuration 00 0c eee ee eee 4 1 Configuring the Ether
350. ue 1 4294967295 100 FrameSize decimal value 40 2148 256 DataPattern 32 bit hex value or Default Default StopOnError True False True LoopForever True False False Do you want to start the test y n n y 59263 01 A 5 25 5 Switch Configuration AK Testing a Switch QLOGIC ee Offline Tests for Switches An offline test is a disruptive test that exercises all port connections for a switch in the diagnostics state You must place the switch in the diagnostics state using the Set Switch State command before starting the test There are two types of offline test internal loopback and external loopback mE An internal loopback test exercises all internal port connections E An external loopback test exercises all internal port and transceiver connections A transceiver with a loopback plug is required for all ports The following example performs an offline internal loopback test on a switch SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt set switch state diagnostics SANbox admin gt test switch offline internal A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so LoopCount decimal value 1 4294967295 100 FrameSize decimal value 40 2148 256 DataPattern 32 bit hex value
351. ued Waiting for response No response from 10 20 11 57 Unreachable Managing IP Security To modify IP Security you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time through Telnet QuickTools Enterprise Fabric Suite 2007 or another management application You must also open an Ipsec Edit session with the Ipsec Edit command The Ipsec Edit session provides access to the Ipsec Ipsec Association and Ipsec Policy commands with which you make modifications to the IP Security configuration SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt ipsec edit SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec policy SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec association When you are finished making changes enter the Ipsec Save command to save and activate the changes and close the Ipsec Edit session Changes take effect immediately SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec save To close the Ipsec Edit session without saving changes enter the lpsec Cancel command SANbox admin ipsec gt ipsec cancel The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators when you are done making changes to the switch 59263 01 A XX 4 Network Configuration QLOGIC Managing IP Security O To remove all IP security policies and associations enter the Reset Ipsec command SANbox admin gt reset ipsec The fo
352. um number of zone and alias members 10000 that can be stored in the switch s zoning database Each instance of a zone member or alias member counts toward this maximum MaxZonesInZoneSets Maximum number of zones that are components of zone sets 2000 excluding those in the orphan zone set that can be stored in the switch s zoning database Each instance of a zone in a zone Set counts toward this maxi mum MaxMembersPerZone Maximum number of members in a zone 2000 MaxMembersPerAlias Maximum number of members in an alias 2000 59263 01 A 14 219 14 Command Reference XX Zoning List QLOGIC Zoning List Lists all zoning definitions including the applicable zoning database Authority None Syntax zoning list Examples The following is an example of the Zoning List command SANbox gt zoning list Active enforced ZoneSet Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 23 bd 31 wwn_221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 002 c9 22 14 16 wwn_2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 c3 Configured saved in NVRAM Zoning Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 23 bd 31 wwn_221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn_2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2
353. umber 1 AdminState 1 Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics 4 Down Online LinkSpeed 1 1Gb s 2 2Gb s 4 4Gb s 8 8Gb s A Auto Auto PortType GL G E FL Donor GL SymPortName string max 32 chars Porti ALFairness True False False DeviceScanEnable True False True ForceOfflineRSCN True False False ARB_FF True False False InteropCredit decimal value 0 255 0 ExtCredit dec value increments of 15 non loop only 0 FANEnable True False True AutoPerfTuning True False False LCFEnable True False False MFSEnable True False False ViIEnable True False False MSEnable True False True NoClose True False False TOStreamGuard Enable Disable Auto Disable PDISCPingEnable True False True Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 14 90 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Config Port rT The following is an example of the Set Config Port command for an XPAK port SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt config edit SANbox admin config gt set config port 20 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press
354. unchanged This is the preferred method SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt reset zoning 59263 01 A 7 13 7 Zoning Configuration XKX Removing Inactive Zone Sets Zones and Aliases QLOGIC ne Removing Inactive Zone Sets Zones and Aliases Enter the Zoning Delete Orphans command to delete all objects from the zoning database except those in the active zone set SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning delete orphans This command will remove all zonesets zones and aliases that are not currently active Please confirm y n n y SANbox admin gt zoning save Managing Zone Sets Managing zone sets consists of the following tasks Create a Zone Set Delete a Zone Set Rename a Zone Set Copy a Zone Set Add Zones to a Zone Set Remove Zones from a Zone Set Activate a Zone Set Deactivate a Zone Set All of these tasks except Activate a Zone Set and Deactivate a Zone Set require an Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Create a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Create command to create a new zone set as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt zoning edit SANbox admin zoning gt zoneset create zoneset_1l SANbox admin zoning gt zoning save 59263 01 A XKX 7 Zoning Configuration QLOGIC Managing Zone Sets gt Delete a Zone Set Enter the Zoneset Delete command to delete a zone set as shown in the following exa
355. uptive to the administration or operation of a fabric and require administrator intervention Alarms are always logged and always displayed on the screen 14 104 59263 01 A XX 14 Command Reference QLOGIC Set Pagebreak Set Pagebreak Specifies how much information is displayed on the screen at a time This command is useful for disabling pagebreaks to allow command scripts to run without interruption Authority None Syntax pagebreak state Keywords state state can be one of the following on Limits the display of information to 20 lines at a time The page break function affects the following commands Alias List Members m Show Alarm Log Test Log m Zone List Members m Zoneset List Zones m Zoning Active List off Allows continuous display of information without a break This is the default 59263 01 A 14 105 14 Command Reference XX Set Pagebreak QLOGIC ee Examples The following is an example of the Set Pagebreak command SANbox gt set pagebreak on SANbox gt zone list zone ZoneSet Zonel alpha beta Zone2 delta echo Zone3 sierra tango Zone4 gamma delta Press any key to continue q to quit 14 106 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Set Port ee Set Port Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Sets port state and speed for the specified port temporarily until the next switch reset or new configuration activation
356. ve and activate this snmp setup y n n y 13 6 59263 01 A 13 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuration Managing the SNMP Version 3 Configuration XX QLOGIC o Create an SNMP Version 3 User Account To create an SNMP version 3 user account enter the Snmpv3user Add command as shown in the following example SANbox gt admin start SANbox admin gt snmpv3user add A list of SNMPV3 user attributes with formatting and default values as applicable will follow Enter a new value OR simply press the ENTER key where ever allowed to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER OR Ctrl C key to do so Username 8 32 chars snmpuserl Group 0O ReadOnly 1 ReadWrite ReadOnly gt I Authentication True False False KE AuthType 1 MD5 2 SHA MD5 a N AuthPhrase 8 32 chars BEER EERE Confirm AuthPhrase Sy ea ener Privacy True False False ae a PrivType 1 DES DES sak PrivPhrase 8 32 chars SE REER tee cate Confirm PrivPhrase Sh era eee ee Do you want to save and activate this snmpv3user setup y n n y SNMPV3 user added and activated Display SNMP Version 3 User Accounts To display SNMP version 3 user accounts enter the Snmpv3user List command as shown in the following example SANbox gt snmpv3user list Username AuthType PrivType snmpuserl ReadWrite MD5 DES 59263 01 A 13 7
357. y a Ipsec Policy Authority Syntax Keywords 59263 01 A Manages policies in the Security Policy database Admin session and an Ipsec Edit session ipsec policy copy policy_source policy_destination create policy delete policy edit policy list option rename policy_old policy_new copy policy_source policy_destination Creates a new policy named policy_destination and copies the configuration into it from the policy given by policy_source You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes policy_destination must not begin with DynamicSP_ which is reserved for dynamic policies create policy Creates a policy with the name given by policy A policy name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 32 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and The Security Policy database supports a maximum of 128 user defined policies You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes Table 14 7 describes the policy parameters Table 14 7 Policy Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Description Description of the policy SourceAddress IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the host switch or gateway from which data originates SourcePort Source port number 1 65535 DestinationAddress IP address version 4 or 6 or DNS host name of the host switch or gateway receiving data If you specified an IP address for the Sour
358. y m AH Authentication Header m ESP Encapsulating Security Payload E Both Apply both AH and ESP protection Rule level to apply for AH protection E Default use the system wide default for the protocol m Use use a security association if one is available m Require a security association is required whenever a packet is sent that is matched with the policy 14 54 59263 01 A XX QLOGIC 14 Command Reference Ipsec Policy OOO a 59263 01 A Table 14 7 Policy Configuration Parameters Parameter Description espRuleLevel Rule level to apply for ESP protection E Default use the system wide default for the protocol m Use use a security association if one is available E Redquire a security association is required whenever a packet is sent that is matched with the policy delete policy Deletes the policy given by policy from the Security Policy database You must enter the Ipsec Save command afterwards to save your changes edit policy Opens an edit session in which to change the configuration of an existing policy given by policy list option Displays the configuration for the policies given by option If you omit option the command displays the configuration of all active policies option can be one of the following policy Displays the configuration for the policy given by policy active Displays the configuration for all active policies configured Displays the

Q-Logic 5600 Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents